<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Joel</id>
	<title>NEOSYS User Support Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Joel"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Special:Contributions/Joel"/>
	<updated>2026-05-27T21:09:06Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.3</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Configuring_Document_Footers&amp;diff=7432</id>
		<title>Configuring Document Footers</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Configuring_Document_Footers&amp;diff=7432"/>
		<updated>2025-07-03T05:54:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Booking Orders */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Configuring Document Footers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of macro variables available ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following codes are available:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*%USERNAME% - of the user who created the document&lt;br /&gt;
*%EMAIL% - of the user&lt;br /&gt;
*%SIGNATURE% - shows the image file uploaded for the users signature if any&lt;br /&gt;
*%USERCODE% - of the user who created the document &lt;br /&gt;
*%AGENCY% - the &amp;quot;client mark&amp;quot; usually an abbreviated version of the NEOSYS licenced company name. Not client configurable. Refer [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Generally#Configuring Client Security mark|Configuring Client Security mark]]. The client security mark shouldn&#039;t be used as company name as %AGENCY% may be present in many other configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
*%COMPANY% - company name taken from the Company File. While configuring footer for invoices of a company, use %COMPANY% instead of %AGENCY%, since %AGENCY% is the client security mark which is common to all or most companies in an installation. &lt;br /&gt;
*%COMPANYCODE% - from the Company File. Useful for configuring logo per company/division (e.g. src=%COMPANYCODE%logo.jpg)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*%DATE% - normally the date the document was actually created (user&#039;s local date)&lt;br /&gt;
*%TIME% - similar to date&lt;br /&gt;
*%STATION% - usually IP number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following obsolete codes are also supported for backward compatibility but should be replaced by the newer forms above where-ever possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*%USER&lt;br /&gt;
*%USERNAME&lt;br /&gt;
*%AGENCY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below screenshots show an example of how the available macros can be used in the invoice footer in System Configuration File and how they appear on the invoice output.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:footer1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:footer2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring Document Footers with a Company Stamp/Signature (JPEG image) === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Location of JPEG Images for Company Stamp/Signature ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the JPEG image is located in the neosys/data/xxx folder (where &amp;quot;xxx&amp;quot; is the database code) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Single Company Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Invoice footer =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Media / Job Configuration File, Scroll down to the Invoice Footer field under the Invoicing section and add the script &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;img src = imagename.jpg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/img&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;quot;imagename.jpg&amp;quot; is the name of the JPEG image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; While reprinting invoices, footers remain as they were when the invoice was created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Booking Orders =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;Media Types File&amp;quot;, add a new line in the &amp;quot;Order Footer&amp;quot; and add the script &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;img src = imagename.jpg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/img&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;quot;imagename.jpg&amp;quot; is the name of the JPEG image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Company Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Invoice footer =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Media / Job Configuration File, Scroll down to the Invoice Footer field under the Invoicing section and add the script &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;img src = imagename%COMPANYCODE%.jpg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/img&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;imagename%COMPANYCODE%&amp;quot; will be converted to &amp;quot;imagenameXYZ&amp;quot; where &amp;quot;XYZ&amp;quot; stands for the company code in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Booking Orders =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;Media Types File&amp;quot;, add a new line in the &amp;quot;Order Footer&amp;quot; and add the script &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;img src = imagename%COMPANYCODE%.jpg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/img&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;imagename%COMPANYCODE%&amp;quot; will be converted to &amp;quot;imagenameXYZ&amp;quot; where &amp;quot;XYZ&amp;quot; stands for the company code in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring Personal Signatures (JPEG image) to appear on Document Footers ===&lt;br /&gt;
Users can configure their personal signatures on the USER FILE by uploading a JPEG image of their signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such signatures will be inserted below any &amp;quot;%USERNAME%&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;%USER&amp;quot; code configured in document footings unless %SIGNATURE%, %NOSIGNATURE% or another image is configured in the footing. This feature can be suppressed and controlled in the System Configuration File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[System_Configuration_File#Style Signature setting in System Configuration File]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:user1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse for the required file and click on upload: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:user2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the desired file is uploaded successfully, a file upload summary would be displayed as follows : &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:user3.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Once you close the file upload summary, you would see a preview of the uploaded JPEG image. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:user4.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#If you would like to delete the uploaded image, click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the uploaded image with a new one, you may simply click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and upload a new image which would overwrite the previous one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General Guidelines for uploading Signature Image Files ====&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure that the signature appears correctly on NEOSYS documents, the following guidelines must be followed:&lt;br /&gt;
#Signature image files should be scanned at 96 dpi for proper alignment on documents&lt;br /&gt;
#Avoid margins / white spaces around the image i.e. the free blank space around the signature should be cropped out using MS Paint or similar software&lt;br /&gt;
#Signatures do not have to be top quality like logos so if you can get an acceptable quality by any means then you could go ahead. e.g if the Client sends it as a pdf file, take its screenshot and save as JPEG file making sure it does not hamper the quality of the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Procedure for cropping signature image files in Microsoft Paint ====&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Signature image file in Paint. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;( &#039;&#039;Right click on the image file&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Open with&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Paint&#039;&#039; ) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:mspaint-1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Select Button and select the &amp;quot;Rectangular Selection&amp;quot; option &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:mspaint-2.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Using the mouse pointer, select only the signature part of the image avoiding unnecessary white spaces and click on CROP &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:mspaint-3.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Now, click on Resize -&amp;gt; Pixels and enter the appropriate dimensions and click on OK &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:mspaint-3b.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Save the image (Control + S)&lt;br /&gt;
#Exit Paint application&lt;br /&gt;
#Open/View the image. It should be cropped now : &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:mspaint-final.jpg|frame|left|Cropped Signature Image File]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Configuring_Document_Footers&amp;diff=7431</id>
		<title>Configuring Document Footers</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Configuring_Document_Footers&amp;diff=7431"/>
		<updated>2025-07-03T05:53:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Booking Orders */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Configuring Document Footers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of macro variables available ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following codes are available:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*%USERNAME% - of the user who created the document&lt;br /&gt;
*%EMAIL% - of the user&lt;br /&gt;
*%SIGNATURE% - shows the image file uploaded for the users signature if any&lt;br /&gt;
*%USERCODE% - of the user who created the document &lt;br /&gt;
*%AGENCY% - the &amp;quot;client mark&amp;quot; usually an abbreviated version of the NEOSYS licenced company name. Not client configurable. Refer [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Generally#Configuring Client Security mark|Configuring Client Security mark]]. The client security mark shouldn&#039;t be used as company name as %AGENCY% may be present in many other configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
*%COMPANY% - company name taken from the Company File. While configuring footer for invoices of a company, use %COMPANY% instead of %AGENCY%, since %AGENCY% is the client security mark which is common to all or most companies in an installation. &lt;br /&gt;
*%COMPANYCODE% - from the Company File. Useful for configuring logo per company/division (e.g. src=%COMPANYCODE%logo.jpg)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*%DATE% - normally the date the document was actually created (user&#039;s local date)&lt;br /&gt;
*%TIME% - similar to date&lt;br /&gt;
*%STATION% - usually IP number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following obsolete codes are also supported for backward compatibility but should be replaced by the newer forms above where-ever possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*%USER&lt;br /&gt;
*%USERNAME&lt;br /&gt;
*%AGENCY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below screenshots show an example of how the available macros can be used in the invoice footer in System Configuration File and how they appear on the invoice output.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:footer1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:footer2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring Document Footers with a Company Stamp/Signature (JPEG image) === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Location of JPEG Images for Company Stamp/Signature ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the JPEG image is located in the neosys/data/xxx folder (where &amp;quot;xxx&amp;quot; is the database code) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Single Company Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Invoice footer =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Media / Job Configuration File, Scroll down to the Invoice Footer field under the Invoicing section and add the script &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;img src = imagename.jpg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/img&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;quot;imagename.jpg&amp;quot; is the name of the JPEG image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; While reprinting invoices, footers remain as they were when the invoice was created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Booking Orders =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;Media Types File&amp;quot;, add a new line in the &amp;quot;Order Footer&amp;quot; and add the script &lt;br /&gt;
MEDIAWIKI TEST, WILL BE DELETED&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;img src = imagename.jpg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/img&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;quot;imagename.jpg&amp;quot; is the name of the JPEG image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Company Installation ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Invoice footer =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Media / Job Configuration File, Scroll down to the Invoice Footer field under the Invoicing section and add the script &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;img src = imagename%COMPANYCODE%.jpg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/img&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;imagename%COMPANYCODE%&amp;quot; will be converted to &amp;quot;imagenameXYZ&amp;quot; where &amp;quot;XYZ&amp;quot; stands for the company code in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Booking Orders =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;Media Types File&amp;quot;, add a new line in the &amp;quot;Order Footer&amp;quot; and add the script &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;img src = imagename%COMPANYCODE%.jpg&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/img&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
and &amp;quot;imagename%COMPANYCODE%&amp;quot; will be converted to &amp;quot;imagenameXYZ&amp;quot; where &amp;quot;XYZ&amp;quot; stands for the company code in capitals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring Personal Signatures (JPEG image) to appear on Document Footers ===&lt;br /&gt;
Users can configure their personal signatures on the USER FILE by uploading a JPEG image of their signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such signatures will be inserted below any &amp;quot;%USERNAME%&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;%USER&amp;quot; code configured in document footings unless %SIGNATURE%, %NOSIGNATURE% or another image is configured in the footing. This feature can be suppressed and controlled in the System Configuration File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[System_Configuration_File#Style Signature setting in System Configuration File]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:user1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse for the required file and click on upload: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:user2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the desired file is uploaded successfully, a file upload summary would be displayed as follows : &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:user3.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Once you close the file upload summary, you would see a preview of the uploaded JPEG image. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:user4.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#If you would like to delete the uploaded image, click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the uploaded image with a new one, you may simply click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and upload a new image which would overwrite the previous one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General Guidelines for uploading Signature Image Files ====&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure that the signature appears correctly on NEOSYS documents, the following guidelines must be followed:&lt;br /&gt;
#Signature image files should be scanned at 96 dpi for proper alignment on documents&lt;br /&gt;
#Avoid margins / white spaces around the image i.e. the free blank space around the signature should be cropped out using MS Paint or similar software&lt;br /&gt;
#Signatures do not have to be top quality like logos so if you can get an acceptable quality by any means then you could go ahead. e.g if the Client sends it as a pdf file, take its screenshot and save as JPEG file making sure it does not hamper the quality of the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Procedure for cropping signature image files in Microsoft Paint ====&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Signature image file in Paint. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;( &#039;&#039;Right click on the image file&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Open with&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Paint&#039;&#039; ) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:mspaint-1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Select Button and select the &amp;quot;Rectangular Selection&amp;quot; option &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:mspaint-2.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Using the mouse pointer, select only the signature part of the image avoiding unnecessary white spaces and click on CROP &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:mspaint-3.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Now, click on Resize -&amp;gt; Pixels and enter the appropriate dimensions and click on OK &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:mspaint-3b.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Save the image (Control + S)&lt;br /&gt;
#Exit Paint application&lt;br /&gt;
#Open/View the image. It should be cropped now : &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:mspaint-final.jpg|frame|left|Cropped Signature Image File]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=7430</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=7430"/>
		<updated>2025-07-03T05:52:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;This is NEOSYS User Support Wiki.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[General FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Agency FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Job FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Finance FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Timesheet FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sales FAQ ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Using NEOSYS Generally]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Using NEOSYS Agency System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Using NEOSYS Media System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Using NEOSYS Job System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Using NEOSYS Finance System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Using NEOSYS Timesheets System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Generally]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Agency System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Job System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Finance System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Timesheets System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Troubleshooting NEOSYS Generally]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Troubleshooting NEOSYS Agency System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Troubleshooting NEOSYS Media System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Troubleshooting NEOSYS Job System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Troubleshooting NEOSYS Finance System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Troubleshooting NEOSYS Timesheets system]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reference==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section is not complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Media Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The media module in NEOSYS is used for planning, scheduling, booking and invoicing advertisements in broadcast, press, outdoor and interactive media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Job Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Job is used for BTL advertising, a job file consists detailed information about the job. Information such as the client, brand, market, bill and cost, etc. is mentioned in the job file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Analysis Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View, edit and run Media and Billing Analysis reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Finance Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Support Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Help Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[NEOSYS General User Interface]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Others==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Remote assistance using Teamviewer]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Obsolete2.jpg&amp;diff=7428</id>
		<title>File:Obsolete2.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Obsolete2.jpg&amp;diff=7428"/>
		<updated>2025-05-26T13:43:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: Joel uploaded a new version of File:Obsolete2.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Obsolete2.jpg&amp;diff=7427</id>
		<title>File:Obsolete2.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Obsolete2.jpg&amp;diff=7427"/>
		<updated>2025-05-26T13:41:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: Joel uploaded a new version of File:Obsolete2.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Obsolete1.jpg&amp;diff=7426</id>
		<title>File:Obsolete1.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Obsolete1.jpg&amp;diff=7426"/>
		<updated>2025-05-26T13:40:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: Joel uploaded a new version of File:Obsolete1.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Client_%26_Brand_File&amp;diff=7415</id>
		<title>Client &amp; Brand File</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Client_%26_Brand_File&amp;diff=7415"/>
		<updated>2025-02-07T06:50:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:Client&amp;amp;brandfile.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Client Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Code==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter existing client code or create a new one by entering a new client code in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Codes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Name==== &lt;br /&gt;
Client Name as you want it to appear on all documents and reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the client record is linked to an account in the finance module the client name on the invoice appears as the name of the account to which it is linked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Stopped====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Stop(reason)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Address==== &lt;br /&gt;
The client address as as you want it to appear on all documents issued to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Invoice To ====&lt;br /&gt;
Open linked address file. If nothing linked yet, then will create a new Address file with the same code as the Client code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Market Code====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the code of the market to which the client belongs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This applies to all the brands under the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Executive====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the person handling the client account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Executive field in the media schedule automatically shows this name when the client is selected. This executive name will also apply to all the brands in the client record provided the executive field in the brands line is vacant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Executives that have been inactive for some time (default one year) are suppressed from popups when creating new documents. When searching or reporting however, since you may be searching or reporting on old transactions, inactive executives are still shown on popups but are clearly separated from active executives and the date they were last active is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Group 1 and 2====&lt;br /&gt;
Client Group fields present in the Client and Brand file are used to classify clients according to industry, organsisation size and/or parent company etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Agency_FAQ#How_do_I_classify_clients_based_on_industry_or_parent_company.3F | How to classify clients based on industry or parent company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Type====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;Direct&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;Display the name of the brand as well as the client on booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;Agency&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;Display the name of the advertised brand on the booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many agencies make book ads with a vehicle supplier through another media agency or an MBU (media buying unit). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets assume Agency1 makes a booking with a supplier through Agency2. In this case Agency1 serves as a client to Agency2. It is possible when Agency2 issues a booking order to a supplier it does not want Agency1&#039;s name to appear on the order. NEOSYS allows Agency2 to choose whether or not they want the client name(Agency1) to appear on the booking orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Language ====&lt;br /&gt;
Option to choose specific language for a client. This will reflect on all documents related to this client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Client Accounting===&lt;br /&gt;
====Client A/c No.====&lt;br /&gt;
In the finance module, enter the account code of the client as in the trade debtors chart of accounts to record client&#039;s financial transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clients name on the invoice appears as the name of the account to which it is linked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If not linked to any account the client name on the invoice appears as entered in the client and brand record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sundry Client====&lt;br /&gt;
Timesheet details are required when the client is marked as a SUNDRY client. Which means that the NEOSYS “client” isn’t a real client but a generic “bag” for lots of one-off or petty clients who we do not wish to open full client records for. On such a “client” record, the brands can be clients or the client name must be entered on all transactions for this “client”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option must be UNCHECKED for all real clients. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Invoice Currency====&lt;br /&gt;
Default invoice currency for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Currency field in the media schedule is updated automatically with the currency entered here when the concerned client/brand is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Show exchange rates====&lt;br /&gt;
This option applies exclusively to Media module invoices and does not affect Job module invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this option to display the exchange rates between vehicle currencies and the bill currency on media invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The exchange rates are displayed under the invoice amount in words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default this exchange rate is not displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Billing group ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can group billings of different clients using this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Consider, client &#039;A&#039; uses client a/c &#039;X&#039;. If you enter &#039;A&#039; in the billing group of client &#039;B&#039;, then they use the same a/c &#039;X&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Show disc/charges as ====&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;As entered&#039; if you wish to change the default option of showing disc/charges as amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Digital invoice (Electronically Stamped invoices) ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some clients may require electronically stamped invoices that do not require the default signature field at the bottom of documents like invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use this option, you must make sure the &#039;Stamp&#039; field in the Company file has been configured with a stamp image and footer text. (Shown below)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Companystamp.png.png|left|thumb|780x780px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this option is selected, any documents generated for this client will print the stamp and footer at the bottom of invoices and ignore any default invoice footers configured in the Media/Jobs configuration file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Exchange rates====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define exchange rates between the client&#039;s default invoice currency and possible suppliers (i.e vehicle) booking currencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terms of Payment====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the terms of payment for the client which reflects on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Example: This Invoice will be considered correct unless notice of exception is received by us within 15 days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this field is vacant the invoice will show the Terms of payment as entered on the company record in the Company file.&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally#Specifying_Payment_Terms_on_Invoices| Specifying Payment Terms on Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Payment Instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the payment instructions for the client to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  For eg. &lt;br /&gt;
  Account name - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
  Account no.  - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
  Bank name    - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally#Configuring_Payment_Instructions| Configuring Payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Income Sharing====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explanation for[[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Income_Sharing | Income Sharing]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter company income should be shared with when using this client.&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the % used on the Fee amount on the Media Vehicle bill line.&lt;br /&gt;
TODO: Other client pending explanation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Alias codes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Agency_FAQ#What_are_alias_codes_in_NEOSYS.3F| What are alias codes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Brands===&lt;br /&gt;
Brands follow a coding system similar to the client coding. We can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a brand by entering the brand code.&lt;br /&gt;
#Move a brand that currently exists in another client record by entering its code.&lt;br /&gt;
#Brands can be conveniently added or removed by inserting or deleting lines respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;List&amp;quot; button lists the brands of the current client if a client record is open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a brand is currently being used in a media schedule it cannot be modified or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Code====&lt;br /&gt;
Specify the code allocated to the brand. (&#039;&#039;&#039;This field is mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Name====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the brand as it should appear on all documents issued from NEOSYS. (&#039;&#039;&#039;This field is mandatory.&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brands can be blocked from being used on new or existing documents using this field. This is done by adding the phrase (stop), including the brackets, to the brand name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A useful feature for clients that have multilevel brands/products is that they can enter product names indented with leading spaces under brand names without leading spaces. This results in the list initially showing only the top level brands. Lower level brands and products can be viewed by clicking the appropriate icon or keyboard shortcut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Media FAQ#How do I enter multilevel clients and brands in the Client and Brand File.3F|How to enter multilevel brands]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====A/c No.====&lt;br /&gt;
In the finance module, enter the client&#039;s account no. in the trade debtors chart of accounts to record client&#039;s financial transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This need not be entered if the client account number is same as the brand account number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Executive====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the person handling the brand account. The Executive field in the media schedule automatically shows this name when this brand is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This need not be entered if the executive handling the client is similar to the one handling the brand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Product Category====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the category to which the brand belongs,eg. automobiles, cosmetics, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Product Categories File]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General Categories ====&lt;br /&gt;
An extension of Product Category. Option to assign multiple Product Categories per brand in addition to the category entered in the Product Category field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saved in the format of &amp;quot;A,B,C,D&amp;quot;. Enter as many codes as you like but separated by commas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All categories entered here are treated as just another Product Category i.e. no one category takes precedence over the others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When filtering reports by Product Category, you can search by any number of product categories which will find brands that have even one of those categories configured.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Companystamp.png.png&amp;diff=7414</id>
		<title>File:Companystamp.png.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Companystamp.png.png&amp;diff=7414"/>
		<updated>2025-02-07T06:38:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;digital invoice footer field in company file&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Client_%26_Brand_File&amp;diff=7413</id>
		<title>Client &amp; Brand File</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Client_%26_Brand_File&amp;diff=7413"/>
		<updated>2025-02-07T06:17:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:Client&amp;amp;brandfile.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Client Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Code==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter existing client code or create a new one by entering a new client code in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Codes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Name==== &lt;br /&gt;
Client Name as you want it to appear on all documents and reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the client record is linked to an account in the finance module the client name on the invoice appears as the name of the account to which it is linked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Stopped====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Stop(reason)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Address==== &lt;br /&gt;
The client address as as you want it to appear on all documents issued to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Invoice To ====&lt;br /&gt;
Open linked address file. If nothing linked yet, then will create a new Address file with the same code as the Client code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Market Code====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the code of the market to which the client belongs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This applies to all the brands under the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Executive====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the person handling the client account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Executive field in the media schedule automatically shows this name when the client is selected. This executive name will also apply to all the brands in the client record provided the executive field in the brands line is vacant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Executives that have been inactive for some time (default one year) are suppressed from popups when creating new documents. When searching or reporting however, since you may be searching or reporting on old transactions, inactive executives are still shown on popups but are clearly separated from active executives and the date they were last active is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Group 1 and 2====&lt;br /&gt;
Client Group fields present in the Client and Brand file are used to classify clients according to industry, organsisation size and/or parent company etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Agency_FAQ#How_do_I_classify_clients_based_on_industry_or_parent_company.3F | How to classify clients based on industry or parent company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Type====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;Direct&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;Display the name of the brand as well as the client on booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;Agency&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;Display the name of the advertised brand on the booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many agencies make book ads with a vehicle supplier through another media agency or an MBU (media buying unit). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets assume Agency1 makes a booking with a supplier through Agency2. In this case Agency1 serves as a client to Agency2. It is possible when Agency2 issues a booking order to a supplier it does not want Agency1&#039;s name to appear on the order. NEOSYS allows Agency2 to choose whether or not they want the client name(Agency1) to appear on the booking orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Client Accounting===&lt;br /&gt;
====Client A/c No.====&lt;br /&gt;
In the finance module, enter the account code of the client as in the trade debtors chart of accounts to record client&#039;s financial transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clients name on the invoice appears as the name of the account to which it is linked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If not linked to any account the client name on the invoice appears as entered in the client and brand record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sundry Client====&lt;br /&gt;
Timesheet details are required when the client is marked as a SUNDRY client. Which means that the NEOSYS “client” isn’t a real client but a generic “bag” for lots of one-off or petty clients who we do not wish to open full client records for. On such a “client” record, the brands can be clients or the client name must be entered on all transactions for this “client”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below you see an incorrect use of the checkbox for a real client. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:sundry.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Invoice Currency====&lt;br /&gt;
Default invoice currency for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Currency field in the media schedule is updated automatically with the currency entered here when the concerned client/brand is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Show exchange rates====&lt;br /&gt;
This option applies exclusively to Media module invoices and does not affect Job module invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this option to display the exchange rates between vehicle currencies and the bill currency on media invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The exchange rates are displayed under the invoice amount in words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default this exchange rate is not displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Exchange rates====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define exchange rates between the client&#039;s default invoice currency and possible suppliers (i.e vehicle) booking currencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terms of Payment====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the terms of payment for the client which reflects on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Example: This Invoice will be considered correct unless notice of exception is received by us within 15 days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this field is vacant the invoice will show the Terms of payment as entered on the company record in the Company file.&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally#Specifying_Payment_Terms_on_Invoices| Specifying Payment Terms on Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Payment Instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the payment instructions for the client to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  For eg. &lt;br /&gt;
  Account name - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
  Account no.  - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
  Bank name    - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally#Configuring_Payment_Instructions| Configuring Payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Income Sharing====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explanation for[[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Income_Sharing | Income Sharing]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter company income should be shared with when using this client.&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the % used on the Fee amount on the Media Vehicle bill line.&lt;br /&gt;
TODO: Other client pending explanation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Alias codes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Agency_FAQ#What_are_alias_codes_in_NEOSYS.3F| What are alias codes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Brands===&lt;br /&gt;
Brands follow a coding system similar to the client coding. We can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a brand by entering the brand code.&lt;br /&gt;
#Move a brand that currently exists in another client record by entering its code.&lt;br /&gt;
#Brands can be conveniently added or removed by inserting or deleting lines respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;List&amp;quot; button lists the brands of the current client if a client record is open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a brand is currently being used in a media schedule it cannot be modified or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Code====&lt;br /&gt;
Specify the code allocated to the brand. (&#039;&#039;&#039;This field is mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Name====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the brand as it should appear on all documents issued from NEOSYS. (&#039;&#039;&#039;This field is mandatory.&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brands can be blocked from being used on new or existing documents using this field. This is done by adding the phrase (stop), including the brackets, to the brand name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A useful feature for clients that have multilevel brands/products is that they can enter product names indented with leading spaces under brand names without leading spaces. This results in the list initially showing only the top level brands. Lower level brands and products can be viewed by clicking the appropriate icon or keyboard shortcut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Media FAQ#How do I enter multilevel clients and brands in the Client and Brand File.3F|How to enter multilevel brands]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====A/c No.====&lt;br /&gt;
In the finance module, enter the client&#039;s account no. in the trade debtors chart of accounts to record client&#039;s financial transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This need not be entered if the client account number is same as the brand account number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Executive====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the person handling the brand account. The Executive field in the media schedule automatically shows this name when this brand is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This need not be entered if the executive handling the client is similar to the one handling the brand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Product Category====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the category to which the brand belongs,eg. automobiles, cosmetics, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Product Categories File]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Client_%26_Brand_File&amp;diff=7412</id>
		<title>Client &amp; Brand File</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Client_%26_Brand_File&amp;diff=7412"/>
		<updated>2025-02-07T05:59:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:Client&amp;amp;brandfile.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Client Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Code==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter existing client code or create a new one by entering a new client code in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Codes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Name==== &lt;br /&gt;
Client Name as you want it to appear on all documents and reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the client record is linked to an account in the finance module the client name on the invoice appears as the name of the account to which it is linked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Stopped====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Stop(reason)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Address==== &lt;br /&gt;
The client address as as you want it to appear on all documents issued to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Market Code====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the code of the market to which the client belongs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This applies to all the brands under the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Executive====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the person handling the client account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Executive field in the media schedule automatically shows this name when the client is selected. This executive name will also apply to all the brands in the client record provided the executive field in the brands line is vacant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Executives that have been inactive for some time (default one year) are suppressed from popups when creating new documents. When searching or reporting however, since you may be searching or reporting on old transactions, inactive executives are still shown on popups but are clearly separated from active executives and the date they were last active is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Group 1 and 2====&lt;br /&gt;
Client Group fields present in the Client and Brand file are used to classify clients according to industry, organsisation size and/or parent company etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Agency_FAQ#How_do_I_classify_clients_based_on_industry_or_parent_company.3F | How to classify clients based on industry or parent company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Type====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;Direct&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;Display the name of the brand as well as the client on booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;Agency&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;Display the name of the advertised brand on the booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many agencies make book ads with a vehicle supplier through another media agency or an MBU (media buying unit). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets assume Agency1 makes a booking with a supplier through Agency2. In this case Agency1 serves as a client to Agency2. It is possible when Agency2 issues a booking order to a supplier it does not want Agency1&#039;s name to appear on the order. NEOSYS allows Agency2 to choose whether or not they want the client name(Agency1) to appear on the booking orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Client Accounting===&lt;br /&gt;
====Client A/c No.====&lt;br /&gt;
In the finance module, enter the account code of the client as in the trade debtors chart of accounts to record client&#039;s financial transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clients name on the invoice appears as the name of the account to which it is linked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If not linked to any account the client name on the invoice appears as entered in the client and brand record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sundry Client====&lt;br /&gt;
Timesheet details are required when the client is marked as a SUNDRY client. Which means that the NEOSYS “client” isn’t a real client but a generic “bag” for lots of one-off or petty clients who we do not wish to open full client records for. On such a “client” record, the brands can be clients or the client name must be entered on all transactions for this “client”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below you see an incorrect use of the checkbox for a real client. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:sundry.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Invoice Currency====&lt;br /&gt;
Default invoice currency for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Currency field in the media schedule is updated automatically with the currency entered here when the concerned client/brand is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Show exchange rates====&lt;br /&gt;
This option applies exclusively to Media module invoices and does not affect Job module invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this option to display the exchange rates between vehicle currencies and the bill currency on media invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The exchange rates are displayed under the invoice amount in words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default this exchange rate is not displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Exchange rates====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define exchange rates between the client&#039;s default invoice currency and possible suppliers (i.e vehicle) booking currencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terms of Payment====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the terms of payment for the client which reflects on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Example: This Invoice will be considered correct unless notice of exception is received by us within 15 days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this field is vacant the invoice will show the Terms of payment as entered on the company record in the Company file.&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally#Specifying_Payment_Terms_on_Invoices| Specifying Payment Terms on Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Payment Instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the payment instructions for the client to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  For eg. &lt;br /&gt;
  Account name - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
  Account no.  - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
  Bank name    - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally#Configuring_Payment_Instructions| Configuring Payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Income Sharing====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explanation for[[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Income_Sharing | Income Sharing]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter company income should be shared with when using this client.&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the % used on the Fee amount on the Media Vehicle bill line.&lt;br /&gt;
TODO: Other client pending explanation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Alias codes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Agency_FAQ#What_are_alias_codes_in_NEOSYS.3F| What are alias codes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Brands===&lt;br /&gt;
Brands follow a coding system similar to the client coding. We can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a brand by entering the brand code.&lt;br /&gt;
#Move a brand that currently exists in another client record by entering its code.&lt;br /&gt;
#Brands can be conveniently added or removed by inserting or deleting lines respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;List&amp;quot; button lists the brands of the current client if a client record is open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a brand is currently being used in a media schedule it cannot be modified or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Code====&lt;br /&gt;
Specify the code allocated to the brand. (&#039;&#039;&#039;This field is mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Name====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the brand as it should appear on all documents issued from NEOSYS. (&#039;&#039;&#039;This field is mandatory.&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brands can be blocked from being used on new or existing documents using this field. This is done by adding the phrase (stop), including the brackets, to the brand name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A useful feature for clients that have multilevel brands/products is that they can enter product names indented with leading spaces under brand names without leading spaces. This results in the list initially showing only the top level brands. Lower level brands and products can be viewed by clicking the appropriate icon or keyboard shortcut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Media FAQ#How do I enter multilevel clients and brands in the Client and Brand File.3F|How to enter multilevel brands]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====A/c No.====&lt;br /&gt;
In the finance module, enter the client&#039;s account no. in the trade debtors chart of accounts to record client&#039;s financial transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This need not be entered if the client account number is same as the brand account number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Executive====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the person handling the brand account. The Executive field in the media schedule automatically shows this name when this brand is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This need not be entered if the executive handling the client is similar to the one handling the brand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Product Category====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the category to which the brand belongs,eg. automobiles, cosmetics, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Product Categories File]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Client_%26_Brand_File&amp;diff=7411</id>
		<title>Client &amp; Brand File</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Client_%26_Brand_File&amp;diff=7411"/>
		<updated>2025-02-07T05:54:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:Client&amp;amp;brandfile.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Client Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Code==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter existing client code or create a new one by entering a new client code in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Codes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Name==== &lt;br /&gt;
Client Name as you want it to appear on all documents and reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the client record is linked to an account in the finance module the client name on the invoice appears as the name of the account to which it is linked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Stopped====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Stop(reason)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Address==== &lt;br /&gt;
The client address as as you want it to appear on all documents issued to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Market Code====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the code of the market to which the client belongs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This applies to all the brands under the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Executive====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the person handling the client account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Executive field in the media schedule automatically shows this name when the client is selected. This executive name will also apply to all the brands in the client record provided the executive field in the brands line is vacant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Executives that have been inactive for some time (default one year) are suppressed from popups when creating new documents. When searching or reporting however, since you may be searching or reporting on old transactions, inactive executives are still shown on popups but are clearly separated from active executives and the date they were last active is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Client Group 1 and 2====&lt;br /&gt;
Client Group fields present in the Client and Brand file are used to classify clients according to industry, organsisation size and/or parent company etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Agency_FAQ#How_do_I_classify_clients_based_on_industry_or_parent_company.3F | How to classify clients based on industry or parent company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Type====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;Direct&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;Display the name of the brand as well as the client on booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;Agency&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;Display the name of the advertised brand on the booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many agencies make book ads with a vehicle supplier through another media agency or an MBU (media buying unit). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lets assume Agency1 makes a booking with a supplier through Agency2. In this case Agency1 serves as a client to Agency2. It is possible when Agency2 issues a booking order to a supplier it does not want Agency1&#039;s name to appear on the order. NEOSYS allows Agency2 to choose whether or not they want the client name(Agency1) to appear on the booking orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Client Accounting===&lt;br /&gt;
====Client A/c No.====&lt;br /&gt;
In the finance module, enter the account code of the client as in the trade debtors chart of accounts to record client&#039;s financial transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clients name on the invoice appears as the name of the account to which it is linked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If not linked to any account the client name on the invoice appears as entered in the client and brand record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sundry Client====&lt;br /&gt;
Timesheet details are required when the client is marked as a SUNDRY client. Which means that the NEOSYS “client” isn’t a real client but a generic “bag” for lots of one-off or petty clients who we do not wish to open full client records for. On such a “client” record, the brands can be clients or the client name must be entered on all transactions for this “client”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below you see an incorrect use of the checkbox for a real client. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:sundry.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Invoice Currency====&lt;br /&gt;
Default invoice currency for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Currency field in the media schedule is updated automatically with the currency entered here when the concerned client/brand is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Show exchange rates====&lt;br /&gt;
This option applies exclusively to Media module invoices and does not affect Job module invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this option to display the exchange rates between vehicle currencies and the bill currency on media invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The exchange rates are displayed under the invoice amount in words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default this exchange rate is not displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Exchange rates====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define exchange rates between the client&#039;s default invoice currency and possible suppliers (i.e vehicle) booking currencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terms of Payment====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the terms of payment for the client which reflects on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Example: This Invoice will be considered correct unless notice of exception is received by us within 15 days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this field is vacant the invoice will show the Terms of payment as entered on the company record in the Company file.&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally#Specifying_Payment_Terms_on_Invoices| Specifying Payment Terms on Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Payment Instructions====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the payment instructions for the client to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  For eg. &lt;br /&gt;
  Account name - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
  Account no.  - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
  Bank name    - xxxx&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally#Configuring_Payment_Instructions| Configuring Payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Income Sharing====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explanation for[[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Income_Sharing | Income Sharing]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter company income should be shared with when using this client.&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the % used on the Fee amount on the Media Vehicle bill line.&lt;br /&gt;
TODO: Other client pending explanation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Alias codes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Agency_FAQ#What_are_alias_codes_in_NEOSYS.3F| What are alias codes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Brands===&lt;br /&gt;
Brands follow a coding system similar to the client coding. We can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a brand by entering the brand code.&lt;br /&gt;
#Move a brand that currently exists in another client record by entering its code.&lt;br /&gt;
#Brands can be conveniently added or removed by inserting or deleting lines respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;List&amp;quot; button lists the brands of the current client if a client record is open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a brand is currently being used in a media schedule it cannot be modified or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Code====&lt;br /&gt;
Specify the code allocated to the brand. (&#039;&#039;&#039;This field is mandatory&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Name====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the brand as it should appear on all documents issued from NEOSYS. (&#039;&#039;&#039;This field is mandatory.&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brands can be blocked from being used on new or existing documents using this field. This is done by adding the phrase (stop), including the brackets, to the brand name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A useful feature for clients that have multilevel brands/products is that they can enter product names indented with leading spaces under brand names without leading spaces. This results in the list initially showing only the top level brands. Lower level brands and products can be viewed by clicking the appropriate icon or keyboard shortcut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Media FAQ#How do I enter multilevel clients and brands in the Client and Brand File.3F|How to enter multilevel brands]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====A/c No.====&lt;br /&gt;
In the finance module, enter the client&#039;s account no. in the trade debtors chart of accounts to record client&#039;s financial transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This need not be entered if the client account number is same as the brand account number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Executive====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the person handling the brand account. The Executive field in the media schedule automatically shows this name when this brand is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This need not be entered if the executive handling the client is similar to the one handling the brand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Product Category====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the category to which the brand belongs,eg. automobiles, cosmetics, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Product Categories File]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Client%26brandfile.png&amp;diff=7410</id>
		<title>File:Client&amp;brandfile.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Client%26brandfile.png&amp;diff=7410"/>
		<updated>2025-02-07T05:54:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Configuring_Firefox&amp;diff=7407</id>
		<title>Configuring Firefox</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Configuring_Firefox&amp;diff=7407"/>
		<updated>2024-11-04T08:09:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Disabling Popup Blocker */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Configuring Firefox=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting browser to Factory settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users must ensure that [[Configuring_Firefox#Clearing_Cache | Clear Cache]] is done and [[ Configuring_Firefox#Disabling_Popup_Blocker |Popup Blocker]] is disabled once the browser is Reset to factory settings. After every Reset users must restart their browser for changes to take effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===For older versions of Firefox===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into your Home folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into the Library folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into the Application Support folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into the Firefox folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into the Profiles folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy contents of the profile folder to the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete contents of profile folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Run Firefox and it will be defaulted back to the original settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===For Firefox 13.0+===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Help&amp;gt; Troubleshooting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:rbf1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:rbf2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Clearing Cache==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 1===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear Cache}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ccf3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select &amp;quot;Clear Now&amp;quot; and then restart Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 2===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the screenshots below to do a Clear Cache in Firefox browser&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ccf1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ccf2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ccf4.png|alt=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Disabling Popup Blocker==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the screenshots below to Disable the Popup Blocker in Firefox. This is important to allow Neosys popups in the browser.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:pop_up_blocker.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Pop_up_blocker.png&amp;diff=7406</id>
		<title>File:Pop up blocker.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Pop_up_blocker.png&amp;diff=7406"/>
		<updated>2024-11-04T08:06:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Configuring_Firefox&amp;diff=7405</id>
		<title>Configuring Firefox</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Configuring_Firefox&amp;diff=7405"/>
		<updated>2024-11-04T08:00:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Disabling Popup Blocker */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Configuring Firefox=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting browser to Factory settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users must ensure that [[Configuring_Firefox#Clearing_Cache | Clear Cache]] is done and [[ Configuring_Firefox#Disabling_Popup_Blocker |Popup Blocker]] is disabled once the browser is Reset to factory settings. After every Reset users must restart their browser for changes to take effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===For older versions of Firefox===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into your Home folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into the Library folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into the Application Support folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into the Firefox folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Go into the Profiles folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy contents of the profile folder to the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete contents of profile folder&lt;br /&gt;
#Run Firefox and it will be defaulted back to the original settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===For Firefox 13.0+===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Help&amp;gt; Troubleshooting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:rbf1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:rbf2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Clearing Cache==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 1===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Clear Cache}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ccf3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select &amp;quot;Clear Now&amp;quot; and then restart Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 2===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the screenshots below to do a Clear Cache in Firefox browser&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ccf1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ccf2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ccf4.png|alt=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Disabling Popup Blocker==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the screenshots below to Disable the Popup Blocker in Firefox. This is important to allow Neosys popups in the browser.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:pop_up_disable.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Finance_FAQ&amp;diff=7355</id>
		<title>Finance FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Finance_FAQ&amp;diff=7355"/>
		<updated>2022-02-15T11:52:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* How to handle automatic journal entries missing because a user deleted them */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How do I allocate open item amounts in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===While entering a journal===&lt;br /&gt;
While entering a journal entry in the ALLOC VCHS Column hit F7 Key and it will pop-up list of allocatable items. Allocate the amount with the correct voucher no. and amount and click on OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===By Vouchers Allocation file===&lt;br /&gt;
Once the journal is posted without allocation you can only allocate from the Voucher Screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers Allocation. Enter the account number or hit the F7 key on the Selected Account(s) field and select the relevant account from the particular subsidiary chart. Click OK and the system will popup the Voucher Allocation page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account selected is a DEBITS outstanding type account (i.e. Trade Debtors), then all the allocable/unallocated CREDIT items (i.e. Receipts, Credit Notes etc.) will show up. Click on any item you wish to allocate Debit items against. After you click you will get a list of all DEBIT allocable/unallocated items which you can now select to be allocated against the CREDIT item you earlier selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Incase you have a selected a CREDITS outstanding type account (i.e. Trade Creditors), then the opposite happens i.e. DEBIT items show first (Payments, Debit Notes etc) and if you click on any of these items you can allocate them against CREDIT outstanding items. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For accounts that have neither CREDIT or DEBIT type selected, the CREDIT items show first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why can I not see ALL allocable items in the Allocation screen?===&lt;br /&gt;
Open item accounts with a lot of transactions might face this issue. The allocation screen cannot handle an unlimited number of entries so it shows the oldest first and omits the newest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I deallocate already allocated vouchers?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers file/Deallocation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile-deallocation.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the Journal type and enter the voucher number. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;As you enter the voucher number system will show the all the vouchers allocated on the bottom right to that voucher.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Deallocation button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile-deallocate.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the Vouchers you want to deallocate and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
#As you click OK system will reconfirm your move by giving a pop up &amp;quot;Ok to deallocate now?&amp;quot; click on OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherconf.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will see an another pop up &amp;quot;Deallocation Completed&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherOKconf.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter supplier invoices for non media / non job items?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In due course of business you might need to purchase items which are not media nor job related. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only way to enter this is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entry / Query.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select JOURNAL (JOU) type and enter the relevant purchase entry here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter supplier credit notes for non media / non job items?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only way to enter this is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entry / Query.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select JOURNAL (JOU) type and enter the reversal / credit note entry (exact reversal of the supplier invoice you entered initially with the particular amount).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I cancel an already issued/posted Payment/Receipt?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no way to delete any journal in NEOSYS, especially the Payment Voucher, to maintain record for auditors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to cancel an already posted Payment/Receipt voucher:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Deallocate any items which you allocated at the time of entering the voucher.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(This frees up the Payment/Receipt voucher to be allocated against a reversal entry and also frees up the allocated item (Supplier/Client Invoice) to be allocated against another voucher)&lt;br /&gt;
#Do a reversal entry of exactly the same Payment/Receipt voucher and allocated the same to the actual entry. Thereafter you can enter the new Payment/Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What happens if I post the same supplier invoice twice?== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows the same supplier invoice to be posted in two different ledgers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, a warning message (shown below) is displayed, when you try to enter a purchase invoice number which is already existing in the same supplier a/c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:duplicatepostingwarning.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I allocate to unposted vouchers?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows allocation to UNPOSTED vouchers (e.g. receipts to unposted invoices) but you can only save the batch (or receipts) as unposted until the unposted vouchers (invoices) have actually been posted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While you are allocating you can see which vouchers are unposted because there is a * in the reference number. There is no way to avoid showing unposted vouchers at the moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I allocate vouchers within a batch?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can allocate a voucher to another voucher which are in the same batch. In order to do so, post the batch and use the Voucher Allocation screen to allocate to the correct voucher.&lt;br /&gt;
For example an Invoice and a Credit Note can be in the same batch and they can be allocated to each other after posting, via the Voucher Allocation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I view a voucher file before the batch is posted?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can view voucher files by saving a journal batch as unposted/unposted without validation, then clicking on the link in the Voucher column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open the voucher that the system wants to generate. The actual voucher number will not be generated until the batch is posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a journal batch cannot be saved due to an error, then you can save the batch by choosing &amp;quot;Save as Unposted Batch WITHOUT VALIDATION&amp;quot; option, then view the voucher file and possibly find the cause of the error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I sort the Journal Audit Report according to Invoice Number?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The journal audit report is ordered as per the date and time of posting as per audit rules. Hence It cannot be sorted on any other fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a simple list of invoices is required then please use the list of invoices from the media or job invoice menus. (See [[List of Invoices]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I amend / repost journal entries?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Posted entries cannot be modified except by NEOSYS under certain circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS has a policy not to do corrections to postings except in special circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Corrections to opening balances and opening items since those are a once off issue.&lt;br /&gt;
#Amendments requested by top management for exceptional adjustment of accounts that cannot be handled in any other way&lt;br /&gt;
#Vouchers are missing from posted batches. See [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System#Voucher_number_missing_from_posted_batches Missing vouchers in posted batches]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General errors in postings such as the financial period, account number and amounts must be corrected by reversal and correct journals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The repercussions of granting permission to edit/repost journals would be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#NEOSYS Financial Module can no longer be trusted if postings are subject to modification&lt;br /&gt;
#It is not common practice to do such manipulations&lt;br /&gt;
#It can lead to possible errors in numbers&lt;br /&gt;
#Staff can become complacent and careless while posting entries and frequently ask for this permission&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, restricting users from editing/reposting journal entries promotes a more healthy and vigilant working environment where users verify each journal entry before posting it which effectively leads to good accounting practices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The NEOSYS software for reposting journals appears to but does NOT work for posting which have already been allocated. It creates cross check balance errors in the open item accounts. To avoid this, any allocations can be de-allocated ESPECIALLY when the account number is being changed or the amount is being reduced or the currency changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information can be changed by authorised users even after posting. In the Voucher File and therefore on the detail ledger&lt;br /&gt;
account/statement: Date, Due Date, Despatch Date, Reference, Details, Analysis Code and allocation. See [[Finance_FAQ#What_can_I_change_on_the_finance_vouchers_even_after_posting.3F|What can I change in the finance voucher after posting?]]. Unfortunately the journal printout is unchanged by any amendments and remains as it was entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I print all accounts in one trial balance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print all accounts in a single trial balance you must print the General Ledger (GL) and select SHOW ALL SUBLEDGERS option. You can also make use of the SHORT VERSION option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:gl-printout.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I  issue Debit/Credit Note in Finance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Journal Setup, enter Voucher Description as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot; and select voucher style from the drop-down menu as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; entered in the Voucher Description is used to give two alternate names for the same heading depending on whether the main account is debited or credited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Journal setup.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, for a voucher entered for this journal type, when the main account is DEBITED, when you click on the Print/Send button, the document generated will say &amp;quot;DEBIT NOTE&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Debit note.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when the main account is CREDITED, when you click on the Print/Send button, the document generated will say &amp;quot;CREDIT NOTE&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Credit note.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same trick is used for &amp;quot;Invoice/Credit Note&amp;quot;, ie, simply enter Voucher Description as &amp;quot;Invoice/Credit Note&amp;quot; and select voucher style from the drop-down menu as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot;. Depending on whether the main account is debited or credited, the Journal Print document will show either &amp;quot;Invoice&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Credit Note&amp;quot; as the heading. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is revaluation handled in NEOSYS? ==&lt;br /&gt;
When a voucher is allocated, NEOSYS automatically checks if there is a difference in base amounts and records the exchange difference by either creating/posting a revaluation voucher or amending one of the vouchers to record the exchange gain/loss.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When does NEOSYS automatically create and post a revaluation voucher? ===&lt;br /&gt;
A Revaluation voucher is created when a user allocates two posted vouchers using the &#039;Voucher Allocation&#039; feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When does NEOSYS amend the latest voucher to record the exchange gain/loss? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vouchers are amended when a user allocates one or many posted vouchers to a unposted journal within the &#039;Journals&#039; screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Which period will the revaluation voucher be posted into? ===&lt;br /&gt;
The RV voucher is posted into the same period as the allocation period. There are three options in Voucher Allocation page to set the allocation period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Current period&#039; - The allocation and RV voucher will use the current calendar period.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Use Settings from above&#039; - The allocation and RV voucher will use the latest period from the range of periods set in the Settings. For example, if range is 1/2020 - 12/2020, the RV voucher and allocation will use 12/2020.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Backdated as far as possible&#039; - The latest voucher period out of the two vouchers will be used by the RV voucher. However, if that period is closed, then use next open period. For example, if a JOU batch is posted in 1/2020 and the corresponding REC in 2/2020, then the allocation period used will be 2/2020. If the periods have been closed till 3/2020 in Finance, then the RV voucher would be posted into the next open period, 4/2020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the “RV” allocation without a voucher number that shows in the Voucher File?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An allocation stating RV without any voucher number is caused by a revaluation process on open item accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revaluation of open item accounts is performed by calculating the base adjustment on each outstanding foreign currency item and posting ONE RV voucher PER ACCOUNT for the total. The RV voucher is allocated to the individual vouchers but unusually the voucher number does not show. The system was initially designed this way in order to avoid a potentially very long list of allocations on RV vouchers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lack of voucher number makes it hard to verify the allocation is correct, however you can trust that it is correct if the usual chain of checks and balances provided by the principle of the double entry proves the whole system is ok.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is planned to change NEOSYS to show RV voucher numbers in all cases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does voucher allocation shows nothing to allocate when there are debits and credits on the account?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In  some abnormal circumstances there may be items outstanding on an account which have base amount outstanding but no currency amount outstanding. NEOSYS allocation procedure works only on outstanding currency amounts so these items cannot be allocated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solution: Run the revaluation program. Its job is to amend the outstanding base amount to agree with the outstanding currency amount at the prevailing exchange rate. Since the outstanding currency amount is zero, it will amend the outstanding base amount to be zero also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is a revaluation journal posted in the prior year when I allocated some vouchers in the prior year?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It doesn&#039;t matter what time and date is on the clock when the allocation is done since you could be be working on 2017 accounts in 2018 and this is normal practice of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It matters what SETTINGS and options you choose when doing the allocation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The allocation is done in a certain period, and any revaluation journal required and generated due to that allocation, is generated in the same period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the allocation/revaluation period cannot be up to the closed period in the Company File, so allocated vouchers in a closed year will be allocated/revalued in the first open period - or the open period that you select.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which accounts can be revalued?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revaluation is only performed on foreign currency tangible assets and liabilities accounts, which are subject to changing exchange rates and have a value and therefore can be revalued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tangible assets and liability accounts represent real value such as debtors, creditors and bank accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whereas P&amp;amp;L accounts are merely totals of historical movements, they do not represent any asset or liability that has a value and therefore cannot be revalued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is closing account missing for some Profit &amp;amp; Loss accounts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Retained Earnings account is the &amp;quot;closing account&amp;quot; of all the P&amp;amp;L accounts. This is a real account in the master chart of accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the closing A/C code is mentioned in the closing A/C field then all accounts under that ledger will automatically take the closing A/C detail even if the closing A/C code is not explicitly mentioned in each account.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PLclosingaccount.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What can I change on the finance vouchers even after posting?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finance users can amend various fields in Voucher File after the entry is posted. On saving the changes Amended will appear on the voucher file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following fields can be amended: - Reference, Date, Due Date, Despatch Date, Details, Deallocate and Analysis Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:amend.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I stop users from posting journal entries to an Account in Finance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding &amp;quot;(Stop)&amp;quot; on an account line in Chart of Accounts stops users from posting journal entries to the stopped account. If users wish to post journal entries to a stopped account remove &amp;quot;(Stop)&amp;quot; from the account line in Chart of Accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
Users can take ledger printout for stopped accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:StopCofA.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How does NEOSYS handle base and real currency balances?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to understand NEOSYS is to imagine that it keeps completely separate double entry accounting systems for each currency and consolidates them on the fly to produce reports and ledgers for all currencies consolidated. It is easy to use NEOSYS menu settings to print reports and ledgers for individual currencies - ignoring all other currencies, or for all currencies consolidated - which is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every NEOSYS journal line has a currency code and amount. Each journal line also has (in parallel to the currency code and amount) the base currency equivalent amount of the currency amount. The base currency equivalent amount can be considered to be our best &amp;quot;valuation&amp;quot; of the currency amount when expressed in terms of the currency of our base currency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most cases the operator only has to enter the currency code and amount and the NEOSYS system uses its internal semi-static exchange rate files to determine the base currency equivalent amount or &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;. In some cases however, for example, if there is no standard semi-static internal exchange rate for a currency, the operator is required to enter the base currency equivalent amount/value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS keep the base currency balance separate per currency and consolidates them on the fly to produce consolidated reports for &amp;quot;all currencies converted to base currency&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS treats journals in the currency of the base currency as just another currency and not as some special currency. For example, if the base currency happens to be USD then NEOSYS can tell you a) the balances of each currency converted to USD separately b) the balance of all currencies converted to USD c) the balance of real USD excluding all other currencies. This is particularly useful when the base currency is not the main operational currency of the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does NEOSYS Exchange Gains/Loss account not agree exactly with my auditor&#039;s parallel system?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a client finds that the Exchange Gain/Loss account balances as per another parallel system is not in agreement with NEOSYS then they must sit and reconcile the two and notify NEOSYS support of anything that they discover is wrong in NEOSYS so that  can fix it - otherwise we remain confident in NEOSYS without proof to the contrary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Locate the incorrect transactions: Take a ledger account of the Exchange Gain/Loss account in order to locate the incorrect transaction. Open the voucher that made this entry and look at all the base conversions on that voucher. If the exchange rate used was wrong, that could be the reason for the discrepancy.&lt;br /&gt;
#Try running the NEOSYS revaluation program on the journals menu. This will ensure that the NOMINAL base currency balance in all accounts is in exact agreement with the REAL currency balance in those accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#Rounding rules can be different in different systems so that may account for 1 or 2 cent differences per transaction and this can can add up to greater differences in total.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What do I do if I am not happy with the balance of an account?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The balance of any account is, under all circumstances, simply the arithmetic total of the journal lines posted to it, therefore self evidently, if you are not happy with the balance of an account, you must use one of the options on the NEOSYS JOURNAL MENU to post additional journal lines until the total of the journal lines for the desired account gives the balance that you desire for the account. There is no way to amend the balance of an account other than using one of the NEOSYS JOURNAL MENU options to post additional journals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not adjust the balance of one account only?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to understand why this is not allowed you need to know the fundamental and unbreakable rule of double entry accounting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 THE ARITHMETIC TOTAL OF THE BALANCES OF ALL ACCOUNTS MUST AT ALL TIMES BE EQUAL TO ZERO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS, the rule of double entry accounting is applied separately per currency. Therefore the total of base currency must equal zero at all times and the total of each individual currency must be zero at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the above rule, adjusting the balance of one account alone is not allowed because it would break the rule ... because (obviously) it would result in the arithmetic total of all account balances no longer being zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect of the rule is that you cannot ever adjust the balance of one account without simultaneously making an equal an opposite adjustment in some other account or accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What if I cannot determine any account to make an opposite adjustment into?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The opposite account is often some kind of a &amp;quot;write off&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;exchange gain/loss&amp;quot; account but it could be to any account depending on the case. Think long and hard about it and if you are still not clear then you must consult an accountant to help you determine which account to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for NEOSYS revaluation journals the &amp;quot;exchange gain/loss&amp;quot; account, defined in the Company File, is used automatically as the opposite adjustment account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to correct wrong currencies present in NEOSYS reconciliation reports==  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS reconciliation is strictly per currency amounts posted and does not provide any base currency reporting therefore any false currency balances (eg USD posted into an EUR bank account) must be corrected by journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is VAT column not appearing in journal entry page though it has been set up in Journal Setup?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is necessary to put Tax Reg. No . on the Company File in order to get the VAT column in the journal entry page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why do VAT amounts stay in originating company accounts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The VAT amount, in an intercompany posting, will remain in the originating company account and only the NET amount will be posted to the other company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This ensures that when you print/export the journals for one company, the total of the VAT column agrees with the VAT report for that company, this helps make auditing easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also if you issue an invoice for company X then even if, for example, you post the income of that invoice to another company, the VAT on the invoice still has to be shown under the company of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get a break down of the WIP/ACCRUAL?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want a break-down of a control account you look in the subsidiary ledger. (This is the whole point of having a subsidiary ledgers in the first place)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the subsidiary ledger happens to be open item ledger like client/supplier/wip/accrual then you can use the NEOSYS AGED BALANCE REPORT which can show you the breakdown either per account or per open item/translation &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:agedbalrpt.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why am I unable to find/print journal batches created using Recurring Journals?==&lt;br /&gt;
Journal batches created using Recurring Journals Table do not have a period in the batch heading because multiple periods may be posted in the same batch. For such batches, only the period of the first voucher in that batch (in the case of recurring journals this is the earliest period in the batch) will be shown in any journal batch lookup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to lookup or print such batches you need to enter the earliest period in that batch in the period filter. This holds true for any kind of batch lookup or printing like Journal Audit/Export, List of Unposted Journals etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the heading of Journal Audit/Export print shows batch number and the period as blank (highlighted in the below screenshot) for a journal batch created using Recurring Journals Table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:recurring.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The batch shown above contains an entry for period 2/2016. But if 2/2016 is entered in the period filter in Journal Audit/Export, this will give an error message &amp;quot;No journals found.&amp;quot; as shown below. This is because there is currently no Recurring Journal batch whose earliest period is 2/2016. The earliest period of the batch shown above, i.e. 1/2016 must be entered in the period filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:recurring2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to do depreciation using Recurring Journals==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring Journal entries can be used to post depreciation periodically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in the example below, Start date can be set as the beginning of a month. Details field will carry the description of the Asset. Frequency and Number of Instalments can be set as per company policy. Depending on the Total amount and Number of Instalments NEOSYS automatically calculates the Instalment and Remainder amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Debit the Depreciation Account (PL ledger) and credit the Accumulated Depreciation Account (Fixed Assets Ledger).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On posting the Recurring journal other field details (Date Last Posted and Amount Posted to Date) appear automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before Posting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dep.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After Posting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dep2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is ledger printout truncating account name from voucher details field==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account name is mentioned in the details column of the voucher, the system will automatically drop the account name from the details column while taking the account&#039;s ledger printout. This is done because there is no need to show the same account name over and over on all rows of the report when the account name is already mentioned in the report heading.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System&amp;diff=7354</id>
		<title>Troubleshooting NEOSYS Finance System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System&amp;diff=7354"/>
		<updated>2022-02-15T11:50:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Cross Check Balance errors==&lt;br /&gt;
===Error Message===&lt;br /&gt;
This is a sample Cross Check Balance error message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Server=NEOSYS-SERVER&lt;br /&gt;
 Database=1D68EE63&lt;br /&gt;
 Client=99_99_99_9&lt;br /&gt;
 User=NEOSYS&lt;br /&gt;
 Process=4&lt;br /&gt;
 Request=LEDGERPRINT&lt;br /&gt;
 Message=&lt;br /&gt;
 Cross check balance error:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Ledger:TD A/c:STAR Type:Open Item&lt;br /&gt;
 Ledger:TD A/c:STAR Type:Open Item&lt;br /&gt;
 NEOSYS Ver:22:13:59  03 JAN 2007&lt;br /&gt;
 @Id=&lt;br /&gt;
 Data=STAR^^^^^^^^^1/06-12/06:SR:FZ:1;3:AED:12/2006-12/2006:12:AED:::::::1:2^^^^^^1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Error Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever NEOSYS prints a ledger account or statement it can add up all the transactions onto the opening balance and derive the closing balance itself &amp;lt;b&amp;gt; i.e. o/b + trans = c/b &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and naturally the c/b SHOULD agree with the c/b according to the balance on the account balances file unless something has gone wrong in the updates of the files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hence cross check balance can never really occur by user error and usually would be due to defect in the hardware or software and now since servers rarely fail, the cause is nearly always in the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
First refer to [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System#Fixing_.22Cross_Check_Balance.22_warnings_using_CHK.ALLOC Fixing Cross Check Balance Error] and thereafter escalate to the programmer if still not fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to check for Cross Check Balance errors on all accounts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Goto Finance&amp;gt;Ledgers&amp;gt;Ledger Account&lt;br /&gt;
#Change settings to desired company, year and currency&lt;br /&gt;
#Select multiple ledgers to display. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Note that there is a 10 minute request time out, so do not select all the ledgers/accounts in one go.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross Check Balance error on all Profit and Loss accounts and Retained Earnings account==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sample error message ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ccbretained1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Message explained ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will always get a cross check balance error on all P&amp;amp;L accounts and the Retained Earnings account if you go across multiple years because the opening balance of one year is, unlike ALL the other accounts, not the same as the closing balance.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
On the report, the balance is opening balance plus the sum of the transactions whereas the &amp;quot;Cross check balance&amp;quot; is the balance according to the trial balance in the final year. You will understand that they are logically not the same in the case of all P&amp;amp;L accounts and the Retained Earnings account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resolving opening balances in P&amp;amp;L accounts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Resolving opening balances in P&amp;amp;L accounts where you fail to put a closing account on them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normally P&amp;amp;L accounts have NO opening balances as at the beginning of the year regardless of what their closing balance was at the end of the prior year. This is completely expect but totally different to all other accounts where the opening balance of one year is absolutely identical to the closing balance of the prior year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
P&amp;amp;L accounts balance at any time in the year indicates the year to date income, cost or expenses etc for that year. This is standard accounting procedure the world over and for at least since double entry book-keeping originated several centuries ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore if any P&amp;amp;L A/c is found to have an opening balance for the any year it will be due to misconfiguration of NEOSYS or incorrect data entry in the chart of accounts of the P&amp;amp;L Ledger. Since both of these are not by default possible to general accountants, then this problem rarely arises, particular when the P&amp;amp;L chart is represented as a subsidiary ledger and separate from the GL chart of accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cause ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the P&amp;amp;L chart is a section of the top level &amp;quot;GL&amp;quot; chart and not represented as a subsidiary &amp;quot;PL&amp;quot; chart then failing to add the closing a/c when creating a new P&amp;amp;L a/c is an easy mistake to make since it must be done for each P&amp;amp;L a/c one by one. If the closing a/c is not setup before the Open New Year procedure is run, it results in the presence of opening balances for the P&amp;amp;L a/cs for the next year. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if the closing account (eg: a/c 792 or 88) of a P&amp;amp;L account is not specified (i.e. in each account line) then NEOSYS will merely carry forward the closing balance of the account to be the opening balance of the new year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By contrast, when the P&amp;amp;L a/cs are held in a subsidiary chart then it is possible to set it up (by assigning the closing account in the header of the chart) so that all a/cs in the subsidiary chart are closed. In this case, any new P&amp;amp;L a/cs are automatically closed (i.e. there is no need to specify the closing account on each P&amp;amp;L account line.) - so the problem does not arise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Solution ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To solve this, use Opening Balance Journals to transfer the balances to the closing a/c (that was supposed to receive the balances in the first place) by creating a journal into any financial period and date of the new year. The exact period and date are not important since Opening Balance Journals, although like normal journals in other respects, do *not* show as entries on the ledger account, but instead amend the opening balances of the financial year of the ledger account.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Credit (or debit) the problematic P&amp;amp;L a/c by the amount of its opening balance and debit (or credit) the &amp;quot;Profit and Loss Brought Forward&amp;quot; a/c or whatever closing a/c the account should be closed to on an annual basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Don’t forget to add the closing a/c to the chart otherwise the same problem will arise again next year. Opening Balance Journals should be done by finance staff not user support staff so that the auditors see the correct records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to fix the closing balances over the last few years, remember that you need to do one opening balance each for every past year. Example: if you have an opening balance issue since 2008 (i.e. 2007 balance of some accounts are showing as opening balance in 2008) and 2009 (i.e. 2008 balance of some accounts are showing as opening balance in 2009) then you need to two OBJ, one each for 1/2008 and 1/2009.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=== Permanent Solution ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ensure that the closing account of the offending account(s) are set correctly otherwise the problem will reoccur every year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Correcting mistakes in postings ==&lt;br /&gt;
Posted entries cannot be modified except by NEOSYS under certain circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS has a policy not to do corrections to postings except in special circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Corrections to opening balances and opening items since those are a once off issue.&lt;br /&gt;
#Amendments requested by top management for exceptional adjustment of accounts that cannot be handled in any other way&lt;br /&gt;
#Vouchers are missing from posted batches. See [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System#Voucher_number_missing_from_posted_batches Missing vouchers in posted batches]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General errors in postings such as the financial period, account number and amounts must be corrected by reversal and correct journals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The repercussions of granting permission to edit/repost journals would be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#NEOSYS Financial Module can no longer be trusted if postings are subject to modification&lt;br /&gt;
#It is not common practice to do such manipulations&lt;br /&gt;
#It can lead to possible errors in numbers&lt;br /&gt;
#Staff can become complacent and careless while posting entries and frequently ask for this permission &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, restricting users from editing/reposting journal entries promotes a more healthy and vigilant working environment where users verify each journal entry before posting it which effectively leads to good accounting practices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The NEOSYS software for reposting journals appears to but does NOT work for posting which have already been allocated. It creates cross check balance errors in the open item accounts. To avoid this, any allocations can be de-allocated ESPECIALLY when the account number is being changed or the amount is being reduced or the currency changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information can be changed by authorised users even after posting, in the Voucher File and therefore on the detail ledger account/statement: Date, Due Date, Despatch Date, Reference, Details, Analysis Code and allocation. See [[Finance_FAQ#What_can_I_change_on_the_finance_vouchers_even_after_posting.3F| What can I change in the finance voucher after posting?]]. Unfortunately the journal printout is unchanged by any amendments and remains as it was entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle automatic journal entries missing because a user deleted them==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users may delete automatic entries in Finance and then later complain that the invoice was generated but the entries are missing and may even blame the system for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first step would be to locate the missing entries in the Unposted version of the journal where it was automatically generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS keeps the history of every file in the system, where you will be able to find details such as username, date/time updated and even the IP no. of the user that made the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this information is found, the user must be informed that the entry was deleted by &amp;lt;user&amp;gt; at from &amp;lt;ip address&amp;gt;, then provide a working solution which would be to recreate the deleted entries using the old version as a reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not spend too long trying to convince clients that it is their doing. Instead, show them proof using the logs and then direct them towards the solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== You Cannot Post 0 Currency Amounts to Open Item Accounts ==&lt;br /&gt;
While trying to post journal entries in NEOSYS, you may come across the following errors:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ERROR MESSAGE:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 CANNOT SAVE &amp;quot;P IN 552 U&amp;quot; because:&lt;br /&gt;
 You cannot post 0USD to open items account like UM7R&lt;br /&gt;
 unless the base amount is also zero&lt;br /&gt;
 because it cannot be allocated later&lt;br /&gt;
 (in line 1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Financecurrencyamounts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ERROR MESSAGE: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 CANNOT SAVE &amp;quot;1 INV 664 U&amp;quot; because:&lt;br /&gt;
 Sorry, you are not authorized to do&lt;br /&gt;
 Journal Post Revaluation&lt;br /&gt;
 You cannot post -0SYP to open item accounts like SCH3294&lt;br /&gt;
 unless the base amount is also zero&lt;br /&gt;
 because it cannot be allocated later&lt;br /&gt;
 (in line 3)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:REVALUATIONJOURNALS.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the messages say, you cannot post zero currency amounts to open item accounts unless the base amount is also zero because it cannot be allocated later.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In order to understand this issue, observe that having a outstanding item of zero amount on an open item account (in any currency) logically means that the outstanding base equivalent of that outstanding item should be zero too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logically, all items posted to open item accounts need to be eventually allocated to other items in order to remove them from the list of outstanding items for the account. However the NEOSYS allocation process only allows allocation of real currency amounts since it ensures that the equivalent base amounts are proportionate to the currency amounts and automatically makes entries to the exchange gains and losses accounts to reflect this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a base amount outstanding when the currency amount outstanding is clearly not correct in the final analysis and NEOSYS is currently programmed to prevent journals like this from being manually entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cause ===&lt;br /&gt;
The situation can arise due journal entries generated by NEOSYS when the exchange rate is adjusted after invoicing and a debit or credit note is issued to account for the difference. In this case the currency amount to be posted in finance is zero while the base amount is not zero.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=== Solution ===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the appropriate journal&lt;br /&gt;
#Change the account of the offending lines to the exchange gain/loss account. &lt;br /&gt;
#*The exchange gain/loss account is not an open item account and hence it will accept “zero amount, base currency only journals”, otherwise known as revaluation journals.&lt;br /&gt;
#Post the entry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Alternative Solution ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Ask NEOSYS programmers to temporarily patch the software to allow the posting. If this situation turns out to be a recurring event then NEOSYS software will be patched to allow authorised finance users to post this type of transaction without involving NEOSYS programmers.&lt;br /&gt;
# Post the entries&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the NEOSYS revaluation program on the account to transfer the balance to the exchange gains and losses account. IF YOU ARE NOT SKILLED AT REVALUATION DO THIS ON TESTDATA FIRST!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note -&#039;&#039; NEOSYS software versions from Feb 2012 generate journals automatically with exchange gain/loss account where appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Solving Error: Index overflow - run Finance, Maintenance, &amp;quot;Clear Open Items&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=== Cause ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
For low and medium volume of transaction this only occurs after many years of using NEOSYS. In this case the only possible problem is that ledger and statements of accounts of open items &amp;quot;as at&amp;quot; ancient periods will be missing items.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
For high volume accounts this occurs when the Clear Open Item procedure is not performed regularly. In this case, older unallocated items may be missing from ledger accounts/statements causing &amp;quot;cross check balances&amp;quot; which have to be dealt with by technical support using CHK.ALLOC.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
For more information see the Clear Open Item screen and, if and when it becomes available, documentation for why, when and how the &amp;quot;Clear Open Items&amp;quot; procedure must be run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Solution ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Perform a normal &amp;quot;Clear Open Items&amp;quot; procedure in the Finance, Maintenance Menu. (NB normal web interface - NOT Maintenance Mode)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== Why does an outstanding not appear while taking a ledger printout==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check if there is a CCB error for this account. If so follow instructions [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System#Fixing_.22Cross_Check_Balance.22_warnings_using_CHK.ALLOC to fix CCB error ]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are no errors check [[Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System#Proactive_Checking_if_Clear_Open_Items_needs_to_be_performed | the voucher index size]]. Large voucher index size could the outstandings is not appearing in ledger printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the voucher index is high then clear open items and check if the outstandings appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Proactive Checking if Clear Open Items needs to be performed ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To find out which accounts are more than 50% &amp;quot;full&amp;quot;, in maintenance mode press F5 and type the following command&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 LIST VOUCHER.INDEX SIZE WITH SIZE &amp;gt; 32000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum size is around 65500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Converting Balance Forward Accounts to Open Item==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Problem explained ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot change the type of a chart of accounts from Balance Forward Account to Open Item after any postings have been made, but it is possible in maintenance mode IF AND ONLY IF the users are prepared to see EVERY ITEM EVER POSTED ON EVERY ACCOUNT IN THE CHART AS OUTSTANDING.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS has no way to match and allocate the old items to each other automatically so, after conversion, this MUST be done manually and can be time consuming and EFFECTIVELY IMPOSSIBLE for chart of accounts with many account or large accounts. In this case the ONLY solution is to create a new chart of accounts (with the same control account) and start from scratch with new accounts perhaps transferring the balance of the old accounts to the new accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Solution ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The solution involves editing the LEDGER and CHARTS file (in Maintenance mode) to change the type, saving the chart once again, and then running F5 CHK.ALLOC to add items missing from open item indexed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this the account will be an Open Item account and all items will show as outstanding. One easy way to knock off these items is to find out the balance of this account (eg. 45000 AED) and then pass a Journal into the account to allocate and clear all the old items and that journal itself would be the open item of the new account i.e. +45000 DR -45000 CR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resolving the &amp;quot;NONE supplier does not exist&amp;quot; message on invoice postings==&lt;br /&gt;
When posting an automated invoice journal from NEOSYS you may encounter a message which which says &amp;quot;Cannot save XXXX because NONE supplier does not exist&amp;quot;. The error message will look something like this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:nonesupplier.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Error Message:&lt;br /&gt;
 Cannot save &amp;quot;1 INP 18 U&amp;quot; because:&lt;br /&gt;
 CONTRA A/C &amp;quot;28*1*MIRAO**UAE*NONE*PPP&amp;quot; ANALYSIS CODE IS INVALID&lt;br /&gt;
 FIELD 6 - &amp;quot;NONE&amp;quot; SUPPLIER CODE DOES NOT EXIST&lt;br /&gt;
 (in Line 1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This error appears because there was no cost related to this invoice and as such for billing analysis NEOSYS takes the supplier code as NONE in the billing analysis code. To avoid this message create a supplier code NONE in the supplier file (the supplier name is irrelevant and could be NONE aswell) and then post this invoice. This is a one time setup per client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Problem: Batches “missing” from selected periods==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows you to clear the default batch period during data entry. Then the posting period is determined by the voucher date and there may be different periods posted within a single batch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such batches are listed in period 0 and not in the period of any specific voucher in the batch. This applies even if all the vouchers in the batch happen to be in the same period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Problem: Unwanted bracketing of amount in Financial Report==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an account is added to the chart of accounts, if it is not indented correctly, the corresponding amount will appear in brackets in the financial report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To fix this, compare this account with other accounts in the chart of accounts and indent it correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:indentaccounts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Amountbrackets.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Problem: Account number does not exist==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User can find this message while passing/positing any entry in finance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Explanation:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This error means that the account for which a user is trying to post an entry does not exist in finance ledgers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows users to put the accounts manually in their respective chart but all the provision/accrual accounts are automatically created in their respective chart. There can be a scenario in which the accrual accounts are not created automatically as explained below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Problem:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clients who are using an older version of neosys and have entered a schedule number which  begins with a non-numeric character, face a problem that accrual accounts are not automated and receive the message &amp;quot;Account number does not exist&amp;quot; while posting an supplier invoice before creating an Invoice to client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Troubleshoot this message:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All accrual accounts are created in ACC20XX ledger after the schedule is approved. So check if the schedule is approved, if not ask user to approve the schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Solution:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* This problem was fixed in 04th July 2011 version of neosys. So first step is to upgrade a client database. Upgrade will prevent in causing the problem again for future schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Now the solution to this problem is to save the schedule again without doing any changes/amendment on a schedule. This can be done by changing something and changing it back before saving.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Solving ALLOCATION EXCEEDS BASE AMOUNT error ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This message may come when running the CHK.ALLOC maintenance procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under normal circumstances, the total amount and base amount allocated to other vouchers cannot exceed the amount and base amount on the voucher. In other words, you cannot allocate a payment of 1000 to invoices totaling 1100. However the situation can arise in some circumstances on currency amounts that have been revalued. If you cancel manual allocations on currency amounts and there have been some revaluations (since the original manual allocation) that resulted in an INCREASE in the amount outstanding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solution: Run the revaluation program since its job is to amend outstanding base amount to agree with the outstanding currency amount at the prevailing exchange rate. &lt;br /&gt;
(Revaluation program can be found at Menu, Finance, Journals, Revaluation Journals)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fixing Error: &amp;quot;A/c. ???&amp;quot; message in account of outstanding items==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error: &amp;quot;A/c. ???&amp;quot; message in account of outstanding items.Or CCB error for [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System#Fixing_.22Cross_Check_Balance.22_warning_using_CHK.VINDEX Wrong A/c ]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cause: Some unresolved error in software that doesnt handle some unknown user action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patch: CHK.VINDEX and delete some entries with &amp;quot;wrong account&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;different account&amp;quot; ( can be done only by NEOSYS support staff)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solution:None available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locating and correcting Exchange Gain/Loss A/c errors==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Finance_FAQ#Why_does_NEOSYS_Exchange_Gains.2FLoss_account_not_agree_exactly_with_my_auditor.27s_parallel_system.3F|Refer to Why does NEOSYS Exchange Gains/Loss account not agree exactly with my auditor&#039;s parallel system?]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Finance_FAQ&amp;diff=7353</id>
		<title>Finance FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Finance_FAQ&amp;diff=7353"/>
		<updated>2022-02-11T13:43:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* How to handle automatic journal entries missing because a user deleted them */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How do I allocate open item amounts in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===While entering a journal===&lt;br /&gt;
While entering a journal entry in the ALLOC VCHS Column hit F7 Key and it will pop-up list of allocatable items. Allocate the amount with the correct voucher no. and amount and click on OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===By Vouchers Allocation file===&lt;br /&gt;
Once the journal is posted without allocation you can only allocate from the Voucher Screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers Allocation. Enter the account number or hit the F7 key on the Selected Account(s) field and select the relevant account from the particular subsidiary chart. Click OK and the system will popup the Voucher Allocation page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account selected is a DEBITS outstanding type account (i.e. Trade Debtors), then all the allocable/unallocated CREDIT items (i.e. Receipts, Credit Notes etc.) will show up. Click on any item you wish to allocate Debit items against. After you click you will get a list of all DEBIT allocable/unallocated items which you can now select to be allocated against the CREDIT item you earlier selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Incase you have a selected a CREDITS outstanding type account (i.e. Trade Creditors), then the opposite happens i.e. DEBIT items show first (Payments, Debit Notes etc) and if you click on any of these items you can allocate them against CREDIT outstanding items. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For accounts that have neither CREDIT or DEBIT type selected, the CREDIT items show first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why can I not see ALL allocable items in the Allocation screen?===&lt;br /&gt;
Open item accounts with a lot of transactions might face this issue. The allocation screen cannot handle an unlimited number of entries so it shows the oldest first and omits the newest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I deallocate already allocated vouchers?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers file/Deallocation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile-deallocation.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the Journal type and enter the voucher number. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;As you enter the voucher number system will show the all the vouchers allocated on the bottom right to that voucher.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Deallocation button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile-deallocate.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the Vouchers you want to deallocate and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
#As you click OK system will reconfirm your move by giving a pop up &amp;quot;Ok to deallocate now?&amp;quot; click on OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherconf.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will see an another pop up &amp;quot;Deallocation Completed&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherOKconf.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter supplier invoices for non media / non job items?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In due course of business you might need to purchase items which are not media nor job related. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only way to enter this is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entry / Query.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select JOURNAL (JOU) type and enter the relevant purchase entry here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter supplier credit notes for non media / non job items?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only way to enter this is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entry / Query.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select JOURNAL (JOU) type and enter the reversal / credit note entry (exact reversal of the supplier invoice you entered initially with the particular amount).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I cancel an already issued/posted Payment/Receipt?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no way to delete any journal in NEOSYS, especially the Payment Voucher, to maintain record for auditors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to cancel an already posted Payment/Receipt voucher:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Deallocate any items which you allocated at the time of entering the voucher.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(This frees up the Payment/Receipt voucher to be allocated against a reversal entry and also frees up the allocated item (Supplier/Client Invoice) to be allocated against another voucher)&lt;br /&gt;
#Do a reversal entry of exactly the same Payment/Receipt voucher and allocated the same to the actual entry. Thereafter you can enter the new Payment/Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What happens if I post the same supplier invoice twice?== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows the same supplier invoice to be posted in two different ledgers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, a warning message (shown below) is displayed, when you try to enter a purchase invoice number which is already existing in the same supplier a/c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:duplicatepostingwarning.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I allocate to unposted vouchers?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows allocation to UNPOSTED vouchers (e.g. receipts to unposted invoices) but you can only save the batch (or receipts) as unposted until the unposted vouchers (invoices) have actually been posted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While you are allocating you can see which vouchers are unposted because there is a * in the reference number. There is no way to avoid showing unposted vouchers at the moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I allocate vouchers within a batch?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can allocate a voucher to another voucher which are in the same batch. In order to do so, post the batch and use the Voucher Allocation screen to allocate to the correct voucher.&lt;br /&gt;
For example an Invoice and a Credit Note can be in the same batch and they can be allocated to each other after posting, via the Voucher Allocation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I view a voucher file before the batch is posted?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can view voucher files by saving a journal batch as unposted/unposted without validation, then clicking on the link in the Voucher column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open the voucher that the system wants to generate. The actual voucher number will not be generated until the batch is posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a journal batch cannot be saved due to an error, then you can save the batch by choosing &amp;quot;Save as Unposted Batch WITHOUT VALIDATION&amp;quot; option, then view the voucher file and possibly find the cause of the error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I sort the Journal Audit Report according to Invoice Number?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The journal audit report is ordered as per the date and time of posting as per audit rules. Hence It cannot be sorted on any other fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a simple list of invoices is required then please use the list of invoices from the media or job invoice menus. (See [[List of Invoices]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I amend / repost journal entries?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Posted entries cannot be modified except by NEOSYS under certain circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS has a policy not to do corrections to postings except in special circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Corrections to opening balances and opening items since those are a once off issue.&lt;br /&gt;
#Amendments requested by top management for exceptional adjustment of accounts that cannot be handled in any other way&lt;br /&gt;
#Vouchers are missing from posted batches. See [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System#Voucher_number_missing_from_posted_batches Missing vouchers in posted batches]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General errors in postings such as the financial period, account number and amounts must be corrected by reversal and correct journals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The repercussions of granting permission to edit/repost journals would be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#NEOSYS Financial Module can no longer be trusted if postings are subject to modification&lt;br /&gt;
#It is not common practice to do such manipulations&lt;br /&gt;
#It can lead to possible errors in numbers&lt;br /&gt;
#Staff can become complacent and careless while posting entries and frequently ask for this permission&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, restricting users from editing/reposting journal entries promotes a more healthy and vigilant working environment where users verify each journal entry before posting it which effectively leads to good accounting practices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The NEOSYS software for reposting journals appears to but does NOT work for posting which have already been allocated. It creates cross check balance errors in the open item accounts. To avoid this, any allocations can be de-allocated ESPECIALLY when the account number is being changed or the amount is being reduced or the currency changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information can be changed by authorised users even after posting. In the Voucher File and therefore on the detail ledger&lt;br /&gt;
account/statement: Date, Due Date, Despatch Date, Reference, Details, Analysis Code and allocation. See [[Finance_FAQ#What_can_I_change_on_the_finance_vouchers_even_after_posting.3F|What can I change in the finance voucher after posting?]]. Unfortunately the journal printout is unchanged by any amendments and remains as it was entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I print all accounts in one trial balance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print all accounts in a single trial balance you must print the General Ledger (GL) and select SHOW ALL SUBLEDGERS option. You can also make use of the SHORT VERSION option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:gl-printout.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I  issue Debit/Credit Note in Finance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Journal Setup, enter Voucher Description as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot; and select voucher style from the drop-down menu as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; entered in the Voucher Description is used to give two alternate names for the same heading depending on whether the main account is debited or credited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Journal setup.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, for a voucher entered for this journal type, when the main account is DEBITED, when you click on the Print/Send button, the document generated will say &amp;quot;DEBIT NOTE&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Debit note.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when the main account is CREDITED, when you click on the Print/Send button, the document generated will say &amp;quot;CREDIT NOTE&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Credit note.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same trick is used for &amp;quot;Invoice/Credit Note&amp;quot;, ie, simply enter Voucher Description as &amp;quot;Invoice/Credit Note&amp;quot; and select voucher style from the drop-down menu as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot;. Depending on whether the main account is debited or credited, the Journal Print document will show either &amp;quot;Invoice&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Credit Note&amp;quot; as the heading. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is revaluation handled in NEOSYS? ==&lt;br /&gt;
When a voucher is allocated, NEOSYS automatically checks if there is a difference in base amounts and records the exchange difference by either creating/posting a revaluation voucher or amending one of the vouchers to record the exchange gain/loss.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When does NEOSYS automatically create and post a revaluation voucher? ===&lt;br /&gt;
A Revaluation voucher is created when a user allocates two posted vouchers using the &#039;Voucher Allocation&#039; feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When does NEOSYS amend the latest voucher to record the exchange gain/loss? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vouchers are amended when a user allocates one or many posted vouchers to a unposted journal within the &#039;Journals&#039; screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Which period will the revaluation voucher be posted into? ===&lt;br /&gt;
The RV voucher is posted into the same period as the allocation period. There are three options in Voucher Allocation page to set the allocation period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Current period&#039; - The allocation and RV voucher will use the current calendar period.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Use Settings from above&#039; - The allocation and RV voucher will use the latest period from the range of periods set in the Settings. For example, if range is 1/2020 - 12/2020, the RV voucher and allocation will use 12/2020.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Backdated as far as possible&#039; - The latest voucher period out of the two vouchers will be used by the RV voucher. However, if that period is closed, then use next open period. For example, if a JOU batch is posted in 1/2020 and the corresponding REC in 2/2020, then the allocation period used will be 2/2020. If the periods have been closed till 3/2020 in Finance, then the RV voucher would be posted into the next open period, 4/2020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the “RV” allocation without a voucher number that shows in the Voucher File?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An allocation stating RV without any voucher number is caused by a revaluation process on open item accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revaluation of open item accounts is performed by calculating the base adjustment on each outstanding foreign currency item and posting ONE RV voucher PER ACCOUNT for the total. The RV voucher is allocated to the individual vouchers but unusually the voucher number does not show. The system was initially designed this way in order to avoid a potentially very long list of allocations on RV vouchers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lack of voucher number makes it hard to verify the allocation is correct, however you can trust that it is correct if the usual chain of checks and balances provided by the principle of the double entry proves the whole system is ok.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is planned to change NEOSYS to show RV voucher numbers in all cases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does voucher allocation shows nothing to allocate when there are debits and credits on the account?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In  some abnormal circumstances there may be items outstanding on an account which have base amount outstanding but no currency amount outstanding. NEOSYS allocation procedure works only on outstanding currency amounts so these items cannot be allocated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solution: Run the revaluation program. Its job is to amend the outstanding base amount to agree with the outstanding currency amount at the prevailing exchange rate. Since the outstanding currency amount is zero, it will amend the outstanding base amount to be zero also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is a revaluation journal posted in the prior year when I allocated some vouchers in the prior year?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It doesn&#039;t matter what time and date is on the clock when the allocation is done since you could be be working on 2017 accounts in 2018 and this is normal practice of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It matters what SETTINGS and options you choose when doing the allocation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The allocation is done in a certain period, and any revaluation journal required and generated due to that allocation, is generated in the same period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the allocation/revaluation period cannot be up to the closed period in the Company File, so allocated vouchers in a closed year will be allocated/revalued in the first open period - or the open period that you select.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which accounts can be revalued?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revaluation is only performed on foreign currency tangible assets and liabilities accounts, which are subject to changing exchange rates and have a value and therefore can be revalued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tangible assets and liability accounts represent real value such as debtors, creditors and bank accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whereas P&amp;amp;L accounts are merely totals of historical movements, they do not represent any asset or liability that has a value and therefore cannot be revalued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is closing account missing for some Profit &amp;amp; Loss accounts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Retained Earnings account is the &amp;quot;closing account&amp;quot; of all the P&amp;amp;L accounts. This is a real account in the master chart of accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the closing A/C code is mentioned in the closing A/C field then all accounts under that ledger will automatically take the closing A/C detail even if the closing A/C code is not explicitly mentioned in each account.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PLclosingaccount.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What can I change on the finance vouchers even after posting?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finance users can amend various fields in Voucher File after the entry is posted. On saving the changes Amended will appear on the voucher file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following fields can be amended: - Reference, Date, Due Date, Despatch Date, Details, Deallocate and Analysis Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:amend.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I stop users from posting journal entries to an Account in Finance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding &amp;quot;(Stop)&amp;quot; on an account line in Chart of Accounts stops users from posting journal entries to the stopped account. If users wish to post journal entries to a stopped account remove &amp;quot;(Stop)&amp;quot; from the account line in Chart of Accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
Users can take ledger printout for stopped accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:StopCofA.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How does NEOSYS handle base and real currency balances?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to understand NEOSYS is to imagine that it keeps completely separate double entry accounting systems for each currency and consolidates them on the fly to produce reports and ledgers for all currencies consolidated. It is easy to use NEOSYS menu settings to print reports and ledgers for individual currencies - ignoring all other currencies, or for all currencies consolidated - which is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every NEOSYS journal line has a currency code and amount. Each journal line also has (in parallel to the currency code and amount) the base currency equivalent amount of the currency amount. The base currency equivalent amount can be considered to be our best &amp;quot;valuation&amp;quot; of the currency amount when expressed in terms of the currency of our base currency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most cases the operator only has to enter the currency code and amount and the NEOSYS system uses its internal semi-static exchange rate files to determine the base currency equivalent amount or &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;. In some cases however, for example, if there is no standard semi-static internal exchange rate for a currency, the operator is required to enter the base currency equivalent amount/value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS keep the base currency balance separate per currency and consolidates them on the fly to produce consolidated reports for &amp;quot;all currencies converted to base currency&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS treats journals in the currency of the base currency as just another currency and not as some special currency. For example, if the base currency happens to be USD then NEOSYS can tell you a) the balances of each currency converted to USD separately b) the balance of all currencies converted to USD c) the balance of real USD excluding all other currencies. This is particularly useful when the base currency is not the main operational currency of the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does NEOSYS Exchange Gains/Loss account not agree exactly with my auditor&#039;s parallel system?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a client finds that the Exchange Gain/Loss account balances as per another parallel system is not in agreement with NEOSYS then they must sit and reconcile the two and notify NEOSYS support of anything that they discover is wrong in NEOSYS so that  can fix it - otherwise we remain confident in NEOSYS without proof to the contrary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Locate the incorrect transactions: Take a ledger account of the Exchange Gain/Loss account in order to locate the incorrect transaction. Open the voucher that made this entry and look at all the base conversions on that voucher. If the exchange rate used was wrong, that could be the reason for the discrepancy.&lt;br /&gt;
#Try running the NEOSYS revaluation program on the journals menu. This will ensure that the NOMINAL base currency balance in all accounts is in exact agreement with the REAL currency balance in those accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#Rounding rules can be different in different systems so that may account for 1 or 2 cent differences per transaction and this can can add up to greater differences in total.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What do I do if I am not happy with the balance of an account?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The balance of any account is, under all circumstances, simply the arithmetic total of the journal lines posted to it, therefore self evidently, if you are not happy with the balance of an account, you must use one of the options on the NEOSYS JOURNAL MENU to post additional journal lines until the total of the journal lines for the desired account gives the balance that you desire for the account. There is no way to amend the balance of an account other than using one of the NEOSYS JOURNAL MENU options to post additional journals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not adjust the balance of one account only?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to understand why this is not allowed you need to know the fundamental and unbreakable rule of double entry accounting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 THE ARITHMETIC TOTAL OF THE BALANCES OF ALL ACCOUNTS MUST AT ALL TIMES BE EQUAL TO ZERO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS, the rule of double entry accounting is applied separately per currency. Therefore the total of base currency must equal zero at all times and the total of each individual currency must be zero at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the above rule, adjusting the balance of one account alone is not allowed because it would break the rule ... because (obviously) it would result in the arithmetic total of all account balances no longer being zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect of the rule is that you cannot ever adjust the balance of one account without simultaneously making an equal an opposite adjustment in some other account or accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What if I cannot determine any account to make an opposite adjustment into?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The opposite account is often some kind of a &amp;quot;write off&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;exchange gain/loss&amp;quot; account but it could be to any account depending on the case. Think long and hard about it and if you are still not clear then you must consult an accountant to help you determine which account to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for NEOSYS revaluation journals the &amp;quot;exchange gain/loss&amp;quot; account, defined in the Company File, is used automatically as the opposite adjustment account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to correct wrong currencies present in NEOSYS reconciliation reports==  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS reconciliation is strictly per currency amounts posted and does not provide any base currency reporting therefore any false currency balances (eg USD posted into an EUR bank account) must be corrected by journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is VAT column not appearing in journal entry page though it has been set up in Journal Setup?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is necessary to put Tax Reg. No . on the Company File in order to get the VAT column in the journal entry page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why do VAT amounts stay in originating company accounts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The VAT amount, in an intercompany posting, will remain in the originating company account and only the NET amount will be posted to the other company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This ensures that when you print/export the journals for one company, the total of the VAT column agrees with the VAT report for that company, this helps make auditing easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also if you issue an invoice for company X then even if, for example, you post the income of that invoice to another company, the VAT on the invoice still has to be shown under the company of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get a break down of the WIP/ACCRUAL?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want a break-down of a control account you look in the subsidiary ledger. (This is the whole point of having a subsidiary ledgers in the first place)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the subsidiary ledger happens to be open item ledger like client/supplier/wip/accrual then you can use the NEOSYS AGED BALANCE REPORT which can show you the breakdown either per account or per open item/translation &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:agedbalrpt.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why am I unable to find/print journal batches created using Recurring Journals?==&lt;br /&gt;
Journal batches created using Recurring Journals Table do not have a period in the batch heading because multiple periods may be posted in the same batch. For such batches, only the period of the first voucher in that batch (in the case of recurring journals this is the earliest period in the batch) will be shown in any journal batch lookup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to lookup or print such batches you need to enter the earliest period in that batch in the period filter. This holds true for any kind of batch lookup or printing like Journal Audit/Export, List of Unposted Journals etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the heading of Journal Audit/Export print shows batch number and the period as blank (highlighted in the below screenshot) for a journal batch created using Recurring Journals Table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:recurring.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The batch shown above contains an entry for period 2/2016. But if 2/2016 is entered in the period filter in Journal Audit/Export, this will give an error message &amp;quot;No journals found.&amp;quot; as shown below. This is because there is currently no Recurring Journal batch whose earliest period is 2/2016. The earliest period of the batch shown above, i.e. 1/2016 must be entered in the period filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:recurring2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to do depreciation using Recurring Journals==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring Journal entries can be used to post depreciation periodically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in the example below, Start date can be set as the beginning of a month. Details field will carry the description of the Asset. Frequency and Number of Instalments can be set as per company policy. Depending on the Total amount and Number of Instalments NEOSYS automatically calculates the Instalment and Remainder amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Debit the Depreciation Account (PL ledger) and credit the Accumulated Depreciation Account (Fixed Assets Ledger).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On posting the Recurring journal other field details (Date Last Posted and Amount Posted to Date) appear automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before Posting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dep.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After Posting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dep2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is ledger printout truncating account name from voucher details field==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account name is mentioned in the details column of the voucher, the system will automatically drop the account name from the details column while taking the account&#039;s ledger printout. This is done because there is no need to show the same account name over and over on all rows of the report when the account name is already mentioned in the report heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle automatic journal entries missing because a user deleted them==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users may delete automatic entries in Finance and then later complain that the invoice was generated but the entries are missing and may even blame the system for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first step would be to locate the missing entries in the Unposted version of the journal where it was automatically generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS keeps the history of every file in the system, where you will be able to find details such as username, date/time updated and even the IP no. of the user that made the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this information is found, the user must be informed that the entry was deleted by &amp;lt;user&amp;gt; at &amp;lt;time&amp;gt; from &amp;lt;ip address&amp;gt;, then provide a working solution which would be to recreate the deleted entries using the old version as a reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not spend too long trying to convince clients that it is their doing. Instead, show them proof using the logs and then direct them towards the solution.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Finance_FAQ&amp;diff=7352</id>
		<title>Finance FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Finance_FAQ&amp;diff=7352"/>
		<updated>2022-02-11T13:40:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How do I allocate open item amounts in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===While entering a journal===&lt;br /&gt;
While entering a journal entry in the ALLOC VCHS Column hit F7 Key and it will pop-up list of allocatable items. Allocate the amount with the correct voucher no. and amount and click on OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===By Vouchers Allocation file===&lt;br /&gt;
Once the journal is posted without allocation you can only allocate from the Voucher Screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers Allocation. Enter the account number or hit the F7 key on the Selected Account(s) field and select the relevant account from the particular subsidiary chart. Click OK and the system will popup the Voucher Allocation page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account selected is a DEBITS outstanding type account (i.e. Trade Debtors), then all the allocable/unallocated CREDIT items (i.e. Receipts, Credit Notes etc.) will show up. Click on any item you wish to allocate Debit items against. After you click you will get a list of all DEBIT allocable/unallocated items which you can now select to be allocated against the CREDIT item you earlier selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Incase you have a selected a CREDITS outstanding type account (i.e. Trade Creditors), then the opposite happens i.e. DEBIT items show first (Payments, Debit Notes etc) and if you click on any of these items you can allocate them against CREDIT outstanding items. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For accounts that have neither CREDIT or DEBIT type selected, the CREDIT items show first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why can I not see ALL allocable items in the Allocation screen?===&lt;br /&gt;
Open item accounts with a lot of transactions might face this issue. The allocation screen cannot handle an unlimited number of entries so it shows the oldest first and omits the newest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I deallocate already allocated vouchers?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers file/Deallocation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile-deallocation.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the Journal type and enter the voucher number. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;As you enter the voucher number system will show the all the vouchers allocated on the bottom right to that voucher.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Deallocation button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile-deallocate.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the Vouchers you want to deallocate and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
#As you click OK system will reconfirm your move by giving a pop up &amp;quot;Ok to deallocate now?&amp;quot; click on OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherconf.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will see an another pop up &amp;quot;Deallocation Completed&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherOKconf.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter supplier invoices for non media / non job items?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In due course of business you might need to purchase items which are not media nor job related. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only way to enter this is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entry / Query.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select JOURNAL (JOU) type and enter the relevant purchase entry here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter supplier credit notes for non media / non job items?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only way to enter this is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entry / Query.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select JOURNAL (JOU) type and enter the reversal / credit note entry (exact reversal of the supplier invoice you entered initially with the particular amount).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I cancel an already issued/posted Payment/Receipt?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no way to delete any journal in NEOSYS, especially the Payment Voucher, to maintain record for auditors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to cancel an already posted Payment/Receipt voucher:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Deallocate any items which you allocated at the time of entering the voucher.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(This frees up the Payment/Receipt voucher to be allocated against a reversal entry and also frees up the allocated item (Supplier/Client Invoice) to be allocated against another voucher)&lt;br /&gt;
#Do a reversal entry of exactly the same Payment/Receipt voucher and allocated the same to the actual entry. Thereafter you can enter the new Payment/Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What happens if I post the same supplier invoice twice?== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows the same supplier invoice to be posted in two different ledgers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, a warning message (shown below) is displayed, when you try to enter a purchase invoice number which is already existing in the same supplier a/c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:duplicatepostingwarning.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I allocate to unposted vouchers?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows allocation to UNPOSTED vouchers (e.g. receipts to unposted invoices) but you can only save the batch (or receipts) as unposted until the unposted vouchers (invoices) have actually been posted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While you are allocating you can see which vouchers are unposted because there is a * in the reference number. There is no way to avoid showing unposted vouchers at the moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I allocate vouchers within a batch?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can allocate a voucher to another voucher which are in the same batch. In order to do so, post the batch and use the Voucher Allocation screen to allocate to the correct voucher.&lt;br /&gt;
For example an Invoice and a Credit Note can be in the same batch and they can be allocated to each other after posting, via the Voucher Allocation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I view a voucher file before the batch is posted?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can view voucher files by saving a journal batch as unposted/unposted without validation, then clicking on the link in the Voucher column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open the voucher that the system wants to generate. The actual voucher number will not be generated until the batch is posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a journal batch cannot be saved due to an error, then you can save the batch by choosing &amp;quot;Save as Unposted Batch WITHOUT VALIDATION&amp;quot; option, then view the voucher file and possibly find the cause of the error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I sort the Journal Audit Report according to Invoice Number?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The journal audit report is ordered as per the date and time of posting as per audit rules. Hence It cannot be sorted on any other fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a simple list of invoices is required then please use the list of invoices from the media or job invoice menus. (See [[List of Invoices]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I amend / repost journal entries?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Posted entries cannot be modified except by NEOSYS under certain circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS has a policy not to do corrections to postings except in special circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Corrections to opening balances and opening items since those are a once off issue.&lt;br /&gt;
#Amendments requested by top management for exceptional adjustment of accounts that cannot be handled in any other way&lt;br /&gt;
#Vouchers are missing from posted batches. See [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System#Voucher_number_missing_from_posted_batches Missing vouchers in posted batches]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General errors in postings such as the financial period, account number and amounts must be corrected by reversal and correct journals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The repercussions of granting permission to edit/repost journals would be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#NEOSYS Financial Module can no longer be trusted if postings are subject to modification&lt;br /&gt;
#It is not common practice to do such manipulations&lt;br /&gt;
#It can lead to possible errors in numbers&lt;br /&gt;
#Staff can become complacent and careless while posting entries and frequently ask for this permission&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, restricting users from editing/reposting journal entries promotes a more healthy and vigilant working environment where users verify each journal entry before posting it which effectively leads to good accounting practices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The NEOSYS software for reposting journals appears to but does NOT work for posting which have already been allocated. It creates cross check balance errors in the open item accounts. To avoid this, any allocations can be de-allocated ESPECIALLY when the account number is being changed or the amount is being reduced or the currency changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information can be changed by authorised users even after posting. In the Voucher File and therefore on the detail ledger&lt;br /&gt;
account/statement: Date, Due Date, Despatch Date, Reference, Details, Analysis Code and allocation. See [[Finance_FAQ#What_can_I_change_on_the_finance_vouchers_even_after_posting.3F|What can I change in the finance voucher after posting?]]. Unfortunately the journal printout is unchanged by any amendments and remains as it was entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I print all accounts in one trial balance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print all accounts in a single trial balance you must print the General Ledger (GL) and select SHOW ALL SUBLEDGERS option. You can also make use of the SHORT VERSION option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:gl-printout.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I  issue Debit/Credit Note in Finance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Journal Setup, enter Voucher Description as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot; and select voucher style from the drop-down menu as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; entered in the Voucher Description is used to give two alternate names for the same heading depending on whether the main account is debited or credited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Journal setup.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, for a voucher entered for this journal type, when the main account is DEBITED, when you click on the Print/Send button, the document generated will say &amp;quot;DEBIT NOTE&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Debit note.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when the main account is CREDITED, when you click on the Print/Send button, the document generated will say &amp;quot;CREDIT NOTE&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Credit note.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same trick is used for &amp;quot;Invoice/Credit Note&amp;quot;, ie, simply enter Voucher Description as &amp;quot;Invoice/Credit Note&amp;quot; and select voucher style from the drop-down menu as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot;. Depending on whether the main account is debited or credited, the Journal Print document will show either &amp;quot;Invoice&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Credit Note&amp;quot; as the heading. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is revaluation handled in NEOSYS? ==&lt;br /&gt;
When a voucher is allocated, NEOSYS automatically checks if there is a difference in base amounts and records the exchange difference by either creating/posting a revaluation voucher or amending one of the vouchers to record the exchange gain/loss.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When does NEOSYS automatically create and post a revaluation voucher? ===&lt;br /&gt;
A Revaluation voucher is created when a user allocates two posted vouchers using the &#039;Voucher Allocation&#039; feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When does NEOSYS amend the latest voucher to record the exchange gain/loss? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vouchers are amended when a user allocates one or many posted vouchers to a unposted journal within the &#039;Journals&#039; screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Which period will the revaluation voucher be posted into? ===&lt;br /&gt;
The RV voucher is posted into the same period as the allocation period. There are three options in Voucher Allocation page to set the allocation period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Current period&#039; - The allocation and RV voucher will use the current calendar period.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Use Settings from above&#039; - The allocation and RV voucher will use the latest period from the range of periods set in the Settings. For example, if range is 1/2020 - 12/2020, the RV voucher and allocation will use 12/2020.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Backdated as far as possible&#039; - The latest voucher period out of the two vouchers will be used by the RV voucher. However, if that period is closed, then use next open period. For example, if a JOU batch is posted in 1/2020 and the corresponding REC in 2/2020, then the allocation period used will be 2/2020. If the periods have been closed till 3/2020 in Finance, then the RV voucher would be posted into the next open period, 4/2020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the “RV” allocation without a voucher number that shows in the Voucher File?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An allocation stating RV without any voucher number is caused by a revaluation process on open item accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revaluation of open item accounts is performed by calculating the base adjustment on each outstanding foreign currency item and posting ONE RV voucher PER ACCOUNT for the total. The RV voucher is allocated to the individual vouchers but unusually the voucher number does not show. The system was initially designed this way in order to avoid a potentially very long list of allocations on RV vouchers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lack of voucher number makes it hard to verify the allocation is correct, however you can trust that it is correct if the usual chain of checks and balances provided by the principle of the double entry proves the whole system is ok.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is planned to change NEOSYS to show RV voucher numbers in all cases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does voucher allocation shows nothing to allocate when there are debits and credits on the account?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In  some abnormal circumstances there may be items outstanding on an account which have base amount outstanding but no currency amount outstanding. NEOSYS allocation procedure works only on outstanding currency amounts so these items cannot be allocated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solution: Run the revaluation program. Its job is to amend the outstanding base amount to agree with the outstanding currency amount at the prevailing exchange rate. Since the outstanding currency amount is zero, it will amend the outstanding base amount to be zero also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is a revaluation journal posted in the prior year when I allocated some vouchers in the prior year?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It doesn&#039;t matter what time and date is on the clock when the allocation is done since you could be be working on 2017 accounts in 2018 and this is normal practice of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It matters what SETTINGS and options you choose when doing the allocation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The allocation is done in a certain period, and any revaluation journal required and generated due to that allocation, is generated in the same period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the allocation/revaluation period cannot be up to the closed period in the Company File, so allocated vouchers in a closed year will be allocated/revalued in the first open period - or the open period that you select.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which accounts can be revalued?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revaluation is only performed on foreign currency tangible assets and liabilities accounts, which are subject to changing exchange rates and have a value and therefore can be revalued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tangible assets and liability accounts represent real value such as debtors, creditors and bank accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whereas P&amp;amp;L accounts are merely totals of historical movements, they do not represent any asset or liability that has a value and therefore cannot be revalued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is closing account missing for some Profit &amp;amp; Loss accounts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Retained Earnings account is the &amp;quot;closing account&amp;quot; of all the P&amp;amp;L accounts. This is a real account in the master chart of accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the closing A/C code is mentioned in the closing A/C field then all accounts under that ledger will automatically take the closing A/C detail even if the closing A/C code is not explicitly mentioned in each account.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PLclosingaccount.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What can I change on the finance vouchers even after posting?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finance users can amend various fields in Voucher File after the entry is posted. On saving the changes Amended will appear on the voucher file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following fields can be amended: - Reference, Date, Due Date, Despatch Date, Details, Deallocate and Analysis Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:amend.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I stop users from posting journal entries to an Account in Finance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding &amp;quot;(Stop)&amp;quot; on an account line in Chart of Accounts stops users from posting journal entries to the stopped account. If users wish to post journal entries to a stopped account remove &amp;quot;(Stop)&amp;quot; from the account line in Chart of Accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
Users can take ledger printout for stopped accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:StopCofA.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How does NEOSYS handle base and real currency balances?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to understand NEOSYS is to imagine that it keeps completely separate double entry accounting systems for each currency and consolidates them on the fly to produce reports and ledgers for all currencies consolidated. It is easy to use NEOSYS menu settings to print reports and ledgers for individual currencies - ignoring all other currencies, or for all currencies consolidated - which is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every NEOSYS journal line has a currency code and amount. Each journal line also has (in parallel to the currency code and amount) the base currency equivalent amount of the currency amount. The base currency equivalent amount can be considered to be our best &amp;quot;valuation&amp;quot; of the currency amount when expressed in terms of the currency of our base currency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most cases the operator only has to enter the currency code and amount and the NEOSYS system uses its internal semi-static exchange rate files to determine the base currency equivalent amount or &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;. In some cases however, for example, if there is no standard semi-static internal exchange rate for a currency, the operator is required to enter the base currency equivalent amount/value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS keep the base currency balance separate per currency and consolidates them on the fly to produce consolidated reports for &amp;quot;all currencies converted to base currency&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS treats journals in the currency of the base currency as just another currency and not as some special currency. For example, if the base currency happens to be USD then NEOSYS can tell you a) the balances of each currency converted to USD separately b) the balance of all currencies converted to USD c) the balance of real USD excluding all other currencies. This is particularly useful when the base currency is not the main operational currency of the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does NEOSYS Exchange Gains/Loss account not agree exactly with my auditor&#039;s parallel system?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a client finds that the Exchange Gain/Loss account balances as per another parallel system is not in agreement with NEOSYS then they must sit and reconcile the two and notify NEOSYS support of anything that they discover is wrong in NEOSYS so that  can fix it - otherwise we remain confident in NEOSYS without proof to the contrary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Locate the incorrect transactions: Take a ledger account of the Exchange Gain/Loss account in order to locate the incorrect transaction. Open the voucher that made this entry and look at all the base conversions on that voucher. If the exchange rate used was wrong, that could be the reason for the discrepancy.&lt;br /&gt;
#Try running the NEOSYS revaluation program on the journals menu. This will ensure that the NOMINAL base currency balance in all accounts is in exact agreement with the REAL currency balance in those accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#Rounding rules can be different in different systems so that may account for 1 or 2 cent differences per transaction and this can can add up to greater differences in total.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What do I do if I am not happy with the balance of an account?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The balance of any account is, under all circumstances, simply the arithmetic total of the journal lines posted to it, therefore self evidently, if you are not happy with the balance of an account, you must use one of the options on the NEOSYS JOURNAL MENU to post additional journal lines until the total of the journal lines for the desired account gives the balance that you desire for the account. There is no way to amend the balance of an account other than using one of the NEOSYS JOURNAL MENU options to post additional journals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not adjust the balance of one account only?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to understand why this is not allowed you need to know the fundamental and unbreakable rule of double entry accounting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 THE ARITHMETIC TOTAL OF THE BALANCES OF ALL ACCOUNTS MUST AT ALL TIMES BE EQUAL TO ZERO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS, the rule of double entry accounting is applied separately per currency. Therefore the total of base currency must equal zero at all times and the total of each individual currency must be zero at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the above rule, adjusting the balance of one account alone is not allowed because it would break the rule ... because (obviously) it would result in the arithmetic total of all account balances no longer being zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect of the rule is that you cannot ever adjust the balance of one account without simultaneously making an equal an opposite adjustment in some other account or accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What if I cannot determine any account to make an opposite adjustment into?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The opposite account is often some kind of a &amp;quot;write off&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;exchange gain/loss&amp;quot; account but it could be to any account depending on the case. Think long and hard about it and if you are still not clear then you must consult an accountant to help you determine which account to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for NEOSYS revaluation journals the &amp;quot;exchange gain/loss&amp;quot; account, defined in the Company File, is used automatically as the opposite adjustment account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to correct wrong currencies present in NEOSYS reconciliation reports==  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS reconciliation is strictly per currency amounts posted and does not provide any base currency reporting therefore any false currency balances (eg USD posted into an EUR bank account) must be corrected by journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is VAT column not appearing in journal entry page though it has been set up in Journal Setup?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is necessary to put Tax Reg. No . on the Company File in order to get the VAT column in the journal entry page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why do VAT amounts stay in originating company accounts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The VAT amount, in an intercompany posting, will remain in the originating company account and only the NET amount will be posted to the other company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This ensures that when you print/export the journals for one company, the total of the VAT column agrees with the VAT report for that company, this helps make auditing easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also if you issue an invoice for company X then even if, for example, you post the income of that invoice to another company, the VAT on the invoice still has to be shown under the company of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get a break down of the WIP/ACCRUAL?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want a break-down of a control account you look in the subsidiary ledger. (This is the whole point of having a subsidiary ledgers in the first place)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the subsidiary ledger happens to be open item ledger like client/supplier/wip/accrual then you can use the NEOSYS AGED BALANCE REPORT which can show you the breakdown either per account or per open item/translation &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:agedbalrpt.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why am I unable to find/print journal batches created using Recurring Journals?==&lt;br /&gt;
Journal batches created using Recurring Journals Table do not have a period in the batch heading because multiple periods may be posted in the same batch. For such batches, only the period of the first voucher in that batch (in the case of recurring journals this is the earliest period in the batch) will be shown in any journal batch lookup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to lookup or print such batches you need to enter the earliest period in that batch in the period filter. This holds true for any kind of batch lookup or printing like Journal Audit/Export, List of Unposted Journals etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the heading of Journal Audit/Export print shows batch number and the period as blank (highlighted in the below screenshot) for a journal batch created using Recurring Journals Table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:recurring.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The batch shown above contains an entry for period 2/2016. But if 2/2016 is entered in the period filter in Journal Audit/Export, this will give an error message &amp;quot;No journals found.&amp;quot; as shown below. This is because there is currently no Recurring Journal batch whose earliest period is 2/2016. The earliest period of the batch shown above, i.e. 1/2016 must be entered in the period filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:recurring2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to do depreciation using Recurring Journals==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring Journal entries can be used to post depreciation periodically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in the example below, Start date can be set as the beginning of a month. Details field will carry the description of the Asset. Frequency and Number of Instalments can be set as per company policy. Depending on the Total amount and Number of Instalments NEOSYS automatically calculates the Instalment and Remainder amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Debit the Depreciation Account (PL ledger) and credit the Accumulated Depreciation Account (Fixed Assets Ledger).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On posting the Recurring journal other field details (Date Last Posted and Amount Posted to Date) appear automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before Posting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dep.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After Posting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dep2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is ledger printout truncating account name from voucher details field==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account name is mentioned in the details column of the voucher, the system will automatically drop the account name from the details column while taking the account&#039;s ledger printout. This is done because there is no need to show the same account name over and over on all rows of the report when the account name is already mentioned in the report heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle automatic journal entries missing because a user deleted them==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users may delete automatic entries in Finance and then later complain that the invoice was generated but the entries are missing and may even blame the system for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first step would be to locate the missing entries in the Unposted version of the journal where it was automatically generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS keeps the history of every file in the system, where you will be able to find details such as username, date/time updated and even the IP no. of the user that made the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this information is found, the user must be informed that the entry was deleted by &amp;lt;user&amp;gt; at &amp;lt;time&amp;gt; from &amp;lt;ip address&amp;gt;, then provide a working solution. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not spend too long trying to convince clients that it is their doing. Instead, show them proof using the logs and then direct them towards the solution.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7338</id>
		<title>Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Generally</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7338"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T13:12:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Configuring Client Security mark */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Configuring letterhead==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring Letterhead]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Configuring Document Footers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Client Security mark==&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;client security mark&amp;quot; which represents the client&#039;s general public identity or trading name is printed on all documents generated out of NEOSYS. This client mark is a mandatory contractual feature and cannot be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:clientmark.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objective of the client mark is that anyone can easily identify the general source of a document or report produced by NEOSYS. It, therefore, MUST clearly indicate the public identity of the client and CANNOT be brief or anonymous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The client mark must be something simple like a brand word or phrase that is common to all companies in a client installation. It should NOT be the precise legal name of the company or the website name or the email domain name because that is not required to achieve the objective and requires more maintenance&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any new companies added later on will use the same mark SO KEEP IT SIMPLE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The corporate group name and possibly geographical location is a good concept to follow for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Adline Kuwait&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a default security mark===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all companies that do not have a specific mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run below command to start a live process in debugger mode,&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Press &#039;x&#039; to open the command line interface,&lt;br /&gt;
 setmark * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a security mark per company===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the above initial general default client mark per database, in case certain companies within the same NEOSYS database cannot use the same mark at all, for example due to different branding, additional client security marks can be assigned to specific companies. This will not be allowed where a simpler client mark could cater for all companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Press &#039;x&#039;,&lt;br /&gt;
 setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Removing a security mark===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Press &#039;x&#039;,&lt;br /&gt;
 setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring fonts and colors for all users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default font and color for all users is set up in the [[System_Configuration_File#Screens_and_Reports| System Configuration File]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be set up per department by setting the same on the department user record in the User Details page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can override the above colors and fonts in their User Details page after login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing the signatory==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Maintenance mode, press F5 and the following command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DEFINITIONS AGENCY.PARAMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Be careful not to insert lines except at the end. Moving other lines down will totally screw NEOSYS!&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then go to the bottom of the page (Ctrl+Page down). Once you reach at the bottom, ENTER enough times to add additional lines if required, then search for &#039;&#039;&#039;line 61&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ctrl+G) and edit the document / add this code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;Name of General Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;General  Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring backup procedures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this configuration file is missing the option to email a NEOSYS backup.zip file daily after the backup has been completed. To configure this go to the Maintenance mode and hit the F5 key and type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOS BACKUP.CFG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In line number 10, set the email address of the recipient/s who should receive a backup.zip file. This method is extremely useful as an offsite backup procedure in case of any server or USB failures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring automated emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default configuration will send email via mailout.neosys.com on port 2500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that neosys mail server will accept email from anywhere as long as the sender email is @neosys.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Authorising Users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preventing users from assigning their own passwords===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The task AUTHORISATION INVENT OWN PASSWORDS should always have the lock NEOSYS to prevent users from creating their own passwords. Most users create unsafe passwords given the choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
People nearly always ask to give their own passwords but you should tell them that NEOSYS always assigns random passwords for security reasons. It is not worth arguing and discussing the point with most people since they don&#039;t usually grasp the importance and soon learn their NEOSYS password anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS support staff who login as NEOSYS are still authorised to create their own passwords but it is better not to leak this information to clients immediately since people will grasp on to it and be disappointed or even offended that you are not granting this privilege to them.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately there is no general way for people to change their own passwords at the moment. Only the few people who have access to the Support Menu and Authorisation File can do it. Changing your own passwords should be on the NEOSYS Help menu so everybody can do it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising access from outside the LAN===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
From 15/2/2008 access to NEOSYS is by default restricted to users from the standard local area network ip numbers starting 192.168, 10 and 127 so you might get clients complaining that they cannot login.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In order to allow access from outside you will have to update the Authorisation File and put a list of valid ip numbers that they are authorised to login from.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
You dont have to put ip numbers on every single user. If the user ip numbers are blank for a user then the system will look for and use the nearest ip numbers on the following users below within the same department. Therefore you only have to put the ip numbers on the bottom &amp;quot;department user&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from a) anywhere in the office and b) from another office with a static ip number of say 80.11.22.33 put something like 192.168.*,10.*,127.*,80.11.22.33&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from anywhere put * This is not recommended but necessary if someone absolutely has to login from anywhere in the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising users to access from dynamic IP when previously only authorized to access from known static IP===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In situations when users who are authorised to access from known static IP till date but now have access to dynamic IPs only , Support must get permission from management before configuring NEOSYS to allow them access from any IP and informing them the risks of allowing users access from any IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support must not agree to do serial work of adding the IP to list of allowed IPs in NEOSYS each time the client gets an IP from the ISP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sample Email:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Dear XXX,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  We need your agreement to allow XXXX users to access NEOSYS from any location/IP address. Until now XXXX users were&lt;br /&gt;
  restricted to office/authorised location only but your IT team is no longer able to provide a static IP.                   &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
  Users will get frustrated when they are unable to log in and will lose valuable time because NEOSYS cannot grant&lt;br /&gt;
  users permission to access from arbitrary dynamic IPs given by the ISP each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Your IT person should provide us with the fixed static address urgently as it is not recommended to enable access&lt;br /&gt;
  from any IP due to risks like access of data by unauthorised persons , malicious hacking attempts etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Please confirm that you understand the risks and permit authorization of access from any IP temporarily and agree&lt;br /&gt;
  to provide our Support Team with a static IP urgently.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Enabling_Minimal_Access_to_Certificate_File_for_Monitoring_Department_Staff| Enabling Minimal Access to Certificate File for Monitoring Department Staff]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Giving users access to the Support Menu==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Support Menu in NEOSYS enables users to access the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Database processes&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Documents in use&lt;br /&gt;
#Stop/Restart NEOSYS service&lt;br /&gt;
#Backup&lt;br /&gt;
#Log&lt;br /&gt;
#Authorisation file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is locked with the task SUPPORT MENU ACCESS and has the LS key. To give any user/I.T. administrator access to this menu, you have to give him the LS key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Payment Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly economise on number of lines used for payment instruction to avoid more lines taking up more space on the printout. This is because sometimes more lines could cause the printout to creep into two pages instead of one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly avoid duplication of payment instructions by copying and pasting it into all company files. It is a blunder to copy and paste the same data into all companies when it can instead be entered just once in the Media/Job Configuration File. This is because anyone maintaining this data in future is likely to fail to notice that the data has to be maintained in multiple places, which will in turn lead to data inconsistency. It is also a waste of time to mindlessly do easy cutting and pasting instead of thinking what is correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment instructions must be entered in the company file ONLY if the payment instructions are different per company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS picks up the first available payment instructions from the following locations and ignores any instructions in the later files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Client file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code&lt;br /&gt;
#Currency file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code left blank&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If, following the above rules, no payment instructions can be found, or the payment instructions are &amp;quot;NONE&amp;quot; or a single dot (.), then no payment instruction are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Leave the currency code field blank in Company file to configure the default payment instructions for all currencies without having to tediously enter them in the Currency file for each and every currency.&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
There is a manually edited flag in the company file on one NEOSYS client which makes the company file payment instructions take precedence over any currency file payment instructions. This may be added to the Client File user interface as &amp;quot;For all currencies&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The usual way of configuring payment instructions is to put it in the Company file under Finance. This configuration allows different payment instructions per currency. If you put the payment instructions in the currency file, then these instructions apply to all companies, unless the manual flag in the company record is manually edited in the maintenance mode by NEOSYS programmers to say that the company file instructions take precedence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Since the rules of getting payment instruction are not simple, if you are *changing* payment instructions, locate where the old instructions are and simply change them without worrying about the rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entering Payment Instructions in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines that have no tags in them (no &amp;lt;&amp;gt; characters) and have up to 10 &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; in them will be chunked, i.e. placed continuously one after the other on the same line, if there is room for the whole chunk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commas are automatically added at the end of chunks that do not already end in commas, except for the last line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add break tags when you want instructions to start on a new line, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample Payment instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 If no written objection is received within 10 days, this invoice will be considered as accepted unconditionally for payment.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Cheques/Demand/Drafts/Bank Transfers to be in favour of NEOSYS.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Bank Name : Commercial Bank of Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
 Account Number : 0XX 00X0XX 00X&lt;br /&gt;
 IBAN Number : AEX00X0000XX00X&lt;br /&gt;
 Swift Code : BBMEAXAD&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above sample appears as below, in NEOSYS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:payinstr.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configure Currency File==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows clients to change how invoice amounts are presented on their invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clients or NEOSYS Support need to edit the subunit field in the Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change this setting, depending on which NEOSYS modules you use, follow the appropriate path: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NEOSYS Menu -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Media&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Finance&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; Files -&amp;gt; Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Currency&amp;amp;ExchangeRateFile.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoices amounts can be displayed in two ways: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 a) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.25&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Leave subunit field blank, this is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 b) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;and 25 fils&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Edit subunit field to &amp;quot;fils&amp;quot; and edit the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifying Payment Terms on Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different payment terms can be concurrently specified at various levels. Any payment terms specified at a more detailed level take precedence over payment terms specified at a more general level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order of preference, when creating an invoice or estimate/quotation, payment terms are looked up in the following order. The first payment terms found are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#New Invoices screen - per invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#Chart of Accounts if not suppressed in configuration file&lt;br /&gt;
#Client File - per client&lt;br /&gt;
#Company File - per company&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File - per database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a full stop (.) or the word NONE in Client or Company File payment terms suppresses any terms found in Company or Configuration File allowing you to suppress, per client or company, any default payment terms specified in the Company or Configuration Files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating Email Alerts in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently this is a manual process done in maintenance mode using F5. It will be replaced by a web interface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Configuring Media Module Email Alerts|Configuring Media Module Email Alerts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find existing alerts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Syntax===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 CREATEALERT alertid module alerttype runhours,... runasusercode {targetusercode,...} testemail} (options)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command must be followed by five parameters in a fixed order and separated by spaces. Two additional parameters and options in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot; may follow in a fixed order. To replace an existing alert use the overwrite option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alertid===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Invent some short identifying alphanumeric code for your alert e.g. XYZ001. It will show in the email subject and is required if you want to change or remove the alert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. One of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*GENERAL&lt;br /&gt;
*FINANCE&lt;br /&gt;
*AGENCY&lt;br /&gt;
*MEDIA&lt;br /&gt;
*JOB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alerttype===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Various alert types are available depending on the module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Alerttypes|Alert Types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runhours===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. &lt;br /&gt;
Syntax: {minutes,,,}:{hours,,,}:{dayofmonth,,,}:{monthNo,,,}:{weekday,,,} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am every day&lt;br /&gt;
 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of every month &lt;br /&gt;
 9:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of months January and July&lt;br /&gt;
 9:15:1,7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 15mins &amp;amp; 30mins past hours 9am and 5pm, on the 15th of every month&lt;br /&gt;
 15,30:9,17:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runasuser===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Determines the authorisation level during processing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Targetuser(s)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional commas separated list of user codes (no spaces!) to receive any output from the alert. Note that some s may not have any output and that some alerts may automatically direct their output to various users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Test email===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. An email address or addresses separated by ;. All emails generated by the process will be redirected here regardless of who they are normally directed at.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. One or more of the following letters must be in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*R=Remove - remove an existing alert (only the alertid parameter is required)&lt;br /&gt;
*O=Overwrite - required to overwrite an existing document.&lt;br /&gt;
*S=Silent&lt;br /&gt;
*ROS=forget last run time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable/Disable Existing Alerts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Identify alert key, in maintenance mode:  &amp;quot;SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit 12th field of the alert record (ENABLED), e.g &amp;quot;ed documents COLL01&amp;quot;. 1 - enabled or 0 - disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alert emails to some executives are being received by their managers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put whatever you like in the executive name but NEOSYS must be able to find their email somehow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if the executive is entered as “Steve Burns” and there is no user called Steve Burns in the Authorisation File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Does the executive name contains an “@” character? then it is the email address&lt;br /&gt;
#Is there a user in Authorisation matching either the executive name (Steve Burns) … or the first word of the executive name (Steve)?&lt;br /&gt;
#If none of the above then the email of the user running  (usually a manager) the process is used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To solve this problem create users matching the executive names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that creating users with email addresses enables them to login to NEOSYS by requesting password reminders to their email address so like all users you must ensure that their authorisation level is appropriately limited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically Running and Emailing Saved Documents==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saved documents in NEOSYS (Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Diary -&amp;gt; Saved Reports) can be configured to run automatically and be emailed to users. This can only be done in maintenance mode, by doing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOCUMENTS &amp;lt;document no.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 12 should be 1 to mean run automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 14 should be the user code to email to. If emailing to multiple users, press Ctrl + E on this line and enter the user codes to email to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 22 should be the scheduled hour e.g. 7 for 7am server time. Use commas for more than one scheduled hour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 25 should be the day of week to run on. e.g. Mon=1, Sun=7. Use commas for more than one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To force the document to run again on the same hour or day for testing changes, you have to clear line 13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about the DOCUMENTS file format, do&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LD DOCUMENTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Safari for MAC OS]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Chrome]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Edge]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Firefox]]==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Clientmark.jpg&amp;diff=7337</id>
		<title>File:Clientmark.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Clientmark.jpg&amp;diff=7337"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T12:45:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Updated screenshot&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7336</id>
		<title>Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Generally</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7336"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T12:31:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Setting a security mark per company */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Configuring letterhead==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring Letterhead]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Configuring Document Footers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Client Security mark==&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;client security mark&amp;quot; which represents the client&#039;s general public identity or trading name is printed on all documents generated out of NEOSYS. This client mark is a mandatory contractual feature and cannot be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:clientsecuritymark.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objective of the client mark is that anyone can easily identify the general source of a document or report produced by NEOSYS. It, therefore, MUST clearly indicate the public identity of the client and CANNOT be brief or anonymous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The client mark must be something simple like a brand word or phrase that is common to all companies in a client installation. It should NOT be the precise legal name of the company or the website name or the email domain name because that is not required to achieve the objective and requires more maintenance&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any new companies added later on will use the same mark SO KEEP IT SIMPLE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The corporate group name and possibly geographical location is a good concept to follow for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Adline Kuwait&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a default security mark===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all companies that do not have a specific mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a security mark per company===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the above initial general default client mark per database, in case certain companies within the same NEOSYS database cannot use the same mark at all, for example due to different branding, additional client security marks can be assigned to specific companies. This will not be allowed where a simpler client mark could cater for all companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run below commands to get into the command line interface,&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Press &#039;x&#039;,&lt;br /&gt;
 setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Removing a security mark===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring fonts and colors for all users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default font and color for all users is set up in the [[System_Configuration_File#Screens_and_Reports| System Configuration File]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be set up per department by setting the same on the department user record in the User Details page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can override the above colors and fonts in their User Details page after login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing the signatory==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Maintenance mode, press F5 and the following command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DEFINITIONS AGENCY.PARAMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Be careful not to insert lines except at the end. Moving other lines down will totally screw NEOSYS!&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then go to the bottom of the page (Ctrl+Page down). Once you reach at the bottom, ENTER enough times to add additional lines if required, then search for &#039;&#039;&#039;line 61&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ctrl+G) and edit the document / add this code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;Name of General Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;General  Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring backup procedures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this configuration file is missing the option to email a NEOSYS backup.zip file daily after the backup has been completed. To configure this go to the Maintenance mode and hit the F5 key and type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOS BACKUP.CFG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In line number 10, set the email address of the recipient/s who should receive a backup.zip file. This method is extremely useful as an offsite backup procedure in case of any server or USB failures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring automated emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default configuration will send email via mailout.neosys.com on port 2500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that neosys mail server will accept email from anywhere as long as the sender email is @neosys.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Authorising Users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preventing users from assigning their own passwords===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The task AUTHORISATION INVENT OWN PASSWORDS should always have the lock NEOSYS to prevent users from creating their own passwords. Most users create unsafe passwords given the choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
People nearly always ask to give their own passwords but you should tell them that NEOSYS always assigns random passwords for security reasons. It is not worth arguing and discussing the point with most people since they don&#039;t usually grasp the importance and soon learn their NEOSYS password anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS support staff who login as NEOSYS are still authorised to create their own passwords but it is better not to leak this information to clients immediately since people will grasp on to it and be disappointed or even offended that you are not granting this privilege to them.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately there is no general way for people to change their own passwords at the moment. Only the few people who have access to the Support Menu and Authorisation File can do it. Changing your own passwords should be on the NEOSYS Help menu so everybody can do it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising access from outside the LAN===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
From 15/2/2008 access to NEOSYS is by default restricted to users from the standard local area network ip numbers starting 192.168, 10 and 127 so you might get clients complaining that they cannot login.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In order to allow access from outside you will have to update the Authorisation File and put a list of valid ip numbers that they are authorised to login from.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
You dont have to put ip numbers on every single user. If the user ip numbers are blank for a user then the system will look for and use the nearest ip numbers on the following users below within the same department. Therefore you only have to put the ip numbers on the bottom &amp;quot;department user&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from a) anywhere in the office and b) from another office with a static ip number of say 80.11.22.33 put something like 192.168.*,10.*,127.*,80.11.22.33&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from anywhere put * This is not recommended but necessary if someone absolutely has to login from anywhere in the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising users to access from dynamic IP when previously only authorized to access from known static IP===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In situations when users who are authorised to access from known static IP till date but now have access to dynamic IPs only , Support must get permission from management before configuring NEOSYS to allow them access from any IP and informing them the risks of allowing users access from any IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support must not agree to do serial work of adding the IP to list of allowed IPs in NEOSYS each time the client gets an IP from the ISP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sample Email:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Dear XXX,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  We need your agreement to allow XXXX users to access NEOSYS from any location/IP address. Until now XXXX users were&lt;br /&gt;
  restricted to office/authorised location only but your IT team is no longer able to provide a static IP.                   &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
  Users will get frustrated when they are unable to log in and will lose valuable time because NEOSYS cannot grant&lt;br /&gt;
  users permission to access from arbitrary dynamic IPs given by the ISP each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Your IT person should provide us with the fixed static address urgently as it is not recommended to enable access&lt;br /&gt;
  from any IP due to risks like access of data by unauthorised persons , malicious hacking attempts etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Please confirm that you understand the risks and permit authorization of access from any IP temporarily and agree&lt;br /&gt;
  to provide our Support Team with a static IP urgently.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Enabling_Minimal_Access_to_Certificate_File_for_Monitoring_Department_Staff| Enabling Minimal Access to Certificate File for Monitoring Department Staff]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Giving users access to the Support Menu==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Support Menu in NEOSYS enables users to access the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Database processes&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Documents in use&lt;br /&gt;
#Stop/Restart NEOSYS service&lt;br /&gt;
#Backup&lt;br /&gt;
#Log&lt;br /&gt;
#Authorisation file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is locked with the task SUPPORT MENU ACCESS and has the LS key. To give any user/I.T. administrator access to this menu, you have to give him the LS key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Payment Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly economise on number of lines used for payment instruction to avoid more lines taking up more space on the printout. This is because sometimes more lines could cause the printout to creep into two pages instead of one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly avoid duplication of payment instructions by copying and pasting it into all company files. It is a blunder to copy and paste the same data into all companies when it can instead be entered just once in the Media/Job Configuration File. This is because anyone maintaining this data in future is likely to fail to notice that the data has to be maintained in multiple places, which will in turn lead to data inconsistency. It is also a waste of time to mindlessly do easy cutting and pasting instead of thinking what is correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment instructions must be entered in the company file ONLY if the payment instructions are different per company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS picks up the first available payment instructions from the following locations and ignores any instructions in the later files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Client file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code&lt;br /&gt;
#Currency file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code left blank&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If, following the above rules, no payment instructions can be found, or the payment instructions are &amp;quot;NONE&amp;quot; or a single dot (.), then no payment instruction are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Leave the currency code field blank in Company file to configure the default payment instructions for all currencies without having to tediously enter them in the Currency file for each and every currency.&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
There is a manually edited flag in the company file on one NEOSYS client which makes the company file payment instructions take precedence over any currency file payment instructions. This may be added to the Client File user interface as &amp;quot;For all currencies&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The usual way of configuring payment instructions is to put it in the Company file under Finance. This configuration allows different payment instructions per currency. If you put the payment instructions in the currency file, then these instructions apply to all companies, unless the manual flag in the company record is manually edited in the maintenance mode by NEOSYS programmers to say that the company file instructions take precedence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Since the rules of getting payment instruction are not simple, if you are *changing* payment instructions, locate where the old instructions are and simply change them without worrying about the rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entering Payment Instructions in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines that have no tags in them (no &amp;lt;&amp;gt; characters) and have up to 10 &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; in them will be chunked, i.e. placed continuously one after the other on the same line, if there is room for the whole chunk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commas are automatically added at the end of chunks that do not already end in commas, except for the last line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add break tags when you want instructions to start on a new line, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample Payment instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 If no written objection is received within 10 days, this invoice will be considered as accepted unconditionally for payment.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Cheques/Demand/Drafts/Bank Transfers to be in favour of NEOSYS.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Bank Name : Commercial Bank of Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
 Account Number : 0XX 00X0XX 00X&lt;br /&gt;
 IBAN Number : AEX00X0000XX00X&lt;br /&gt;
 Swift Code : BBMEAXAD&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above sample appears as below, in NEOSYS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:payinstr.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configure Currency File==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows clients to change how invoice amounts are presented on their invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clients or NEOSYS Support need to edit the subunit field in the Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change this setting, depending on which NEOSYS modules you use, follow the appropriate path: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NEOSYS Menu -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Media&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Finance&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; Files -&amp;gt; Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Currency&amp;amp;ExchangeRateFile.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoices amounts can be displayed in two ways: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 a) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.25&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Leave subunit field blank, this is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 b) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;and 25 fils&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Edit subunit field to &amp;quot;fils&amp;quot; and edit the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifying Payment Terms on Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different payment terms can be concurrently specified at various levels. Any payment terms specified at a more detailed level take precedence over payment terms specified at a more general level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order of preference, when creating an invoice or estimate/quotation, payment terms are looked up in the following order. The first payment terms found are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#New Invoices screen - per invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#Chart of Accounts if not suppressed in configuration file&lt;br /&gt;
#Client File - per client&lt;br /&gt;
#Company File - per company&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File - per database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a full stop (.) or the word NONE in Client or Company File payment terms suppresses any terms found in Company or Configuration File allowing you to suppress, per client or company, any default payment terms specified in the Company or Configuration Files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating Email Alerts in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently this is a manual process done in maintenance mode using F5. It will be replaced by a web interface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Configuring Media Module Email Alerts|Configuring Media Module Email Alerts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find existing alerts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Syntax===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 CREATEALERT alertid module alerttype runhours,... runasusercode {targetusercode,...} testemail} (options)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command must be followed by five parameters in a fixed order and separated by spaces. Two additional parameters and options in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot; may follow in a fixed order. To replace an existing alert use the overwrite option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alertid===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Invent some short identifying alphanumeric code for your alert e.g. XYZ001. It will show in the email subject and is required if you want to change or remove the alert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. One of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*GENERAL&lt;br /&gt;
*FINANCE&lt;br /&gt;
*AGENCY&lt;br /&gt;
*MEDIA&lt;br /&gt;
*JOB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alerttype===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Various alert types are available depending on the module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Alerttypes|Alert Types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runhours===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. &lt;br /&gt;
Syntax: {minutes,,,}:{hours,,,}:{dayofmonth,,,}:{monthNo,,,}:{weekday,,,} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am every day&lt;br /&gt;
 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of every month &lt;br /&gt;
 9:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of months January and July&lt;br /&gt;
 9:15:1,7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 15mins &amp;amp; 30mins past hours 9am and 5pm, on the 15th of every month&lt;br /&gt;
 15,30:9,17:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runasuser===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Determines the authorisation level during processing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Targetuser(s)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional commas separated list of user codes (no spaces!) to receive any output from the alert. Note that some s may not have any output and that some alerts may automatically direct their output to various users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Test email===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. An email address or addresses separated by ;. All emails generated by the process will be redirected here regardless of who they are normally directed at.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. One or more of the following letters must be in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*R=Remove - remove an existing alert (only the alertid parameter is required)&lt;br /&gt;
*O=Overwrite - required to overwrite an existing document.&lt;br /&gt;
*S=Silent&lt;br /&gt;
*ROS=forget last run time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable/Disable Existing Alerts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Identify alert key, in maintenance mode:  &amp;quot;SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit 12th field of the alert record (ENABLED), e.g &amp;quot;ed documents COLL01&amp;quot;. 1 - enabled or 0 - disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alert emails to some executives are being received by their managers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put whatever you like in the executive name but NEOSYS must be able to find their email somehow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if the executive is entered as “Steve Burns” and there is no user called Steve Burns in the Authorisation File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Does the executive name contains an “@” character? then it is the email address&lt;br /&gt;
#Is there a user in Authorisation matching either the executive name (Steve Burns) … or the first word of the executive name (Steve)?&lt;br /&gt;
#If none of the above then the email of the user running  (usually a manager) the process is used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To solve this problem create users matching the executive names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that creating users with email addresses enables them to login to NEOSYS by requesting password reminders to their email address so like all users you must ensure that their authorisation level is appropriately limited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically Running and Emailing Saved Documents==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saved documents in NEOSYS (Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Diary -&amp;gt; Saved Reports) can be configured to run automatically and be emailed to users. This can only be done in maintenance mode, by doing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOCUMENTS &amp;lt;document no.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 12 should be 1 to mean run automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 14 should be the user code to email to. If emailing to multiple users, press Ctrl + E on this line and enter the user codes to email to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 22 should be the scheduled hour e.g. 7 for 7am server time. Use commas for more than one scheduled hour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 25 should be the day of week to run on. e.g. Mon=1, Sun=7. Use commas for more than one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To force the document to run again on the same hour or day for testing changes, you have to clear line 13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about the DOCUMENTS file format, do&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LD DOCUMENTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Safari for MAC OS]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Chrome]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Edge]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Firefox]]==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7335</id>
		<title>Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Generally</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7335"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T12:23:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Setting a default security mark */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Configuring letterhead==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring Letterhead]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Configuring Document Footers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Client Security mark==&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;client security mark&amp;quot; which represents the client&#039;s general public identity or trading name is printed on all documents generated out of NEOSYS. This client mark is a mandatory contractual feature and cannot be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:clientsecuritymark.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objective of the client mark is that anyone can easily identify the general source of a document or report produced by NEOSYS. It, therefore, MUST clearly indicate the public identity of the client and CANNOT be brief or anonymous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The client mark must be something simple like a brand word or phrase that is common to all companies in a client installation. It should NOT be the precise legal name of the company or the website name or the email domain name because that is not required to achieve the objective and requires more maintenance&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any new companies added later on will use the same mark SO KEEP IT SIMPLE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The corporate group name and possibly geographical location is a good concept to follow for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Adline Kuwait&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a default security mark===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all companies that do not have a specific mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a security mark per company===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the above initial general default client mark per database, in case certain companies within the same NEOSYS database cannot use the same mark at all, for example due to different branding, additional client security marks can be assigned to specific companies. This will not be allowed where a simpler client mark could cater for all companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run cmd below to start debugging in Live,&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Press &#039;x&#039; to get the cmd line interface,&lt;br /&gt;
 setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Removing a security mark===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring fonts and colors for all users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default font and color for all users is set up in the [[System_Configuration_File#Screens_and_Reports| System Configuration File]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be set up per department by setting the same on the department user record in the User Details page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can override the above colors and fonts in their User Details page after login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing the signatory==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Maintenance mode, press F5 and the following command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DEFINITIONS AGENCY.PARAMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Be careful not to insert lines except at the end. Moving other lines down will totally screw NEOSYS!&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then go to the bottom of the page (Ctrl+Page down). Once you reach at the bottom, ENTER enough times to add additional lines if required, then search for &#039;&#039;&#039;line 61&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ctrl+G) and edit the document / add this code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;Name of General Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;General  Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring backup procedures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this configuration file is missing the option to email a NEOSYS backup.zip file daily after the backup has been completed. To configure this go to the Maintenance mode and hit the F5 key and type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOS BACKUP.CFG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In line number 10, set the email address of the recipient/s who should receive a backup.zip file. This method is extremely useful as an offsite backup procedure in case of any server or USB failures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring automated emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default configuration will send email via mailout.neosys.com on port 2500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that neosys mail server will accept email from anywhere as long as the sender email is @neosys.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Authorising Users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preventing users from assigning their own passwords===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The task AUTHORISATION INVENT OWN PASSWORDS should always have the lock NEOSYS to prevent users from creating their own passwords. Most users create unsafe passwords given the choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
People nearly always ask to give their own passwords but you should tell them that NEOSYS always assigns random passwords for security reasons. It is not worth arguing and discussing the point with most people since they don&#039;t usually grasp the importance and soon learn their NEOSYS password anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS support staff who login as NEOSYS are still authorised to create their own passwords but it is better not to leak this information to clients immediately since people will grasp on to it and be disappointed or even offended that you are not granting this privilege to them.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately there is no general way for people to change their own passwords at the moment. Only the few people who have access to the Support Menu and Authorisation File can do it. Changing your own passwords should be on the NEOSYS Help menu so everybody can do it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising access from outside the LAN===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
From 15/2/2008 access to NEOSYS is by default restricted to users from the standard local area network ip numbers starting 192.168, 10 and 127 so you might get clients complaining that they cannot login.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In order to allow access from outside you will have to update the Authorisation File and put a list of valid ip numbers that they are authorised to login from.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
You dont have to put ip numbers on every single user. If the user ip numbers are blank for a user then the system will look for and use the nearest ip numbers on the following users below within the same department. Therefore you only have to put the ip numbers on the bottom &amp;quot;department user&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from a) anywhere in the office and b) from another office with a static ip number of say 80.11.22.33 put something like 192.168.*,10.*,127.*,80.11.22.33&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from anywhere put * This is not recommended but necessary if someone absolutely has to login from anywhere in the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising users to access from dynamic IP when previously only authorized to access from known static IP===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In situations when users who are authorised to access from known static IP till date but now have access to dynamic IPs only , Support must get permission from management before configuring NEOSYS to allow them access from any IP and informing them the risks of allowing users access from any IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support must not agree to do serial work of adding the IP to list of allowed IPs in NEOSYS each time the client gets an IP from the ISP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sample Email:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Dear XXX,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  We need your agreement to allow XXXX users to access NEOSYS from any location/IP address. Until now XXXX users were&lt;br /&gt;
  restricted to office/authorised location only but your IT team is no longer able to provide a static IP.                   &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
  Users will get frustrated when they are unable to log in and will lose valuable time because NEOSYS cannot grant&lt;br /&gt;
  users permission to access from arbitrary dynamic IPs given by the ISP each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Your IT person should provide us with the fixed static address urgently as it is not recommended to enable access&lt;br /&gt;
  from any IP due to risks like access of data by unauthorised persons , malicious hacking attempts etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Please confirm that you understand the risks and permit authorization of access from any IP temporarily and agree&lt;br /&gt;
  to provide our Support Team with a static IP urgently.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Enabling_Minimal_Access_to_Certificate_File_for_Monitoring_Department_Staff| Enabling Minimal Access to Certificate File for Monitoring Department Staff]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Giving users access to the Support Menu==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Support Menu in NEOSYS enables users to access the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Database processes&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Documents in use&lt;br /&gt;
#Stop/Restart NEOSYS service&lt;br /&gt;
#Backup&lt;br /&gt;
#Log&lt;br /&gt;
#Authorisation file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is locked with the task SUPPORT MENU ACCESS and has the LS key. To give any user/I.T. administrator access to this menu, you have to give him the LS key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Payment Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly economise on number of lines used for payment instruction to avoid more lines taking up more space on the printout. This is because sometimes more lines could cause the printout to creep into two pages instead of one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly avoid duplication of payment instructions by copying and pasting it into all company files. It is a blunder to copy and paste the same data into all companies when it can instead be entered just once in the Media/Job Configuration File. This is because anyone maintaining this data in future is likely to fail to notice that the data has to be maintained in multiple places, which will in turn lead to data inconsistency. It is also a waste of time to mindlessly do easy cutting and pasting instead of thinking what is correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment instructions must be entered in the company file ONLY if the payment instructions are different per company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS picks up the first available payment instructions from the following locations and ignores any instructions in the later files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Client file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code&lt;br /&gt;
#Currency file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code left blank&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If, following the above rules, no payment instructions can be found, or the payment instructions are &amp;quot;NONE&amp;quot; or a single dot (.), then no payment instruction are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Leave the currency code field blank in Company file to configure the default payment instructions for all currencies without having to tediously enter them in the Currency file for each and every currency.&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
There is a manually edited flag in the company file on one NEOSYS client which makes the company file payment instructions take precedence over any currency file payment instructions. This may be added to the Client File user interface as &amp;quot;For all currencies&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The usual way of configuring payment instructions is to put it in the Company file under Finance. This configuration allows different payment instructions per currency. If you put the payment instructions in the currency file, then these instructions apply to all companies, unless the manual flag in the company record is manually edited in the maintenance mode by NEOSYS programmers to say that the company file instructions take precedence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Since the rules of getting payment instruction are not simple, if you are *changing* payment instructions, locate where the old instructions are and simply change them without worrying about the rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entering Payment Instructions in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines that have no tags in them (no &amp;lt;&amp;gt; characters) and have up to 10 &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; in them will be chunked, i.e. placed continuously one after the other on the same line, if there is room for the whole chunk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commas are automatically added at the end of chunks that do not already end in commas, except for the last line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add break tags when you want instructions to start on a new line, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample Payment instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 If no written objection is received within 10 days, this invoice will be considered as accepted unconditionally for payment.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Cheques/Demand/Drafts/Bank Transfers to be in favour of NEOSYS.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Bank Name : Commercial Bank of Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
 Account Number : 0XX 00X0XX 00X&lt;br /&gt;
 IBAN Number : AEX00X0000XX00X&lt;br /&gt;
 Swift Code : BBMEAXAD&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above sample appears as below, in NEOSYS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:payinstr.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configure Currency File==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows clients to change how invoice amounts are presented on their invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clients or NEOSYS Support need to edit the subunit field in the Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change this setting, depending on which NEOSYS modules you use, follow the appropriate path: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NEOSYS Menu -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Media&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Finance&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; Files -&amp;gt; Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Currency&amp;amp;ExchangeRateFile.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoices amounts can be displayed in two ways: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 a) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.25&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Leave subunit field blank, this is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 b) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;and 25 fils&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Edit subunit field to &amp;quot;fils&amp;quot; and edit the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifying Payment Terms on Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different payment terms can be concurrently specified at various levels. Any payment terms specified at a more detailed level take precedence over payment terms specified at a more general level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order of preference, when creating an invoice or estimate/quotation, payment terms are looked up in the following order. The first payment terms found are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#New Invoices screen - per invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#Chart of Accounts if not suppressed in configuration file&lt;br /&gt;
#Client File - per client&lt;br /&gt;
#Company File - per company&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File - per database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a full stop (.) or the word NONE in Client or Company File payment terms suppresses any terms found in Company or Configuration File allowing you to suppress, per client or company, any default payment terms specified in the Company or Configuration Files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating Email Alerts in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently this is a manual process done in maintenance mode using F5. It will be replaced by a web interface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Configuring Media Module Email Alerts|Configuring Media Module Email Alerts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find existing alerts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Syntax===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 CREATEALERT alertid module alerttype runhours,... runasusercode {targetusercode,...} testemail} (options)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command must be followed by five parameters in a fixed order and separated by spaces. Two additional parameters and options in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot; may follow in a fixed order. To replace an existing alert use the overwrite option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alertid===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Invent some short identifying alphanumeric code for your alert e.g. XYZ001. It will show in the email subject and is required if you want to change or remove the alert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. One of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*GENERAL&lt;br /&gt;
*FINANCE&lt;br /&gt;
*AGENCY&lt;br /&gt;
*MEDIA&lt;br /&gt;
*JOB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alerttype===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Various alert types are available depending on the module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Alerttypes|Alert Types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runhours===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. &lt;br /&gt;
Syntax: {minutes,,,}:{hours,,,}:{dayofmonth,,,}:{monthNo,,,}:{weekday,,,} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am every day&lt;br /&gt;
 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of every month &lt;br /&gt;
 9:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of months January and July&lt;br /&gt;
 9:15:1,7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 15mins &amp;amp; 30mins past hours 9am and 5pm, on the 15th of every month&lt;br /&gt;
 15,30:9,17:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runasuser===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Determines the authorisation level during processing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Targetuser(s)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional commas separated list of user codes (no spaces!) to receive any output from the alert. Note that some s may not have any output and that some alerts may automatically direct their output to various users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Test email===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. An email address or addresses separated by ;. All emails generated by the process will be redirected here regardless of who they are normally directed at.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. One or more of the following letters must be in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*R=Remove - remove an existing alert (only the alertid parameter is required)&lt;br /&gt;
*O=Overwrite - required to overwrite an existing document.&lt;br /&gt;
*S=Silent&lt;br /&gt;
*ROS=forget last run time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable/Disable Existing Alerts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Identify alert key, in maintenance mode:  &amp;quot;SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit 12th field of the alert record (ENABLED), e.g &amp;quot;ed documents COLL01&amp;quot;. 1 - enabled or 0 - disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alert emails to some executives are being received by their managers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put whatever you like in the executive name but NEOSYS must be able to find their email somehow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if the executive is entered as “Steve Burns” and there is no user called Steve Burns in the Authorisation File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Does the executive name contains an “@” character? then it is the email address&lt;br /&gt;
#Is there a user in Authorisation matching either the executive name (Steve Burns) … or the first word of the executive name (Steve)?&lt;br /&gt;
#If none of the above then the email of the user running  (usually a manager) the process is used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To solve this problem create users matching the executive names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that creating users with email addresses enables them to login to NEOSYS by requesting password reminders to their email address so like all users you must ensure that their authorisation level is appropriately limited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically Running and Emailing Saved Documents==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saved documents in NEOSYS (Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Diary -&amp;gt; Saved Reports) can be configured to run automatically and be emailed to users. This can only be done in maintenance mode, by doing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOCUMENTS &amp;lt;document no.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 12 should be 1 to mean run automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 14 should be the user code to email to. If emailing to multiple users, press Ctrl + E on this line and enter the user codes to email to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 22 should be the scheduled hour e.g. 7 for 7am server time. Use commas for more than one scheduled hour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 25 should be the day of week to run on. e.g. Mon=1, Sun=7. Use commas for more than one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To force the document to run again on the same hour or day for testing changes, you have to clear line 13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about the DOCUMENTS file format, do&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LD DOCUMENTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Safari for MAC OS]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Chrome]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Edge]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Firefox]]==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7334</id>
		<title>Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Generally</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7334"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T12:13:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Configuring Client Security mark */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Configuring letterhead==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring Letterhead]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Configuring Document Footers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Client Security mark==&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;client security mark&amp;quot; which represents the client&#039;s general public identity or trading name is printed on all documents generated out of NEOSYS. This client mark is a mandatory contractual feature and cannot be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:clientsecuritymark.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objective of the client mark is that anyone can easily identify the general source of a document or report produced by NEOSYS. It, therefore, MUST clearly indicate the public identity of the client and CANNOT be brief or anonymous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The client mark must be something simple like a brand word or phrase that is common to all companies in a client installation. It should NOT be the precise legal name of the company or the website name or the email domain name because that is not required to achieve the objective and requires more maintenance&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any new companies added later on will use the same mark SO KEEP IT SIMPLE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The corporate group name and possibly geographical location is a good concept to follow for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Adline Kuwait&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a default security mark===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all companies that do not have a specific mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a security mark per company===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the above initial general default client mark per database, in case certain companies within the same NEOSYS database cannot use the same mark at all, for example due to different branding, additional client security marks can be assigned to specific companies. This will not be allowed where a simpler client mark could cater for all companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Removing a security mark ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; AREV &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Exodus &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring fonts and colors for all users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default font and color for all users is set up in the [[System_Configuration_File#Screens_and_Reports| System Configuration File]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be set up per department by setting the same on the department user record in the User Details page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can override the above colors and fonts in their User Details page after login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing the signatory==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Maintenance mode, press F5 and the following command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DEFINITIONS AGENCY.PARAMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Be careful not to insert lines except at the end. Moving other lines down will totally screw NEOSYS!&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then go to the bottom of the page (Ctrl+Page down). Once you reach at the bottom, ENTER enough times to add additional lines if required, then search for &#039;&#039;&#039;line 61&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ctrl+G) and edit the document / add this code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;Name of General Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;General  Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring backup procedures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this configuration file is missing the option to email a NEOSYS backup.zip file daily after the backup has been completed. To configure this go to the Maintenance mode and hit the F5 key and type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOS BACKUP.CFG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In line number 10, set the email address of the recipient/s who should receive a backup.zip file. This method is extremely useful as an offsite backup procedure in case of any server or USB failures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring automated emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default configuration will send email via mailout.neosys.com on port 2500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that neosys mail server will accept email from anywhere as long as the sender email is @neosys.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Authorising Users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preventing users from assigning their own passwords===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The task AUTHORISATION INVENT OWN PASSWORDS should always have the lock NEOSYS to prevent users from creating their own passwords. Most users create unsafe passwords given the choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
People nearly always ask to give their own passwords but you should tell them that NEOSYS always assigns random passwords for security reasons. It is not worth arguing and discussing the point with most people since they don&#039;t usually grasp the importance and soon learn their NEOSYS password anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS support staff who login as NEOSYS are still authorised to create their own passwords but it is better not to leak this information to clients immediately since people will grasp on to it and be disappointed or even offended that you are not granting this privilege to them.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately there is no general way for people to change their own passwords at the moment. Only the few people who have access to the Support Menu and Authorisation File can do it. Changing your own passwords should be on the NEOSYS Help menu so everybody can do it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising access from outside the LAN===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
From 15/2/2008 access to NEOSYS is by default restricted to users from the standard local area network ip numbers starting 192.168, 10 and 127 so you might get clients complaining that they cannot login.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In order to allow access from outside you will have to update the Authorisation File and put a list of valid ip numbers that they are authorised to login from.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
You dont have to put ip numbers on every single user. If the user ip numbers are blank for a user then the system will look for and use the nearest ip numbers on the following users below within the same department. Therefore you only have to put the ip numbers on the bottom &amp;quot;department user&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from a) anywhere in the office and b) from another office with a static ip number of say 80.11.22.33 put something like 192.168.*,10.*,127.*,80.11.22.33&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from anywhere put * This is not recommended but necessary if someone absolutely has to login from anywhere in the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising users to access from dynamic IP when previously only authorized to access from known static IP===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In situations when users who are authorised to access from known static IP till date but now have access to dynamic IPs only , Support must get permission from management before configuring NEOSYS to allow them access from any IP and informing them the risks of allowing users access from any IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support must not agree to do serial work of adding the IP to list of allowed IPs in NEOSYS each time the client gets an IP from the ISP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sample Email:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Dear XXX,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  We need your agreement to allow XXXX users to access NEOSYS from any location/IP address. Until now XXXX users were&lt;br /&gt;
  restricted to office/authorised location only but your IT team is no longer able to provide a static IP.                   &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
  Users will get frustrated when they are unable to log in and will lose valuable time because NEOSYS cannot grant&lt;br /&gt;
  users permission to access from arbitrary dynamic IPs given by the ISP each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Your IT person should provide us with the fixed static address urgently as it is not recommended to enable access&lt;br /&gt;
  from any IP due to risks like access of data by unauthorised persons , malicious hacking attempts etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Please confirm that you understand the risks and permit authorization of access from any IP temporarily and agree&lt;br /&gt;
  to provide our Support Team with a static IP urgently.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Enabling_Minimal_Access_to_Certificate_File_for_Monitoring_Department_Staff| Enabling Minimal Access to Certificate File for Monitoring Department Staff]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Giving users access to the Support Menu==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Support Menu in NEOSYS enables users to access the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Database processes&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Documents in use&lt;br /&gt;
#Stop/Restart NEOSYS service&lt;br /&gt;
#Backup&lt;br /&gt;
#Log&lt;br /&gt;
#Authorisation file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is locked with the task SUPPORT MENU ACCESS and has the LS key. To give any user/I.T. administrator access to this menu, you have to give him the LS key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Payment Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly economise on number of lines used for payment instruction to avoid more lines taking up more space on the printout. This is because sometimes more lines could cause the printout to creep into two pages instead of one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly avoid duplication of payment instructions by copying and pasting it into all company files. It is a blunder to copy and paste the same data into all companies when it can instead be entered just once in the Media/Job Configuration File. This is because anyone maintaining this data in future is likely to fail to notice that the data has to be maintained in multiple places, which will in turn lead to data inconsistency. It is also a waste of time to mindlessly do easy cutting and pasting instead of thinking what is correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment instructions must be entered in the company file ONLY if the payment instructions are different per company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS picks up the first available payment instructions from the following locations and ignores any instructions in the later files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Client file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code&lt;br /&gt;
#Currency file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code left blank&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If, following the above rules, no payment instructions can be found, or the payment instructions are &amp;quot;NONE&amp;quot; or a single dot (.), then no payment instruction are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Leave the currency code field blank in Company file to configure the default payment instructions for all currencies without having to tediously enter them in the Currency file for each and every currency.&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
There is a manually edited flag in the company file on one NEOSYS client which makes the company file payment instructions take precedence over any currency file payment instructions. This may be added to the Client File user interface as &amp;quot;For all currencies&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The usual way of configuring payment instructions is to put it in the Company file under Finance. This configuration allows different payment instructions per currency. If you put the payment instructions in the currency file, then these instructions apply to all companies, unless the manual flag in the company record is manually edited in the maintenance mode by NEOSYS programmers to say that the company file instructions take precedence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Since the rules of getting payment instruction are not simple, if you are *changing* payment instructions, locate where the old instructions are and simply change them without worrying about the rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entering Payment Instructions in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines that have no tags in them (no &amp;lt;&amp;gt; characters) and have up to 10 &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; in them will be chunked, i.e. placed continuously one after the other on the same line, if there is room for the whole chunk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commas are automatically added at the end of chunks that do not already end in commas, except for the last line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add break tags when you want instructions to start on a new line, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample Payment instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 If no written objection is received within 10 days, this invoice will be considered as accepted unconditionally for payment.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Cheques/Demand/Drafts/Bank Transfers to be in favour of NEOSYS.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Bank Name : Commercial Bank of Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
 Account Number : 0XX 00X0XX 00X&lt;br /&gt;
 IBAN Number : AEX00X0000XX00X&lt;br /&gt;
 Swift Code : BBMEAXAD&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above sample appears as below, in NEOSYS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:payinstr.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configure Currency File==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows clients to change how invoice amounts are presented on their invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clients or NEOSYS Support need to edit the subunit field in the Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change this setting, depending on which NEOSYS modules you use, follow the appropriate path: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NEOSYS Menu -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Media&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Finance&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; Files -&amp;gt; Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Currency&amp;amp;ExchangeRateFile.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoices amounts can be displayed in two ways: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 a) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.25&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Leave subunit field blank, this is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 b) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;and 25 fils&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Edit subunit field to &amp;quot;fils&amp;quot; and edit the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifying Payment Terms on Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different payment terms can be concurrently specified at various levels. Any payment terms specified at a more detailed level take precedence over payment terms specified at a more general level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order of preference, when creating an invoice or estimate/quotation, payment terms are looked up in the following order. The first payment terms found are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#New Invoices screen - per invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#Chart of Accounts if not suppressed in configuration file&lt;br /&gt;
#Client File - per client&lt;br /&gt;
#Company File - per company&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File - per database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a full stop (.) or the word NONE in Client or Company File payment terms suppresses any terms found in Company or Configuration File allowing you to suppress, per client or company, any default payment terms specified in the Company or Configuration Files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating Email Alerts in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently this is a manual process done in maintenance mode using F5. It will be replaced by a web interface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Configuring Media Module Email Alerts|Configuring Media Module Email Alerts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find existing alerts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Syntax===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 CREATEALERT alertid module alerttype runhours,... runasusercode {targetusercode,...} testemail} (options)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command must be followed by five parameters in a fixed order and separated by spaces. Two additional parameters and options in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot; may follow in a fixed order. To replace an existing alert use the overwrite option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alertid===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Invent some short identifying alphanumeric code for your alert e.g. XYZ001. It will show in the email subject and is required if you want to change or remove the alert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. One of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*GENERAL&lt;br /&gt;
*FINANCE&lt;br /&gt;
*AGENCY&lt;br /&gt;
*MEDIA&lt;br /&gt;
*JOB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alerttype===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Various alert types are available depending on the module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Alerttypes|Alert Types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runhours===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. &lt;br /&gt;
Syntax: {minutes,,,}:{hours,,,}:{dayofmonth,,,}:{monthNo,,,}:{weekday,,,} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am every day&lt;br /&gt;
 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of every month &lt;br /&gt;
 9:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of months January and July&lt;br /&gt;
 9:15:1,7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 15mins &amp;amp; 30mins past hours 9am and 5pm, on the 15th of every month&lt;br /&gt;
 15,30:9,17:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runasuser===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Determines the authorisation level during processing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Targetuser(s)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional commas separated list of user codes (no spaces!) to receive any output from the alert. Note that some s may not have any output and that some alerts may automatically direct their output to various users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Test email===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. An email address or addresses separated by ;. All emails generated by the process will be redirected here regardless of who they are normally directed at.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. One or more of the following letters must be in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*R=Remove - remove an existing alert (only the alertid parameter is required)&lt;br /&gt;
*O=Overwrite - required to overwrite an existing document.&lt;br /&gt;
*S=Silent&lt;br /&gt;
*ROS=forget last run time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable/Disable Existing Alerts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Identify alert key, in maintenance mode:  &amp;quot;SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit 12th field of the alert record (ENABLED), e.g &amp;quot;ed documents COLL01&amp;quot;. 1 - enabled or 0 - disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alert emails to some executives are being received by their managers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put whatever you like in the executive name but NEOSYS must be able to find their email somehow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if the executive is entered as “Steve Burns” and there is no user called Steve Burns in the Authorisation File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Does the executive name contains an “@” character? then it is the email address&lt;br /&gt;
#Is there a user in Authorisation matching either the executive name (Steve Burns) … or the first word of the executive name (Steve)?&lt;br /&gt;
#If none of the above then the email of the user running  (usually a manager) the process is used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To solve this problem create users matching the executive names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that creating users with email addresses enables them to login to NEOSYS by requesting password reminders to their email address so like all users you must ensure that their authorisation level is appropriately limited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically Running and Emailing Saved Documents==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saved documents in NEOSYS (Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Diary -&amp;gt; Saved Reports) can be configured to run automatically and be emailed to users. This can only be done in maintenance mode, by doing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOCUMENTS &amp;lt;document no.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 12 should be 1 to mean run automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 14 should be the user code to email to. If emailing to multiple users, press Ctrl + E on this line and enter the user codes to email to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 22 should be the scheduled hour e.g. 7 for 7am server time. Use commas for more than one scheduled hour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 25 should be the day of week to run on. e.g. Mon=1, Sun=7. Use commas for more than one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To force the document to run again on the same hour or day for testing changes, you have to clear line 13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about the DOCUMENTS file format, do&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LD DOCUMENTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Safari for MAC OS]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Chrome]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Edge]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Firefox]]==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7333</id>
		<title>Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Generally</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Generally&amp;diff=7333"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T12:11:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Configuring letterhead==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring Letterhead]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Configuring Document Footers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Client Security mark==&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;client security mark&amp;quot; which represents the client&#039;s general public identity or trading name is printed on all documents generated out of NEOSYS. This client mark is a mandatory contractual feature and cannot be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:clientsecuritymark.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objective of the client mark is that anyone can easily identify the general source of a document or report produced by NEOSYS. It, therefore, MUST clearly indicate the public identity of the client and CANNOT be brief or anonymous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The client mark must be something simple like a brand word or phrase that is common to all companies in a client installation. It should NOT be the precise legal name of the company or the website name or the email domain name because that is not required to achieve the objective and requires more maintenance&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any new companies added later on will use the same mark SO KEEP IT SIMPLE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The corporate group name and possibly geographical location is a good concept to follow for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Adline Kuwait&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a default security mark===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all companies that do not have a specific mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== AREV ======&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Exodus ======&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark * &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting a security mark per company===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the above initial general default client mark per database, in case certain companies within the same NEOSYS database cannot use the same mark at all, for example due to different branding, additional client security marks can be assigned to specific companies. This will not be allowed where a simpler client mark could cater for all companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== AREV ======&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Exodus ======&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&amp;lt;clientmark&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Removing a security mark ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== AREV ======&lt;br /&gt;
 SETMARK &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Exodus ======&lt;br /&gt;
 ./run &amp;lt;database&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 x setmark &amp;lt;companycode&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring fonts and colors for all users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default font and color for all users is set up in the [[System_Configuration_File#Screens_and_Reports| System Configuration File]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be set up per department by setting the same on the department user record in the User Details page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can override the above colors and fonts in their User Details page after login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing the signatory==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Maintenance mode, press F5 and the following command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DEFINITIONS AGENCY.PARAMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Be careful not to insert lines except at the end. Moving other lines down will totally screw NEOSYS!&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then go to the bottom of the page (Ctrl+Page down). Once you reach at the bottom, ENTER enough times to add additional lines if required, then search for &#039;&#039;&#039;line 61&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ctrl+G) and edit the document / add this code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;Name of General Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;General  Manager&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring backup procedures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this configuration file is missing the option to email a NEOSYS backup.zip file daily after the backup has been completed. To configure this go to the Maintenance mode and hit the F5 key and type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOS BACKUP.CFG&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In line number 10, set the email address of the recipient/s who should receive a backup.zip file. This method is extremely useful as an offsite backup procedure in case of any server or USB failures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring automated emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the System Configuration File on the NEOSYS Support Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default configuration will send email via mailout.neosys.com on port 2500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that neosys mail server will accept email from anywhere as long as the sender email is @neosys.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Authorising Users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preventing users from assigning their own passwords===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The task AUTHORISATION INVENT OWN PASSWORDS should always have the lock NEOSYS to prevent users from creating their own passwords. Most users create unsafe passwords given the choice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
People nearly always ask to give their own passwords but you should tell them that NEOSYS always assigns random passwords for security reasons. It is not worth arguing and discussing the point with most people since they don&#039;t usually grasp the importance and soon learn their NEOSYS password anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS support staff who login as NEOSYS are still authorised to create their own passwords but it is better not to leak this information to clients immediately since people will grasp on to it and be disappointed or even offended that you are not granting this privilege to them.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately there is no general way for people to change their own passwords at the moment. Only the few people who have access to the Support Menu and Authorisation File can do it. Changing your own passwords should be on the NEOSYS Help menu so everybody can do it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising access from outside the LAN===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
From 15/2/2008 access to NEOSYS is by default restricted to users from the standard local area network ip numbers starting 192.168, 10 and 127 so you might get clients complaining that they cannot login.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In order to allow access from outside you will have to update the Authorisation File and put a list of valid ip numbers that they are authorised to login from.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
You dont have to put ip numbers on every single user. If the user ip numbers are blank for a user then the system will look for and use the nearest ip numbers on the following users below within the same department. Therefore you only have to put the ip numbers on the bottom &amp;quot;department user&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from a) anywhere in the office and b) from another office with a static ip number of say 80.11.22.33 put something like 192.168.*,10.*,127.*,80.11.22.33&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To allow someone to login from anywhere put * This is not recommended but necessary if someone absolutely has to login from anywhere in the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Authorising users to access from dynamic IP when previously only authorized to access from known static IP===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In situations when users who are authorised to access from known static IP till date but now have access to dynamic IPs only , Support must get permission from management before configuring NEOSYS to allow them access from any IP and informing them the risks of allowing users access from any IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support must not agree to do serial work of adding the IP to list of allowed IPs in NEOSYS each time the client gets an IP from the ISP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sample Email:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Dear XXX,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  We need your agreement to allow XXXX users to access NEOSYS from any location/IP address. Until now XXXX users were&lt;br /&gt;
  restricted to office/authorised location only but your IT team is no longer able to provide a static IP.                   &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
  Users will get frustrated when they are unable to log in and will lose valuable time because NEOSYS cannot grant&lt;br /&gt;
  users permission to access from arbitrary dynamic IPs given by the ISP each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Your IT person should provide us with the fixed static address urgently as it is not recommended to enable access&lt;br /&gt;
  from any IP due to risks like access of data by unauthorised persons , malicious hacking attempts etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Please confirm that you understand the risks and permit authorization of access from any IP temporarily and agree&lt;br /&gt;
  to provide our Support Team with a static IP urgently.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Enabling_Minimal_Access_to_Certificate_File_for_Monitoring_Department_Staff| Enabling Minimal Access to Certificate File for Monitoring Department Staff]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Giving users access to the Support Menu==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Support Menu in NEOSYS enables users to access the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Database processes&lt;br /&gt;
#List of Documents in use&lt;br /&gt;
#Stop/Restart NEOSYS service&lt;br /&gt;
#Backup&lt;br /&gt;
#Log&lt;br /&gt;
#Authorisation file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is locked with the task SUPPORT MENU ACCESS and has the LS key. To give any user/I.T. administrator access to this menu, you have to give him the LS key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring Payment Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly economise on number of lines used for payment instruction to avoid more lines taking up more space on the printout. This is because sometimes more lines could cause the printout to creep into two pages instead of one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support MUST strictly avoid duplication of payment instructions by copying and pasting it into all company files. It is a blunder to copy and paste the same data into all companies when it can instead be entered just once in the Media/Job Configuration File. This is because anyone maintaining this data in future is likely to fail to notice that the data has to be maintained in multiple places, which will in turn lead to data inconsistency. It is also a waste of time to mindlessly do easy cutting and pasting instead of thinking what is correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payment instructions must be entered in the company file ONLY if the payment instructions are different per company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS picks up the first available payment instructions from the following locations and ignores any instructions in the later files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Client file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code&lt;br /&gt;
#Currency file&lt;br /&gt;
#Company file with currency code left blank&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If, following the above rules, no payment instructions can be found, or the payment instructions are &amp;quot;NONE&amp;quot; or a single dot (.), then no payment instruction are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Leave the currency code field blank in Company file to configure the default payment instructions for all currencies without having to tediously enter them in the Currency file for each and every currency.&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
There is a manually edited flag in the company file on one NEOSYS client which makes the company file payment instructions take precedence over any currency file payment instructions. This may be added to the Client File user interface as &amp;quot;For all currencies&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The usual way of configuring payment instructions is to put it in the Company file under Finance. This configuration allows different payment instructions per currency. If you put the payment instructions in the currency file, then these instructions apply to all companies, unless the manual flag in the company record is manually edited in the maintenance mode by NEOSYS programmers to say that the company file instructions take precedence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: Since the rules of getting payment instruction are not simple, if you are *changing* payment instructions, locate where the old instructions are and simply change them without worrying about the rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entering Payment Instructions in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines that have no tags in them (no &amp;lt;&amp;gt; characters) and have up to 10 &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; in them will be chunked, i.e. placed continuously one after the other on the same line, if there is room for the whole chunk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commas are automatically added at the end of chunks that do not already end in commas, except for the last line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add break tags when you want instructions to start on a new line, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample Payment instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 If no written objection is received within 10 days, this invoice will be considered as accepted unconditionally for payment.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Cheques/Demand/Drafts/Bank Transfers to be in favour of NEOSYS.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Bank Name : Commercial Bank of Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
 Account Number : 0XX 00X0XX 00X&lt;br /&gt;
 IBAN Number : AEX00X0000XX00X&lt;br /&gt;
 Swift Code : BBMEAXAD&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above sample appears as below, in NEOSYS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:payinstr.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configure Currency File==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows clients to change how invoice amounts are presented on their invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clients or NEOSYS Support need to edit the subunit field in the Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change this setting, depending on which NEOSYS modules you use, follow the appropriate path: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NEOSYS Menu -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Media&amp;quot; OR &amp;quot;Finance&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; Files -&amp;gt; Currency &amp;amp; Exchange Rate File. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Currency&amp;amp;ExchangeRateFile.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoices amounts can be displayed in two ways: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 a) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.25&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Leave subunit field blank, this is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 b) &amp;quot;Five thousand, three hundred and forty five &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;and 25 fils&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 Do: Edit subunit field to &amp;quot;fils&amp;quot; and edit the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifying Payment Terms on Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different payment terms can be concurrently specified at various levels. Any payment terms specified at a more detailed level take precedence over payment terms specified at a more general level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order of preference, when creating an invoice or estimate/quotation, payment terms are looked up in the following order. The first payment terms found are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#New Invoices screen - per invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#Chart of Accounts if not suppressed in configuration file&lt;br /&gt;
#Client File - per client&lt;br /&gt;
#Company File - per company&lt;br /&gt;
#Configuration File - per database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a full stop (.) or the word NONE in Client or Company File payment terms suppresses any terms found in Company or Configuration File allowing you to suppress, per client or company, any default payment terms specified in the Company or Configuration Files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also refer to: [[Agency_FAQ#What_is_the_difference_between_terms_of_payment_and_payment_instructions.3F|Difference between terms of payment and payment instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating Email Alerts in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently this is a manual process done in maintenance mode using F5. It will be replaced by a web interface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Configuring Media Module Email Alerts|Configuring Media Module Email Alerts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find existing alerts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Syntax===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 CREATEALERT alertid module alerttype runhours,... runasusercode {targetusercode,...} testemail} (options)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command must be followed by five parameters in a fixed order and separated by spaces. Two additional parameters and options in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot; may follow in a fixed order. To replace an existing alert use the overwrite option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alertid===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Invent some short identifying alphanumeric code for your alert e.g. XYZ001. It will show in the email subject and is required if you want to change or remove the alert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. One of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*GENERAL&lt;br /&gt;
*FINANCE&lt;br /&gt;
*AGENCY&lt;br /&gt;
*MEDIA&lt;br /&gt;
*JOB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Alerttype===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Various alert types are available depending on the module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Setting up and Configuring NEOSYS Media System#Alerttypes|Alert Types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runhours===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. &lt;br /&gt;
Syntax: {minutes,,,}:{hours,,,}:{dayofmonth,,,}:{monthNo,,,}:{weekday,,,} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am every day&lt;br /&gt;
 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of every month &lt;br /&gt;
 9:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 9am on the 15th of months January and July&lt;br /&gt;
 9:15:1,7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run at 15mins &amp;amp; 30mins past hours 9am and 5pm, on the 15th of every month&lt;br /&gt;
 15,30:9,17:15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Runasuser===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required. Determines the authorisation level during processing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Targetuser(s)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional commas separated list of user codes (no spaces!) to receive any output from the alert. Note that some s may not have any output and that some alerts may automatically direct their output to various users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Test email===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. An email address or addresses separated by ;. All emails generated by the process will be redirected here regardless of who they are normally directed at.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional. One or more of the following letters must be in &amp;quot;()&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*R=Remove - remove an existing alert (only the alertid parameter is required)&lt;br /&gt;
*O=Overwrite - required to overwrite an existing document.&lt;br /&gt;
*S=Silent&lt;br /&gt;
*ROS=forget last run time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable/Disable Existing Alerts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Identify alert key, in maintenance mode:  &amp;quot;SORT DOCUMENTS ALERTS&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit 12th field of the alert record (ENABLED), e.g &amp;quot;ed documents COLL01&amp;quot;. 1 - enabled or 0 - disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alert emails to some executives are being received by their managers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put whatever you like in the executive name but NEOSYS must be able to find their email somehow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if the executive is entered as “Steve Burns” and there is no user called Steve Burns in the Authorisation File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Does the executive name contains an “@” character? then it is the email address&lt;br /&gt;
#Is there a user in Authorisation matching either the executive name (Steve Burns) … or the first word of the executive name (Steve)?&lt;br /&gt;
#If none of the above then the email of the user running  (usually a manager) the process is used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To solve this problem create users matching the executive names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that creating users with email addresses enables them to login to NEOSYS by requesting password reminders to their email address so like all users you must ensure that their authorisation level is appropriately limited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically Running and Emailing Saved Documents==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saved documents in NEOSYS (Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Diary -&amp;gt; Saved Reports) can be configured to run automatically and be emailed to users. This can only be done in maintenance mode, by doing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ED DOCUMENTS &amp;lt;document no.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 12 should be 1 to mean run automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 14 should be the user code to email to. If emailing to multiple users, press Ctrl + E on this line and enter the user codes to email to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 22 should be the scheduled hour e.g. 7 for 7am server time. Use commas for more than one scheduled hour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Line 25 should be the day of week to run on. e.g. Mon=1, Sun=7. Use commas for more than one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To force the document to run again on the same hour or day for testing changes, you have to clear line 13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about the DOCUMENTS file format, do&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LD DOCUMENTS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Safari for MAC OS]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Chrome]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Edge]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Configuring Firefox]]==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7331</id>
		<title>Media FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7331"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T06:53:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Why am I not allowed to enter a negative amount in the &amp;#039;Gross Unit Amount&amp;#039; field? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How do I get subtotals on a Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to get subtotals at least one or more options in the Order field has to be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediadiaryfaq.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to show cost tax amount in Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please read [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Report_on_Cost_VAT_Tax | Report on Cost VAT Tax]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is a despatch status?==&lt;br /&gt;
Despatch status can be the fax number, address, e-mail, date, representative name, etc or any other information regarding the despatch of a booking order or invoice generated from NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch status of the booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch status can be viewed in the ‘despatch record’ column when generating a list of the booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Viewingdespatchstatus.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch status of existing booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old order from Media &amp;gt; Booking Orders &amp;gt; Old Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Updatedespatchorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch date shows on the clients statement of account in the finance module. Before generating the client account statement select Despatch date in Options on the Statement of account page, this adds a Date Sent column in the client account statement which shows the despatch date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Despatchdatestatement.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter/update the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old Media Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Old med inv.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I save an invoice proforma in NEOSYS?===&lt;br /&gt;
When generating an invoice, select Save Proforma on the invoice formatting page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediainvoiceproforma.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view saved invoice proformas?===&lt;br /&gt;
To view saved invoice proformas go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas and enter the proformas invoice number in the Invoice No. field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Invoiceproformas.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I add or amend client order number when reprinting invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas to view the Old Media Invoices page as shown in [[Media_FAQ#Where_can_I_view_saved_invoice_proformas.3F|&amp;quot;Where can I view saved invoice proformas&amp;quot;]]. Enter the invoice number in the Invoice No. field and the new client order number in the Client Order No. field, then click Reprint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be useful when the order number is not known at the time of invoicing e.g when invoicing early or when the client changes their mind. It saves having to manually amend the invoice text before submission to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The client order number on the schedule is also updated, but only if it is both present and matches the order number being amended on the invoice. This is to avoid confusion in the rare case when issuing multiple invoices with different client order numbers from the same schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I cancel/credit note an invoice?===&lt;br /&gt;
New Method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click invoice on the schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Credit note option.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the credit note in journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OLD Method:&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an Invoice in media you need to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove the ad dates from the date grid in schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the INVOICE button at the top of the dates column (you will be asked to update the version number (say no) and save the schedule (say yes)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the invoice creation screen don’t chose any options (except maybe enter the invoice date) and click &amp;quot;Proforma&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the invoice journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to invoice a specific range of ads in a schedule spanning over many months?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to do this, certify the ads in the date range you want to invoice and then, invoice using the option &amp;quot;Certified Ads Only&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to certification screen by clicking the &#039;Certify&#039; button in the schedule file or Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Certificates &amp;gt; Certificate/Voucher File.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Date Range and Schedule No and click &#039;Update All&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter [[Media_Types_File#Certification | Certification No]] and click OK. A popup will inform you of how many ads were certified.&lt;br /&gt;
#Return to the schedule file, click &#039;Invoice&#039; button and under the option title &amp;quot;Certified/All&amp;quot; choose the option &amp;quot;Certified ads only&amp;quot; and invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to do partial invoicing in a schedule?===&lt;br /&gt;
Summary of the procedure for 50% partial invoicing:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#After the schedule has been booked, add &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; under the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column for all vehicle lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; from all vehicle lines&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can get tedious in case of schedules with too many lines, but you will save time using the keyboard shortcuts mentioned in the detailed steps below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the first vehicle line, under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column enter -50% (don&#039;t press enter or any key yet)&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the keyboard down arrow key&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; key when you get the popup &amp;quot;Do you want the changes to be rebooked?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard shortcut Alt + y (to copy the -50% from previous line)&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 till all lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first vehicle&#039;s &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;Del&amp;quot; key and then down arrow key. Repeat this till no lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I cancel a booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an issued booking order you can remove the appearance dates from the Dates calendar in the media schedule and click on Book to generate a media booking cancellation for the ads that have been removed from the Dates calendar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Bookingordercancel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I suppress free ads on the booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
On the New booking order page you can select the Suppress Free option in order to not show the free ads on the booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Suppressfreeads.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may be possible that for some reason the number of ads that you have charged the client for are more than the number of ads you actually booked with the vehicle supplier. NEOSYS allows you to enter this information in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For eg, you bill the client for 500 radio spots and place an order for only 400 actually. Now the agency can enter the number of ads as 500 in the schedule, 100 of which can be selected as &#039;free to agency&#039; ads. If you do not want these &#039;free to agency&#039; ads to show in the booking order you can select Suppress free ads when generating the order to prevent them from showing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to do free ads for digital media?==&lt;br /&gt;
To enter Free Ads, we can put the Ads on a separate line and type a word like &amp;quot;FREE&amp;quot; in the discount column so that the net unit price of that line is zero, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Free_Ads_Digital_Media.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I assess the value of free ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
The Net amount for free ads is zero and same appears in all media diary reports. The gross amount also appears as blank because the gross columns in the media diary report are for paid ads where gross price is the unit price multiplied by the total number of ads. The ads with net unit price zero are considered free ads and not paid, so gross price for them appears as blank in the gross bill/cost columns. Hence it becomes difficult to assess the value of free ads, as gross is blank and net value is zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following reports to evaluate free ads:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In Media Diary reports, look for Gross cost/bill in the Net Free cost/bill columns.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Summary of Paid and Free Ads&amp;quot; report shows the gross bill for the free ads in schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#How_do_I_issue_a_credit_note_for_part_of_a_schedule.3F How do I issue a credit note for specific ads?]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Schedule_file#Version_section|What is a version?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I view historical changes made to a database record?==&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a database record in NEOSYS is updated or modified; the system creates a new version of it and saves the record creating a trail of all previously edited versions linked to the most updated one. Whenever a database record is opened for viewing, the user will get a complete list of history of edits done on the record along with a link to each version. This will help the user to pull out historic edits on any single record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to split large schedules?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There could be scenarios where the schedule created is too large to save or too big to be handled by NEOSYS. This could be because there are too many spots across too many dates or the vehicle used does not support bulk ads. To address such issues schedules can be split into smaller schedules. To do so&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the schedule in question to a new schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the new schedule, remove the past ads that are already booked and invoiced in the older schedule. Only retain ads for future dates and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the old schedule, remove future ads that are now present in the newly copied schedule and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get subtotals on a schedule/plan printout?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the subtotals to appear on the printout the schedule/plan lines have to be separated by a blank line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The schedule printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The invoice printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I insert new rows in the schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
Schedule lines can be added or removed conveniently by clicking on the &#039;+&#039; and &#039;-&#039; icons respectively. You can also do so by clicking on the Vehicle code field and press &#039;ctrl+n&#039; (to add a line above the selected field) or the &#039;down arrow&#039; key (to add a line below the selected field). When inserting a schedule row NEOSYS gives us various options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediascheduleinsertline.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in a vehicle line?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you try to save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in any vehicle line, you will face the below error message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NET UNIT AMOUNT CANNOT BE NEGATIVE, WITHOUT COMMENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This message is deliberately vague and not a plain statement because entering negative amounts will cause variety of issues such as negative income, negative figures in some billing analysis reports and possibly even breaking VAT regulations over reporting of discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, the total number of ads for the client in use will increase along with Media diary report displaying negative figures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However as long as the Finance team is aware of these possible issues, NEOSYS allows users to enter a negative Net Amount in the vehicle line, IF the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; is entered somewhere in the schedule. You can sneak it into any field in the schedule file, such as Private comments, so it doesn&#039;t show to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend doing this in TEST database first, to check how the Media and Finance reports display the ads and their amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why am I not allowed to enter a negative amount in the &#039;Gross Unit Amount&#039; field?===&lt;br /&gt;
A negative amount cannot be directly entered in the Gross Unit Amount field since NEOSYS does not allow you to enter any amount less than &#039;0&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Negative amt.png|frameless|223x223px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple methods of entering negative amounts in the vehicle line, which depend on how you want Finance accounts to record these amounts and Media/Finance reports to display them. Some examples are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-100AED&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039; or &#039;Other&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;50AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-200%&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039;. (This adds a positive balance to Gross Unit Amt total in Media Diary, which you may not prefer)&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;50&#039; in &#039;Loading&#039; and &#039;-200%&#039; in &#039;Discount&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to restrict the days on which ads can be placed==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are four ways to restrict this. In order of precedence,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Days field. (Values: Numbers 1-7) See Market file to check what number correlates to which day of the week.&lt;br /&gt;
#Program/Position field. (Keywords: FRIDAY/ friday/ FRI/ fri) For single day use &amp;quot;Mon&amp;quot;, ranges use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed&amp;quot;, ranges &amp;amp; single day use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed Sat&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
#Specification field. (Keywords: Same as point 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Vehicle file (Refer [[Vehicle_File#Day_of_Week|Day of week]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Adrestrict.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods?==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the multiple period schedule numbers are entered in the Schedule Code/No field by inserting extra lines select the vehicle you wish to book (will show automatically if only one vehicle in the schedule) and select the One combined order option. This would generate one single order for all the schedules even if they belong to separate periods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Multiperiodbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue separate booking orders for each vehicle in a schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
As the schedule number appears on the Schedule Code/No field the system will ask you which vehicles you wish to book considering the schedule has multiple vehicles. The system would generate an independent booking order for each of the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE - even if one or more vehicles have the same supplier there will be a separate booking order for each vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Massbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to send out one consolidated booking order comprising multiple schedules, vehicle and suppliers to an associate agency. Once you have entered the multiple schedule numbers and selected the required vehicle/vehicles select the One combined order option, this option would issue one consolidated booking order for all the vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Consolidateorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue Amendment Booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order with multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
For issuing amendment booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order, all vehicle lines of all schedules which are a part of the consolidated/combined booking order need to be amended. Follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For schedules that do not require any change, enter a dot on the vehicle line (which appeared in the combined booking order), eg. in the &amp;quot;Loading&amp;quot; field and save the schedule. Then remove the dot and resave the schedule. A message to rebook this line will appear, to which you MUST select Yes.&lt;br /&gt;
#For the schedule&#039;s vehicle line where an actual change is required, make the amendment and then select the &amp;quot;Book&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add all the schedules and the vehicle code in new booking page, select the &amp;quot;One combined order&amp;quot; option and select any Amendment Order Style as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that you check the Preview/Draft before clicking Book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I book one media vehicle through different suppliers?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is not uncommon and perfectly normal to book a particular media/vehicle through different suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS you have to create a new vehicle file record with a different vehicle code but with similar details and linked to the alternative supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the correct vehicle code for any particular schedule and booking, all the various operational and management reports can distinguish between the two operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to merge the two vehicles on management reports then mark the second and subsequent media vehicle records &amp;quot;analyse as&amp;quot; field to be the original vehicle code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get billing analysis both by supplier and in total for the vehicle, ensure that the vehicle name is spelt and punctuated ABSOLUTELY IDENTICAL on all Vehicle File records for the same vehicle on all suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you order the report simply by vehicle, the reporting program will merge the billings into one line where the names are identical. If you want to see the billings of the vehicle per supplier use order 1. by vehicle 2. by supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to modify / add terms to Media Booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To amend or to add the standard notes/terms at the bottom of booking orders, go to Media --&amp;gt; Files --&amp;gt; Media Type File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The booking order notes are different for each media type - Magazines, Radio etc. so you must select the type of media that you want to change and do them all one by one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Open and select a media type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the desire booking notes. There may be separate sections for English and other languages so you should consider changing the language in all sections. Each language sections starts something like %SPANISH% etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media type file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What tax % is used when using the &amp;quot;Add Standard Tax&amp;quot; on the booking order creation?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system first checks the &amp;quot;Invoice tax code&amp;quot; field  in the Media Configuration File for the rate%. Otherwise if no tax code is entered then the system uses first tax code in the Tax Rate File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system does not use the tax/VAT code from the schedule, because that is the tax/VAT rate to the client which could, at least in principle, be zero or something else, and be different from the tax/VAT rate charged by the supplier to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I create a Transmission Certificate/Airing Certificate?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For all ads on one schedule, you can print the schedule in the style of a “Certificate” [[File:mediascheduleprint.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To filter certified ads by more specific criteria, select the Certified filter in the media diary, including the other filters you require. Remember to re-title the media diary report however you like eg “Transmission Certificate”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MediaDiaryTransCertFilter.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How are ads certified automatically?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Automatic_certification_by_importing_Ad_monitoring_data Automatic certification by importing Ad monitoring data]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter multilevel clients and brands in the Client and Brand File?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see how multilevel clients can be entered, refer [[Agency_FAQ#How_do_I_classify_clients_based_on_industry_or_parent_company.3F|How do I classify clients based on industry or parent company?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multilevel brands are represented by indenting the brand names. The number of spaces in indenting signifies the level of a particular brand. Enter the brands in the Client and Brand File as shown in the example below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example Level 1 brands are Mondelez International and Nestle. Notice the red highlight which indicates that Level 2 brand names Kraft, Cadbury, Wonka and L&#039;oreal are indented by 1 space and the Level 3 brands like Capri Sun, Twirl, Nerds etc. are indented by 2 spaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sub-brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While searching for brands under the client, the list will show multilevel brands as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Brandsselect.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I stop a specific brand within Client and Brand file?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can stop usage of brands on documents by putting the tag &amp;lt;STOP&amp;gt; in the brand name under the client and brand file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After doing so,user will get the following message if he selects this brand:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stop error.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I use different client names for media and for billing purposes?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A standard issue faced by all agencies is that sometimes they have to act as a third-party between another agency (A) and that agency&#039;s client (C), i.e. they receive instructions from and have to bill A for ads that belong to C. Here the booking order will show client name C and invoice will be issued to Agency A.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, in the Client and Brand file for agency &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;, put &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; at the beginning of the brand name with a colon between &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the brand name. So name of the brand will be &amp;quot;C:brandname&amp;quot;. Then the booking order will display client name as &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the invoice will be issued to &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example shown below, the agency acts as a third-party agency by billing &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; for ads that belong to the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot;. To do this, in the &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; Client and Brand file, brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is created with name &amp;quot;KIA:Cerato&amp;quot;, where KIA is the client that owns the brand &amp;quot;Cerato&amp;quot;. So when brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is used in a schedule, when issuing a Booking Order it shows the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot;. But when issuing an invoice, it will be issued to the agency &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CandB File.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Booking Order.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Invoice.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the numeric value that is accepted in week plan ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter number of ads by week separated by slashes (e.g. &amp;quot;1/2//4&amp;quot; mean 1 ad in the 1st week, 2 in the 2nd and 4 in the 4th week. For weeks that cross two months, put something like &amp;quot;2+3&amp;quot; to indicate ads per month)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I handle &amp;quot;Allow Over Plan&amp;quot; error?==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Error:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  “Cannot save “REF###” because:&lt;br /&gt;
   YTD Planned Amount Exceeded (XXX)”&lt;br /&gt;
   If authorized, you may check the “Allow Over Plan” checkbox in the schedule heading”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Explanation:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens when the planned amount (in the media plan) for the brand and client is more less then the scheduled ie the schedule is in excess of the plan for that period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Solution:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
This is just a warning and you can avoid this message by clicking on allow over budget next to the company code section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I avoid getting 0 (zero) invoices to clients when amending cost to supplier after invoicing the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
After invoicing a schedule, if you change any cost information (leaving the bill information intact) and issue a cost invoice (to create the relevant journal entries), the system will also issue a 0 (zero) invoice to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These zero invoices cannot be avoided and help to track any audit trail information. Either way the zero items do not appear on the outstanding statement so it shouldn&#039;t be a problem at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(SB to please add more)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to setup and operate the List of Materials Pending Delivery reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Pending_Materials|Refer here to set up the List of materials pending]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways to get off from the list of pending list&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Materials file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Material &amp;gt; Materials File. To get the Material details on the screen enter the material code on the material number field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Material code can be seen on the List of material pending delivery on the Original Schedule Column.&lt;br /&gt;
#To get the material off from the pending list, enter the material code or enter anything in the material code field to indicate the delivery and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Schedule===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The material code can also be entered in the materials section on the bottom of the schedule file without going to the Material File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; When Materials from one schedule are reused on other schedules, then, to avoid duplicate materials records being generated in the material file by the secondary schedule, the original schedule no and material letter should be entered in the secondary schedule&#039;s material section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered?==&lt;br /&gt;
All the currency on the cost line is taken from the vehicle file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the steps to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the vehicle file and change the currency you want to show on the cost line in the schedule and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the schedule and re-type the details in a new line and delete wrongly entered line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to view a weekly summary of scheduled ads for a brand?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media schedules can consolidated and printed in the format of media plans by printing an empty dummy media plan (one with no lines). After creating such a empty dummy plan, printing it results in the plan printout being dynamically &amp;quot;reverse engineered&amp;quot; on the fly from whatever approved media schedules are currently in the system for the same brand and period as the empty plan. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plan printout currency is always base currency currently regardless of whatever currency you put on the dummy plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Steps:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create an EMPTY plan for the desired period and brand that you want.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039; - You only need do this once)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createemtpyplan.jpg|center|frame|How to create empty plan]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Plans &amp;gt; Plan File and click &amp;quot;Print/Send&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:menumediaplanplanprintout.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Type: Weekly (Select time and details columns if you want them)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createdetailedsummaryrpt.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Print/Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display language, frequency and circulation for a vehicle ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently there are two ways for displaying this information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle notes &lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information into the VEHICLE FILE NOTES field which it great if you use the same vehicle on many schedule lines. Notes at the bottom of the schedule work best in this scenario.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Eg: A schedule with 20 lines but only 5 vehicles .. the information is best places as three lines of notes in the footing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Alternatively you can add the information at the vehicle name in abbreviated fashion. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclenotes.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle names&lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information to the name means that the information shows wherever the name shows which ends up pretty good eg on billing analysis report too. It allows any type of information to be shown without adding lots of custom columns which vary tremendously per media type, client and market.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclename.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Circulation is the number of paid subscribers that magazines and newspapers have. Broadcast media such as television and radio do not use the term circulation, instead they measure their audiences in terms of viewers and listeners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display artwork / creative / misc charges in a schedule to a client?==&lt;br /&gt;
Full service agencies generally tend to provide clients with a single media schedule outlining the media vehicles proposed along with artwork, creative, misc charges related to this specific campaign. Other NEOSYS clients would create a media schedule separately and issue a job estimate for the artwork charges. This article will explain how to incorporate the media vehicles and artwork/other charges in a single schedule printout for client approval.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 1===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is suitable if we want to enter additional charges on a per ad basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such charges can be entered in the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; charges column on the media schedule data entry screen. If there are multiple charges, these could be entered separated with a forward slash. You can also enter text to indicate the type of charge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ProductionChargeinSch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 2===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is applicable if we have multiple ads/vehicles and want to show additional charges as a single amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use the following method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a dummy vehicle called ARTWORK with an internal (dummy) supplier&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new line in the schedule using dummy artwork vehicle&lt;br /&gt;
#Select any date and assign 1 ad to it so that the number of ads is 1 for this vehicle&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkanydate.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter gross unit cost in the bill column.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Do not enter anything in the cost column&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicle.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A printout of the above schedule will look like as follows:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicleschdprint.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Suppressing day and date of vehicle program from appearing on schedule printout and invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not wish to display the day and date on this schedule or on the invoice you can refer to the following procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In Schedule File&lt;br /&gt;
#*Leave the dates blank&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter the Number of Ads directly &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:leavedatesblankschedule.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While printing the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Print/Send &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:deselectcheckno.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While generating the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select All Ads under Certified/All&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Create Invoice &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:invoicechecknumber.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not view the booking order for an ad which is moved to a different date?==&lt;br /&gt;
While moving an ad to a different date, we first remove the existing ad from the date on which is scheduled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this process, all information related to the ad is lost i.e. booking order no. /certificates / supplier invoice no. / invoice no. etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens irrespective of whether the schedule is saved or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a specific example below, we can notice this happening when we try to enter the supplier invoice number for an ad which has been moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#We schedule an ad for the 25th of a May &amp;amp; Book it &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-1.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move the ad to 30th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move it back to the 25th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-3.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While trying to enter the supplier invoice number for that ad, we now notice that although the Schedule file shows a booking order no. the Supplier invoice file does not reflect the same. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-4.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to mark/flag special ads in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flags can be used for a variety of purposes, for example to indicate which ads are subject to special deals with the client or supplier and get related reports. Such reports could aid in the calculation of volume rebates for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available flags are currently SINGLE letters from A-Z without any specific meaning so as to provide maximum flexibility. You could standardise on using the flag &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; to indicate ads that form part of sponsorship deals for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the schedule file has any tax code entered, then the flag &amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; is used when user does not want the cost tax to be shown in the Media Diary report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple flags can be entered per plan or schedule line and apply to all ads on that line. For example flags Q, B and C can be entered in any order as QBC or CBQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In future, financial journals may be generated depending on flags entered, for example invoices for ads subject to volume rebates could post a percentage to Provision for Rebate A/cs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to certify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS when an ad is certified it means the ad has appeared.  It is just a way to differentiate between the ads that have appeared from the ones that have not yet appeared.  When we click on ‘certify’ the number of ads with details would appear and we can use a number or a letter (eg X,12) below the Certificate/ Voucher no. to signify that the ad is certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; - in case of magazines and newspapers most agencies use the page number on which the ad has appeared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:certify.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we can see above in the image the letter &#039;x&#039; is used as the certificate number. Certification can be done per ad and we also have the option of issuing the invoice directly after certifying the ad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details on how to certify ads, refer to: [[Certificates/_Voucher_file#Certifying_Ads | Certifying Ads]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to uncertify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
To uncertify ads you need to select the certificate file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Goto Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Certificates -&amp;gt; Certificate / Voucher File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the schedule number&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select Yes for certified&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select search all &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-2.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A list with all the certified ads on that schedule is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#*You can remove the details entered in field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select certify, this will uncertify the ad on the schedule.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-3.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are Certified Ads displayed as Uncertified in Media Progress Summary?==&lt;br /&gt;
====Causes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an Ad is certified as Wrong Ad. For further information see   [[Using NEOSYS Media System#Processing List of Wrong Ads | Processing List of Wrong Ads]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Numbers like &#039;000000&#039; or &#039;0&#039; are entered as Certificate/Voucher No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In both the above cases the Ads are certified as Wrong and hence don&#039;t appear in the Media Progress Summary. This issue comes up only in media progress summary. In all other Media Diary Reports the Wrong Ads do not show up as uncertified Ads.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:Adwrong.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MPSum.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MediaDiary1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to stop the Client Name from being displayed on the Booking Orders?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can be configured, to NOT show the client name on the booking orders, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the supplier is marked with &amp;quot;Show Client on Orders: YES&amp;quot; in the Supplier File then the client name will always be shown on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise the client will be HIDDEN from orders if in the Client File for the client in question, any of the following is true. If none of the following is true, then the client name will show on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as Sundry Client (ie one-off bookings where the actual one-off client name is entered in the Brand Name)&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as &amp;quot;AGENCY&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client type is not marked &amp;quot;DIRECT&amp;quot; AND the main Media Configuration File says &amp;quot;Show Client Name on Orders: NO&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the Media Configuration File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-client-no.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the supplier file &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-supp.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The client should be marked as AGENCY in stead of direct in the Client &amp;amp; Brand File. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-direct.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle &amp;quot;No Response from the database server in 600 seconds&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:nr.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If NEOSYS cannot generate the report within 10 minutes (600 seconds) then you will get an error message saying &amp;quot;No response in 600 seconds from the database server at .....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media module, Media Diary reports that take more than 10 minutes can be sent to the user in the email body or as an email attachment. To receive reports in this way, choose Email Body or Email Attach under Report Delivery options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At times, the report might be too huge that even if you select Email Attachment option, the user with get an email saying &amp;quot;Error in sendmail.js&amp;quot; instead of getting the report.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, it is better to use the option Email Body because if report is too large, then user will get an email with a link that they can click on to get the report. Also see [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_email_not_received#Check_the_size_of_the_mail_being_sent_to_client.27s_email_account this article for other reasons why email is not received]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:eb.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/General_FAQ#Why_is_NEOSYS_taking_a_long_time_to_generate_a_report.3F Why is NEOSYS taking a long time to generate a report]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Media Diary Report showing unexpected results?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Diary report is unreliable if it is generated while users are updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives wrong details for schedules that were not updated during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives 3 different reports for the same options entered in a time frame of 30 to 60 minutes without running the command [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Run_CREATEADS| CREATEADS] performed only by NEOSYS Support.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Possible Cause===&lt;br /&gt;
This issue occurs because there were interrelated files that were being saved during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While generating the media diary, NEOSYS searches for various combinations like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Vehicle &amp;amp; Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Brand &amp;amp; Date etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user updates the system, various inter-related files are frozen and the data related to those files will not appear in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
While we are working on a fix for this issue in NEOSYS, a workaround to get reliable and accurate reports is to generate a report from the test dataset.&lt;br /&gt;
The test dataset is a copy of the live data from the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
This report will not have real time data but will be more reliable as the chances of users updating the test dataset are very low.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If users insist that they want reports in real time then they should accept that the reports will be unreliable as NEOSYS cannot freeze many user windows for some users to take real time reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more data is updated into the system then the old report needs to be discarded and new report needs to be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus NEOSYS recommends that media diary reports should be generated when users are not updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on Troubleshooting Media Diary reports see [[Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Details_missing_in_Media_Diary_or_Changes_in_Files_does_not_reflect_in_Media_Diary| Details Missing in Media Diary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Ads_are_missing_from_media_diary_reports_when_filtering_using_schedule_client_or_brand_although_ads_are_actually_present_in_the_schedule Why are Ads missing from media diary reports when filtering using schedule client or brand although ads are actually present in the schedule]==&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the invoice/ booking order showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule contains ads only for October 1 and 10?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediainvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
The reason why the booking order / invoice is showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule only contains ads for Oct 1, 2012 and Oct 10, 2012 is because NEOSYS is showing dates FROM – UPTO (see the dash?) as is a common requirement for Outdoor Media. This is caused because of entering data like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification field for media type Outdoor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
Don’t put anything like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification for media type “outdoor/out of home” unless you want to indicate a NUMBER OF DAYS OR NUMBER OF WEEKS, NUMBER OF MONTHS ETC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, use a dash instead of a comma … “xxxxxx - 999 xxxx”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperinvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Gross Amount field picking up the amount before the comma in the Specification field?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numeric specification in the ratecard is used as the gross unit rate for some rate card setups by clients. For example, &amp;quot;500, Sun-Thurs&amp;quot;, which takes 500 as the Gross unit amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The comma identifies the amount before it as the Gross unit amount so, entering text like &amp;quot;500,000 Impressions&amp;quot; will put 500 in the Gross Amount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros2.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of a comma, put a space or single quote, so that it reads 500 000 or 500&#039;000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGross.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the total number of ads shown in schedule not matching with the ads with dates in schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_dates.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens only when the user manually changes the No of Ads in the schedule. In such situations, while trying to save the schedule, the system prompts the user with the following warning message. The schedule can be saved only if the user saves the schedule despite the warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_save.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also while trying to invoice such a schedule, the system again prompts the user to correct the schedule date or skip checking numbers. Only if the user manually changes the option to Check Numbers:No, the invoice can be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_invoicing.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the media diary of such schedules, every row represents one of the ads that have a date. However the total of Paid Ads Bill shows the total number of ads that have been paid for (this includes the ads without dates). Similarly, the total of Bill Amount shows the total bill paid by the client for ALL the ads in the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_mediadiary.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why doesn&#039;t my NEOSYS schedule agree with my spreadsheet?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably NEOSYS and your spreadsheet are using different rounding rules &lt;br /&gt;
for the calculation of Net Unit Price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your spreadsheet is calculating the Net Unit Price, for example from &lt;br /&gt;
Gross Unit Price less discount, and NOT ROUNDING IT to a whole number of &lt;br /&gt;
cents before using it in later calculations, then there will be &lt;br /&gt;
differences in some case because NEOSYS rounds any calculated Net Unit &lt;br /&gt;
Price, to cents by default, BEFORE using it in any further calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that spreadsheets may be configured to DISPLAY only two decimal &lt;br /&gt;
places while secretly keeping fractional cents behind the scenes. This &lt;br /&gt;
means that just because you SEE two decimal places in your spreadsheet, &lt;br /&gt;
it doesnt mean that it is using only two decimal places for onward &lt;br /&gt;
calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Neither way can be declared absolutely right or wrong. NEOSYS method has &lt;br /&gt;
the advantage that what you see is what you get, and can be checked with &lt;br /&gt;
a calculator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 60%; height: 100px; text-align: center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|GROSS UNIT PRICE||LESS DISC%||UNROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||ROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||xQTY OF ADS||TOTAL AMOUNT1||TOTAL AMOUNT2||DIFFERENCE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|30.00||7.25||27.825||27.83||10||278.25||278.30||0.05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 1 - Increase the number of decimals in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the standard solution for digital media where unit prices can be &lt;br /&gt;
very small, or even measured in cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the GROSS UNIT PRICE with more than two decimal places. eg 10.0000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS will then calculate, display and use the Net Unit Price with the &lt;br /&gt;
same decimal places. ie with fractional instead of whole cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 2 - Use ROUND() function in Excel===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change your Excel to match NEOSYS. Use the rounding function &lt;br /&gt;
ROUND(CELL,2) to ensure that the net unit price is rounded to a whole &lt;br /&gt;
number of cents before being multiplied by the number of ads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 3 - Direct entry===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Omit all the other columns and enter the amount that you want directly &lt;br /&gt;
into the Net Unit Cost column. Put number of ads 1 ie package deal. Then &lt;br /&gt;
you can get whatever you want in the total amount column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are there discrepancies between Media Diary report and Billing analysis report?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary is based on the date that the ad appeared whereas Billing Analysis is based on the financial period of the posting which is usually the date of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since invoices are usually raised in a different month from the date of appearance of the ad, Media Diary is rarely, if ever, in agreement with Billing Analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from the above, invoices might be left unposted or even deleted before being posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also additional postings might be made to P&amp;amp;L billing accounts and therefore have analysis codes and appear in billings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One possible way to reconcile the two might be to filter the media diary on invoice date. But an ad may have multiple invoices if it is credited or adjusted and these adjustments may be in different months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Final story is that Media Diary gives you an accurate picture of actual advertising by month the ad appeared, whereas Billing analysis gives you an accurate picture of media billing by month of billing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is there a discrepancy between total billing as per Media Diary report and total billings as per list of invoices?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The total billing as per media diary may differ slightly from the total billing as per the list of invoices. This is due to unavoidable rounding differences because percentages calculated per invoice line logically will not always agree to the cent with percentages calculated per invoice totals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get payment status details on media diary reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
The payment details columns are suppressed from the media diary reports by default but will show if you select one or more payment status filter options. If you select &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; then you get all ads (which is the same as if don’t make any selection), but you will get the payment details columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mediadiarypaymentoption.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Margin and Margin(base) in Media Diary export?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary export to Excel/CSV includes columns Margin and Margin (Base) subject to authorisation, but only if you choose both Bill and Cost options for exporting. Note that the default option is to only export Bill information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What can go on a consolidated booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows you put place many periods and many media (vehicles) on a single schedule. It does not however allow multiple brands on one schedule. Despite this, in order to facilitate monthly invoicing, it is common to enter a media schedule (plan) for a single brand for a single month for one or more media vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore in some cases you might wish to combine more than one schedule into a single booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Common examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many brands on one booking order. If a client has many brands then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many media on one booking order. If a supplier has many media then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many periods on one booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any combination of the above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rare examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many clients on one booking order. If the media is special or you have a group of clients that are associated and should be booked as a group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many suppliers on one booking order. It is hard to imagine where this would be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also refer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_booking_order_for_a_vehicle_from_different_schedules_with_multiple_periods.3F|How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_consolidated_booking_order_for_multiple_vehicles.3F|How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I upload a scanned copy of an ad that appeared to the Certificate File?==&lt;br /&gt;
While certifying each ad users can upload the scanned copy of the appeared ad using material option. These images can be later viewed in their respective schedules by selecting the image button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(1)	Click on the materials icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2)	Browser for the scanned image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(3)	Upload the image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:cert1.jpg‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Broadcast Orders/Play Lists?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Broadcast Order on the Schedules menu. This will come better once the proper tv bookings per break data entry is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter Loading such that a portion of it is not shown to the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;|&amp;quot; can be used as a separator for Loading details that need not be shown to the client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media Schedules, when a Loading is entered containing &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;, only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; is reflected in Schedule Printouts and Invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the ENTIRE Loading details (BOTH before and after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;) is reflected in Booking Orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, in Plans, Media Plans show only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;. But Cost Plans will show ONLY the portion after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; (not BOTH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loading.jpg|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to compare budgets per media type in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by media type can easily be done by creating a dummy vehicle per media type, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by media type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy vehicle called Newspaper Budget was created which is linked to the media type Newspapers. The budget meant for media type Newspapers was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per type shows budget vs actual figures for media type Newspapers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy vehicle.jpg |600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mt budgetfile.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis mt.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to set budgets per client (instead of brand) to compare budgets in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by client (instead of brand) can be done by creating a dummy brand per client, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy brand called Al Nabooda Budget was created under the client Al Nabooda Automobile. The budget meant for the client Al Nabooda Automobile was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per client shows budget vs actual figures for the client Al Nabooda Automobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy brand.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Budget file per client.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis per client.jpg  |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter a discount on total net as an amount and not percentage?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schedule files, discount on the total net bill amount is given by entering a discount % in the Agency Discount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of percentage discount, users may want this discount to be shown as an amount. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A discount can be entered directly as a negative amount in the vehicle line following the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a vehicle file &amp;quot;DISC&amp;quot; (Discounts).&lt;br /&gt;
#Use this vehicle in the schedule and enter a negative amount under one of the columns (e.g. Disc/Load/Others) in the vehicle line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; somewhere in the schedule, as mentioned in [[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_save_a_schedule_file_with_negative_net_unit_amount_in_a_vehicle_line.3F|Saving a schedule file with negative net unit amount]] .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter general discount for all the clients for a Vehicle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A general discount can be set for all the Clients in the Vehicle rate card file under Client specific rates. Keep the client code field blank and enter the discount. This discount rate will automatically appear for all the Clients for this vehicle. In case there is already an entry with a specific client code, then for that client the discount entered against its code will be picked and for every other client discount in the blank line will be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vr file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_when_there_is_no_difference_between_bill_and_cost| How to handle operations where there is no difference between bill and cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_to_restrict_users_from_seeing_media_billing_information|How to hide media billing information from certain departments?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisations_for_a_client_with_separate_planning.2C_booking_and_invoicing_teams_who_bill_at_cost|How to set up authorisations for a client with separate planning, booking and invoicing teams who bill at cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Accessing large reports via emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
When getting reports delivered by email, if the report size is more than 10Mb then, instead of the report being embedded in or attached to the email, the email will contain a web browser link to the file instead of the file itself. This gets around restrictions on email size commonly imposed by email servers. This applies to reports which are either embedded within the email body or attached files. NOTE: The link is only valid for one hour after the email is sent so users must download the report before then.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7330</id>
		<title>Media FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7330"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T06:50:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Why am I not allowed to enter a negative amount in the vehicle line? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How do I get subtotals on a Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to get subtotals at least one or more options in the Order field has to be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediadiaryfaq.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to show cost tax amount in Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please read [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Report_on_Cost_VAT_Tax | Report on Cost VAT Tax]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is a despatch status?==&lt;br /&gt;
Despatch status can be the fax number, address, e-mail, date, representative name, etc or any other information regarding the despatch of a booking order or invoice generated from NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch status of the booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch status can be viewed in the ‘despatch record’ column when generating a list of the booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Viewingdespatchstatus.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch status of existing booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old order from Media &amp;gt; Booking Orders &amp;gt; Old Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Updatedespatchorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch date shows on the clients statement of account in the finance module. Before generating the client account statement select Despatch date in Options on the Statement of account page, this adds a Date Sent column in the client account statement which shows the despatch date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Despatchdatestatement.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter/update the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old Media Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Old med inv.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I save an invoice proforma in NEOSYS?===&lt;br /&gt;
When generating an invoice, select Save Proforma on the invoice formatting page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediainvoiceproforma.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view saved invoice proformas?===&lt;br /&gt;
To view saved invoice proformas go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas and enter the proformas invoice number in the Invoice No. field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Invoiceproformas.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I add or amend client order number when reprinting invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas to view the Old Media Invoices page as shown in [[Media_FAQ#Where_can_I_view_saved_invoice_proformas.3F|&amp;quot;Where can I view saved invoice proformas&amp;quot;]]. Enter the invoice number in the Invoice No. field and the new client order number in the Client Order No. field, then click Reprint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be useful when the order number is not known at the time of invoicing e.g when invoicing early or when the client changes their mind. It saves having to manually amend the invoice text before submission to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The client order number on the schedule is also updated, but only if it is both present and matches the order number being amended on the invoice. This is to avoid confusion in the rare case when issuing multiple invoices with different client order numbers from the same schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I cancel/credit note an invoice?===&lt;br /&gt;
New Method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click invoice on the schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Credit note option.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the credit note in journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OLD Method:&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an Invoice in media you need to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove the ad dates from the date grid in schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the INVOICE button at the top of the dates column (you will be asked to update the version number (say no) and save the schedule (say yes)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the invoice creation screen don’t chose any options (except maybe enter the invoice date) and click &amp;quot;Proforma&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the invoice journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to invoice a specific range of ads in a schedule spanning over many months?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to do this, certify the ads in the date range you want to invoice and then, invoice using the option &amp;quot;Certified Ads Only&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to certification screen by clicking the &#039;Certify&#039; button in the schedule file or Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Certificates &amp;gt; Certificate/Voucher File.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Date Range and Schedule No and click &#039;Update All&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter [[Media_Types_File#Certification | Certification No]] and click OK. A popup will inform you of how many ads were certified.&lt;br /&gt;
#Return to the schedule file, click &#039;Invoice&#039; button and under the option title &amp;quot;Certified/All&amp;quot; choose the option &amp;quot;Certified ads only&amp;quot; and invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to do partial invoicing in a schedule?===&lt;br /&gt;
Summary of the procedure for 50% partial invoicing:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#After the schedule has been booked, add &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; under the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column for all vehicle lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; from all vehicle lines&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can get tedious in case of schedules with too many lines, but you will save time using the keyboard shortcuts mentioned in the detailed steps below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the first vehicle line, under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column enter -50% (don&#039;t press enter or any key yet)&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the keyboard down arrow key&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; key when you get the popup &amp;quot;Do you want the changes to be rebooked?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard shortcut Alt + y (to copy the -50% from previous line)&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 till all lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first vehicle&#039;s &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;Del&amp;quot; key and then down arrow key. Repeat this till no lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I cancel a booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an issued booking order you can remove the appearance dates from the Dates calendar in the media schedule and click on Book to generate a media booking cancellation for the ads that have been removed from the Dates calendar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Bookingordercancel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I suppress free ads on the booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
On the New booking order page you can select the Suppress Free option in order to not show the free ads on the booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Suppressfreeads.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may be possible that for some reason the number of ads that you have charged the client for are more than the number of ads you actually booked with the vehicle supplier. NEOSYS allows you to enter this information in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For eg, you bill the client for 500 radio spots and place an order for only 400 actually. Now the agency can enter the number of ads as 500 in the schedule, 100 of which can be selected as &#039;free to agency&#039; ads. If you do not want these &#039;free to agency&#039; ads to show in the booking order you can select Suppress free ads when generating the order to prevent them from showing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to do free ads for digital media?==&lt;br /&gt;
To enter Free Ads, we can put the Ads on a separate line and type a word like &amp;quot;FREE&amp;quot; in the discount column so that the net unit price of that line is zero, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Free_Ads_Digital_Media.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I assess the value of free ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
The Net amount for free ads is zero and same appears in all media diary reports. The gross amount also appears as blank because the gross columns in the media diary report are for paid ads where gross price is the unit price multiplied by the total number of ads. The ads with net unit price zero are considered free ads and not paid, so gross price for them appears as blank in the gross bill/cost columns. Hence it becomes difficult to assess the value of free ads, as gross is blank and net value is zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following reports to evaluate free ads:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In Media Diary reports, look for Gross cost/bill in the Net Free cost/bill columns.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Summary of Paid and Free Ads&amp;quot; report shows the gross bill for the free ads in schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#How_do_I_issue_a_credit_note_for_part_of_a_schedule.3F How do I issue a credit note for specific ads?]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Schedule_file#Version_section|What is a version?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I view historical changes made to a database record?==&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a database record in NEOSYS is updated or modified; the system creates a new version of it and saves the record creating a trail of all previously edited versions linked to the most updated one. Whenever a database record is opened for viewing, the user will get a complete list of history of edits done on the record along with a link to each version. This will help the user to pull out historic edits on any single record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to split large schedules?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There could be scenarios where the schedule created is too large to save or too big to be handled by NEOSYS. This could be because there are too many spots across too many dates or the vehicle used does not support bulk ads. To address such issues schedules can be split into smaller schedules. To do so&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the schedule in question to a new schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the new schedule, remove the past ads that are already booked and invoiced in the older schedule. Only retain ads for future dates and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the old schedule, remove future ads that are now present in the newly copied schedule and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get subtotals on a schedule/plan printout?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the subtotals to appear on the printout the schedule/plan lines have to be separated by a blank line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The schedule printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The invoice printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I insert new rows in the schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
Schedule lines can be added or removed conveniently by clicking on the &#039;+&#039; and &#039;-&#039; icons respectively. You can also do so by clicking on the Vehicle code field and press &#039;ctrl+n&#039; (to add a line above the selected field) or the &#039;down arrow&#039; key (to add a line below the selected field). When inserting a schedule row NEOSYS gives us various options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediascheduleinsertline.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in a vehicle line?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you try to save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in any vehicle line, you will face the below error message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NET UNIT AMOUNT CANNOT BE NEGATIVE, WITHOUT COMMENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This message is deliberately vague and not a plain statement because entering negative amounts will cause variety of issues such as negative income, negative figures in some billing analysis reports and possibly even breaking VAT regulations over reporting of discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, the total number of ads for the client in use will increase along with Media diary report displaying negative figures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However as long as the Finance team is aware of these possible issues, NEOSYS allows users to enter a negative Net Amount in the vehicle line, IF the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; is entered somewhere in the schedule. You can sneak it into any field in the schedule file, such as Private comments, so it doesn&#039;t show to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend doing this in TEST database first, to check how the Media and Finance reports display the ads and their amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why am I not allowed to enter a negative amount in the &#039;Gross Unit Amount&#039; field?===&lt;br /&gt;
A negative amount cannot be directly entered in the Gross Unit Amount field since NEOSYS does not allow you to enter any amount less than &#039;0&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Negative amt.png|frameless|223x223px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple methods of entering negative amounts in the vehicle line, which depend on how you want Media reports and Finance accounts to display or record these amounts. Some examples are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-100AED&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039; or &#039;Other&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;50AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-200%&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039;. (This adds a positive balance to Gross Unit Amt total in Media Diary, which you may not prefer)&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;50&#039; in &#039;Loading&#039; and &#039;-200%&#039; in &#039;Discount&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to restrict the days on which ads can be placed==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are four ways to restrict this. In order of precedence,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Days field. (Values: Numbers 1-7) See Market file to check what number correlates to which day of the week.&lt;br /&gt;
#Program/Position field. (Keywords: FRIDAY/ friday/ FRI/ fri) For single day use &amp;quot;Mon&amp;quot;, ranges use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed&amp;quot;, ranges &amp;amp; single day use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed Sat&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
#Specification field. (Keywords: Same as point 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Vehicle file (Refer [[Vehicle_File#Day_of_Week|Day of week]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Adrestrict.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods?==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the multiple period schedule numbers are entered in the Schedule Code/No field by inserting extra lines select the vehicle you wish to book (will show automatically if only one vehicle in the schedule) and select the One combined order option. This would generate one single order for all the schedules even if they belong to separate periods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Multiperiodbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue separate booking orders for each vehicle in a schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
As the schedule number appears on the Schedule Code/No field the system will ask you which vehicles you wish to book considering the schedule has multiple vehicles. The system would generate an independent booking order for each of the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE - even if one or more vehicles have the same supplier there will be a separate booking order for each vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Massbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to send out one consolidated booking order comprising multiple schedules, vehicle and suppliers to an associate agency. Once you have entered the multiple schedule numbers and selected the required vehicle/vehicles select the One combined order option, this option would issue one consolidated booking order for all the vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Consolidateorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue Amendment Booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order with multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
For issuing amendment booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order, all vehicle lines of all schedules which are a part of the consolidated/combined booking order need to be amended. Follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For schedules that do not require any change, enter a dot on the vehicle line (which appeared in the combined booking order), eg. in the &amp;quot;Loading&amp;quot; field and save the schedule. Then remove the dot and resave the schedule. A message to rebook this line will appear, to which you MUST select Yes.&lt;br /&gt;
#For the schedule&#039;s vehicle line where an actual change is required, make the amendment and then select the &amp;quot;Book&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add all the schedules and the vehicle code in new booking page, select the &amp;quot;One combined order&amp;quot; option and select any Amendment Order Style as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that you check the Preview/Draft before clicking Book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I book one media vehicle through different suppliers?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is not uncommon and perfectly normal to book a particular media/vehicle through different suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS you have to create a new vehicle file record with a different vehicle code but with similar details and linked to the alternative supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the correct vehicle code for any particular schedule and booking, all the various operational and management reports can distinguish between the two operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to merge the two vehicles on management reports then mark the second and subsequent media vehicle records &amp;quot;analyse as&amp;quot; field to be the original vehicle code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get billing analysis both by supplier and in total for the vehicle, ensure that the vehicle name is spelt and punctuated ABSOLUTELY IDENTICAL on all Vehicle File records for the same vehicle on all suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you order the report simply by vehicle, the reporting program will merge the billings into one line where the names are identical. If you want to see the billings of the vehicle per supplier use order 1. by vehicle 2. by supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to modify / add terms to Media Booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To amend or to add the standard notes/terms at the bottom of booking orders, go to Media --&amp;gt; Files --&amp;gt; Media Type File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The booking order notes are different for each media type - Magazines, Radio etc. so you must select the type of media that you want to change and do them all one by one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Open and select a media type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the desire booking notes. There may be separate sections for English and other languages so you should consider changing the language in all sections. Each language sections starts something like %SPANISH% etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media type file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What tax % is used when using the &amp;quot;Add Standard Tax&amp;quot; on the booking order creation?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system first checks the &amp;quot;Invoice tax code&amp;quot; field  in the Media Configuration File for the rate%. Otherwise if no tax code is entered then the system uses first tax code in the Tax Rate File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system does not use the tax/VAT code from the schedule, because that is the tax/VAT rate to the client which could, at least in principle, be zero or something else, and be different from the tax/VAT rate charged by the supplier to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I create a Transmission Certificate/Airing Certificate?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For all ads on one schedule, you can print the schedule in the style of a “Certificate” [[File:mediascheduleprint.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To filter certified ads by more specific criteria, select the Certified filter in the media diary, including the other filters you require. Remember to re-title the media diary report however you like eg “Transmission Certificate”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MediaDiaryTransCertFilter.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How are ads certified automatically?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Automatic_certification_by_importing_Ad_monitoring_data Automatic certification by importing Ad monitoring data]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter multilevel clients and brands in the Client and Brand File?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see how multilevel clients can be entered, refer [[Agency_FAQ#How_do_I_classify_clients_based_on_industry_or_parent_company.3F|How do I classify clients based on industry or parent company?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multilevel brands are represented by indenting the brand names. The number of spaces in indenting signifies the level of a particular brand. Enter the brands in the Client and Brand File as shown in the example below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example Level 1 brands are Mondelez International and Nestle. Notice the red highlight which indicates that Level 2 brand names Kraft, Cadbury, Wonka and L&#039;oreal are indented by 1 space and the Level 3 brands like Capri Sun, Twirl, Nerds etc. are indented by 2 spaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sub-brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While searching for brands under the client, the list will show multilevel brands as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Brandsselect.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I stop a specific brand within Client and Brand file?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can stop usage of brands on documents by putting the tag &amp;lt;STOP&amp;gt; in the brand name under the client and brand file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After doing so,user will get the following message if he selects this brand:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stop error.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I use different client names for media and for billing purposes?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A standard issue faced by all agencies is that sometimes they have to act as a third-party between another agency (A) and that agency&#039;s client (C), i.e. they receive instructions from and have to bill A for ads that belong to C. Here the booking order will show client name C and invoice will be issued to Agency A.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, in the Client and Brand file for agency &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;, put &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; at the beginning of the brand name with a colon between &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the brand name. So name of the brand will be &amp;quot;C:brandname&amp;quot;. Then the booking order will display client name as &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the invoice will be issued to &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example shown below, the agency acts as a third-party agency by billing &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; for ads that belong to the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot;. To do this, in the &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; Client and Brand file, brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is created with name &amp;quot;KIA:Cerato&amp;quot;, where KIA is the client that owns the brand &amp;quot;Cerato&amp;quot;. So when brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is used in a schedule, when issuing a Booking Order it shows the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot;. But when issuing an invoice, it will be issued to the agency &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CandB File.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Booking Order.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Invoice.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the numeric value that is accepted in week plan ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter number of ads by week separated by slashes (e.g. &amp;quot;1/2//4&amp;quot; mean 1 ad in the 1st week, 2 in the 2nd and 4 in the 4th week. For weeks that cross two months, put something like &amp;quot;2+3&amp;quot; to indicate ads per month)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I handle &amp;quot;Allow Over Plan&amp;quot; error?==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Error:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  “Cannot save “REF###” because:&lt;br /&gt;
   YTD Planned Amount Exceeded (XXX)”&lt;br /&gt;
   If authorized, you may check the “Allow Over Plan” checkbox in the schedule heading”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Explanation:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens when the planned amount (in the media plan) for the brand and client is more less then the scheduled ie the schedule is in excess of the plan for that period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Solution:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
This is just a warning and you can avoid this message by clicking on allow over budget next to the company code section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I avoid getting 0 (zero) invoices to clients when amending cost to supplier after invoicing the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
After invoicing a schedule, if you change any cost information (leaving the bill information intact) and issue a cost invoice (to create the relevant journal entries), the system will also issue a 0 (zero) invoice to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These zero invoices cannot be avoided and help to track any audit trail information. Either way the zero items do not appear on the outstanding statement so it shouldn&#039;t be a problem at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(SB to please add more)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to setup and operate the List of Materials Pending Delivery reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Pending_Materials|Refer here to set up the List of materials pending]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways to get off from the list of pending list&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Materials file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Material &amp;gt; Materials File. To get the Material details on the screen enter the material code on the material number field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Material code can be seen on the List of material pending delivery on the Original Schedule Column.&lt;br /&gt;
#To get the material off from the pending list, enter the material code or enter anything in the material code field to indicate the delivery and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Schedule===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The material code can also be entered in the materials section on the bottom of the schedule file without going to the Material File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; When Materials from one schedule are reused on other schedules, then, to avoid duplicate materials records being generated in the material file by the secondary schedule, the original schedule no and material letter should be entered in the secondary schedule&#039;s material section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered?==&lt;br /&gt;
All the currency on the cost line is taken from the vehicle file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the steps to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the vehicle file and change the currency you want to show on the cost line in the schedule and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the schedule and re-type the details in a new line and delete wrongly entered line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to view a weekly summary of scheduled ads for a brand?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media schedules can consolidated and printed in the format of media plans by printing an empty dummy media plan (one with no lines). After creating such a empty dummy plan, printing it results in the plan printout being dynamically &amp;quot;reverse engineered&amp;quot; on the fly from whatever approved media schedules are currently in the system for the same brand and period as the empty plan. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plan printout currency is always base currency currently regardless of whatever currency you put on the dummy plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Steps:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create an EMPTY plan for the desired period and brand that you want.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039; - You only need do this once)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createemtpyplan.jpg|center|frame|How to create empty plan]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Plans &amp;gt; Plan File and click &amp;quot;Print/Send&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:menumediaplanplanprintout.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Type: Weekly (Select time and details columns if you want them)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createdetailedsummaryrpt.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Print/Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display language, frequency and circulation for a vehicle ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently there are two ways for displaying this information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle notes &lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information into the VEHICLE FILE NOTES field which it great if you use the same vehicle on many schedule lines. Notes at the bottom of the schedule work best in this scenario.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Eg: A schedule with 20 lines but only 5 vehicles .. the information is best places as three lines of notes in the footing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Alternatively you can add the information at the vehicle name in abbreviated fashion. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclenotes.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle names&lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information to the name means that the information shows wherever the name shows which ends up pretty good eg on billing analysis report too. It allows any type of information to be shown without adding lots of custom columns which vary tremendously per media type, client and market.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclename.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Circulation is the number of paid subscribers that magazines and newspapers have. Broadcast media such as television and radio do not use the term circulation, instead they measure their audiences in terms of viewers and listeners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display artwork / creative / misc charges in a schedule to a client?==&lt;br /&gt;
Full service agencies generally tend to provide clients with a single media schedule outlining the media vehicles proposed along with artwork, creative, misc charges related to this specific campaign. Other NEOSYS clients would create a media schedule separately and issue a job estimate for the artwork charges. This article will explain how to incorporate the media vehicles and artwork/other charges in a single schedule printout for client approval.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 1===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is suitable if we want to enter additional charges on a per ad basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such charges can be entered in the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; charges column on the media schedule data entry screen. If there are multiple charges, these could be entered separated with a forward slash. You can also enter text to indicate the type of charge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ProductionChargeinSch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 2===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is applicable if we have multiple ads/vehicles and want to show additional charges as a single amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use the following method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a dummy vehicle called ARTWORK with an internal (dummy) supplier&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new line in the schedule using dummy artwork vehicle&lt;br /&gt;
#Select any date and assign 1 ad to it so that the number of ads is 1 for this vehicle&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkanydate.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter gross unit cost in the bill column.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Do not enter anything in the cost column&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicle.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A printout of the above schedule will look like as follows:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicleschdprint.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Suppressing day and date of vehicle program from appearing on schedule printout and invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not wish to display the day and date on this schedule or on the invoice you can refer to the following procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In Schedule File&lt;br /&gt;
#*Leave the dates blank&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter the Number of Ads directly &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:leavedatesblankschedule.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While printing the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Print/Send &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:deselectcheckno.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While generating the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select All Ads under Certified/All&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Create Invoice &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:invoicechecknumber.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not view the booking order for an ad which is moved to a different date?==&lt;br /&gt;
While moving an ad to a different date, we first remove the existing ad from the date on which is scheduled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this process, all information related to the ad is lost i.e. booking order no. /certificates / supplier invoice no. / invoice no. etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens irrespective of whether the schedule is saved or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a specific example below, we can notice this happening when we try to enter the supplier invoice number for an ad which has been moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#We schedule an ad for the 25th of a May &amp;amp; Book it &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-1.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move the ad to 30th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move it back to the 25th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-3.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While trying to enter the supplier invoice number for that ad, we now notice that although the Schedule file shows a booking order no. the Supplier invoice file does not reflect the same. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-4.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to mark/flag special ads in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flags can be used for a variety of purposes, for example to indicate which ads are subject to special deals with the client or supplier and get related reports. Such reports could aid in the calculation of volume rebates for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available flags are currently SINGLE letters from A-Z without any specific meaning so as to provide maximum flexibility. You could standardise on using the flag &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; to indicate ads that form part of sponsorship deals for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the schedule file has any tax code entered, then the flag &amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; is used when user does not want the cost tax to be shown in the Media Diary report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple flags can be entered per plan or schedule line and apply to all ads on that line. For example flags Q, B and C can be entered in any order as QBC or CBQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In future, financial journals may be generated depending on flags entered, for example invoices for ads subject to volume rebates could post a percentage to Provision for Rebate A/cs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to certify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS when an ad is certified it means the ad has appeared.  It is just a way to differentiate between the ads that have appeared from the ones that have not yet appeared.  When we click on ‘certify’ the number of ads with details would appear and we can use a number or a letter (eg X,12) below the Certificate/ Voucher no. to signify that the ad is certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; - in case of magazines and newspapers most agencies use the page number on which the ad has appeared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:certify.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we can see above in the image the letter &#039;x&#039; is used as the certificate number. Certification can be done per ad and we also have the option of issuing the invoice directly after certifying the ad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details on how to certify ads, refer to: [[Certificates/_Voucher_file#Certifying_Ads | Certifying Ads]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to uncertify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
To uncertify ads you need to select the certificate file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Goto Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Certificates -&amp;gt; Certificate / Voucher File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the schedule number&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select Yes for certified&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select search all &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-2.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A list with all the certified ads on that schedule is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#*You can remove the details entered in field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select certify, this will uncertify the ad on the schedule.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-3.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are Certified Ads displayed as Uncertified in Media Progress Summary?==&lt;br /&gt;
====Causes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an Ad is certified as Wrong Ad. For further information see   [[Using NEOSYS Media System#Processing List of Wrong Ads | Processing List of Wrong Ads]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Numbers like &#039;000000&#039; or &#039;0&#039; are entered as Certificate/Voucher No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In both the above cases the Ads are certified as Wrong and hence don&#039;t appear in the Media Progress Summary. This issue comes up only in media progress summary. In all other Media Diary Reports the Wrong Ads do not show up as uncertified Ads.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:Adwrong.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MPSum.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MediaDiary1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to stop the Client Name from being displayed on the Booking Orders?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can be configured, to NOT show the client name on the booking orders, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the supplier is marked with &amp;quot;Show Client on Orders: YES&amp;quot; in the Supplier File then the client name will always be shown on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise the client will be HIDDEN from orders if in the Client File for the client in question, any of the following is true. If none of the following is true, then the client name will show on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as Sundry Client (ie one-off bookings where the actual one-off client name is entered in the Brand Name)&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as &amp;quot;AGENCY&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client type is not marked &amp;quot;DIRECT&amp;quot; AND the main Media Configuration File says &amp;quot;Show Client Name on Orders: NO&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the Media Configuration File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-client-no.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the supplier file &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-supp.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The client should be marked as AGENCY in stead of direct in the Client &amp;amp; Brand File. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-direct.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle &amp;quot;No Response from the database server in 600 seconds&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:nr.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If NEOSYS cannot generate the report within 10 minutes (600 seconds) then you will get an error message saying &amp;quot;No response in 600 seconds from the database server at .....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media module, Media Diary reports that take more than 10 minutes can be sent to the user in the email body or as an email attachment. To receive reports in this way, choose Email Body or Email Attach under Report Delivery options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At times, the report might be too huge that even if you select Email Attachment option, the user with get an email saying &amp;quot;Error in sendmail.js&amp;quot; instead of getting the report.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, it is better to use the option Email Body because if report is too large, then user will get an email with a link that they can click on to get the report. Also see [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_email_not_received#Check_the_size_of_the_mail_being_sent_to_client.27s_email_account this article for other reasons why email is not received]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:eb.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/General_FAQ#Why_is_NEOSYS_taking_a_long_time_to_generate_a_report.3F Why is NEOSYS taking a long time to generate a report]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Media Diary Report showing unexpected results?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Diary report is unreliable if it is generated while users are updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives wrong details for schedules that were not updated during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives 3 different reports for the same options entered in a time frame of 30 to 60 minutes without running the command [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Run_CREATEADS| CREATEADS] performed only by NEOSYS Support.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Possible Cause===&lt;br /&gt;
This issue occurs because there were interrelated files that were being saved during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While generating the media diary, NEOSYS searches for various combinations like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Vehicle &amp;amp; Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Brand &amp;amp; Date etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user updates the system, various inter-related files are frozen and the data related to those files will not appear in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
While we are working on a fix for this issue in NEOSYS, a workaround to get reliable and accurate reports is to generate a report from the test dataset.&lt;br /&gt;
The test dataset is a copy of the live data from the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
This report will not have real time data but will be more reliable as the chances of users updating the test dataset are very low.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If users insist that they want reports in real time then they should accept that the reports will be unreliable as NEOSYS cannot freeze many user windows for some users to take real time reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more data is updated into the system then the old report needs to be discarded and new report needs to be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus NEOSYS recommends that media diary reports should be generated when users are not updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on Troubleshooting Media Diary reports see [[Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Details_missing_in_Media_Diary_or_Changes_in_Files_does_not_reflect_in_Media_Diary| Details Missing in Media Diary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Ads_are_missing_from_media_diary_reports_when_filtering_using_schedule_client_or_brand_although_ads_are_actually_present_in_the_schedule Why are Ads missing from media diary reports when filtering using schedule client or brand although ads are actually present in the schedule]==&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the invoice/ booking order showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule contains ads only for October 1 and 10?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediainvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
The reason why the booking order / invoice is showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule only contains ads for Oct 1, 2012 and Oct 10, 2012 is because NEOSYS is showing dates FROM – UPTO (see the dash?) as is a common requirement for Outdoor Media. This is caused because of entering data like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification field for media type Outdoor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
Don’t put anything like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification for media type “outdoor/out of home” unless you want to indicate a NUMBER OF DAYS OR NUMBER OF WEEKS, NUMBER OF MONTHS ETC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, use a dash instead of a comma … “xxxxxx - 999 xxxx”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperinvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Gross Amount field picking up the amount before the comma in the Specification field?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numeric specification in the ratecard is used as the gross unit rate for some rate card setups by clients. For example, &amp;quot;500, Sun-Thurs&amp;quot;, which takes 500 as the Gross unit amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The comma identifies the amount before it as the Gross unit amount so, entering text like &amp;quot;500,000 Impressions&amp;quot; will put 500 in the Gross Amount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros2.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of a comma, put a space or single quote, so that it reads 500 000 or 500&#039;000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGross.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the total number of ads shown in schedule not matching with the ads with dates in schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_dates.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens only when the user manually changes the No of Ads in the schedule. In such situations, while trying to save the schedule, the system prompts the user with the following warning message. The schedule can be saved only if the user saves the schedule despite the warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_save.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also while trying to invoice such a schedule, the system again prompts the user to correct the schedule date or skip checking numbers. Only if the user manually changes the option to Check Numbers:No, the invoice can be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_invoicing.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the media diary of such schedules, every row represents one of the ads that have a date. However the total of Paid Ads Bill shows the total number of ads that have been paid for (this includes the ads without dates). Similarly, the total of Bill Amount shows the total bill paid by the client for ALL the ads in the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_mediadiary.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why doesn&#039;t my NEOSYS schedule agree with my spreadsheet?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably NEOSYS and your spreadsheet are using different rounding rules &lt;br /&gt;
for the calculation of Net Unit Price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your spreadsheet is calculating the Net Unit Price, for example from &lt;br /&gt;
Gross Unit Price less discount, and NOT ROUNDING IT to a whole number of &lt;br /&gt;
cents before using it in later calculations, then there will be &lt;br /&gt;
differences in some case because NEOSYS rounds any calculated Net Unit &lt;br /&gt;
Price, to cents by default, BEFORE using it in any further calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that spreadsheets may be configured to DISPLAY only two decimal &lt;br /&gt;
places while secretly keeping fractional cents behind the scenes. This &lt;br /&gt;
means that just because you SEE two decimal places in your spreadsheet, &lt;br /&gt;
it doesnt mean that it is using only two decimal places for onward &lt;br /&gt;
calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Neither way can be declared absolutely right or wrong. NEOSYS method has &lt;br /&gt;
the advantage that what you see is what you get, and can be checked with &lt;br /&gt;
a calculator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 60%; height: 100px; text-align: center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|GROSS UNIT PRICE||LESS DISC%||UNROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||ROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||xQTY OF ADS||TOTAL AMOUNT1||TOTAL AMOUNT2||DIFFERENCE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|30.00||7.25||27.825||27.83||10||278.25||278.30||0.05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 1 - Increase the number of decimals in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the standard solution for digital media where unit prices can be &lt;br /&gt;
very small, or even measured in cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the GROSS UNIT PRICE with more than two decimal places. eg 10.0000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS will then calculate, display and use the Net Unit Price with the &lt;br /&gt;
same decimal places. ie with fractional instead of whole cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 2 - Use ROUND() function in Excel===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change your Excel to match NEOSYS. Use the rounding function &lt;br /&gt;
ROUND(CELL,2) to ensure that the net unit price is rounded to a whole &lt;br /&gt;
number of cents before being multiplied by the number of ads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 3 - Direct entry===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Omit all the other columns and enter the amount that you want directly &lt;br /&gt;
into the Net Unit Cost column. Put number of ads 1 ie package deal. Then &lt;br /&gt;
you can get whatever you want in the total amount column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are there discrepancies between Media Diary report and Billing analysis report?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary is based on the date that the ad appeared whereas Billing Analysis is based on the financial period of the posting which is usually the date of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since invoices are usually raised in a different month from the date of appearance of the ad, Media Diary is rarely, if ever, in agreement with Billing Analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from the above, invoices might be left unposted or even deleted before being posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also additional postings might be made to P&amp;amp;L billing accounts and therefore have analysis codes and appear in billings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One possible way to reconcile the two might be to filter the media diary on invoice date. But an ad may have multiple invoices if it is credited or adjusted and these adjustments may be in different months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Final story is that Media Diary gives you an accurate picture of actual advertising by month the ad appeared, whereas Billing analysis gives you an accurate picture of media billing by month of billing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is there a discrepancy between total billing as per Media Diary report and total billings as per list of invoices?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The total billing as per media diary may differ slightly from the total billing as per the list of invoices. This is due to unavoidable rounding differences because percentages calculated per invoice line logically will not always agree to the cent with percentages calculated per invoice totals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get payment status details on media diary reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
The payment details columns are suppressed from the media diary reports by default but will show if you select one or more payment status filter options. If you select &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; then you get all ads (which is the same as if don’t make any selection), but you will get the payment details columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mediadiarypaymentoption.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Margin and Margin(base) in Media Diary export?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary export to Excel/CSV includes columns Margin and Margin (Base) subject to authorisation, but only if you choose both Bill and Cost options for exporting. Note that the default option is to only export Bill information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What can go on a consolidated booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows you put place many periods and many media (vehicles) on a single schedule. It does not however allow multiple brands on one schedule. Despite this, in order to facilitate monthly invoicing, it is common to enter a media schedule (plan) for a single brand for a single month for one or more media vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore in some cases you might wish to combine more than one schedule into a single booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Common examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many brands on one booking order. If a client has many brands then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many media on one booking order. If a supplier has many media then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many periods on one booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any combination of the above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rare examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many clients on one booking order. If the media is special or you have a group of clients that are associated and should be booked as a group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many suppliers on one booking order. It is hard to imagine where this would be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also refer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_booking_order_for_a_vehicle_from_different_schedules_with_multiple_periods.3F|How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_consolidated_booking_order_for_multiple_vehicles.3F|How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I upload a scanned copy of an ad that appeared to the Certificate File?==&lt;br /&gt;
While certifying each ad users can upload the scanned copy of the appeared ad using material option. These images can be later viewed in their respective schedules by selecting the image button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(1)	Click on the materials icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2)	Browser for the scanned image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(3)	Upload the image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:cert1.jpg‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Broadcast Orders/Play Lists?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Broadcast Order on the Schedules menu. This will come better once the proper tv bookings per break data entry is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter Loading such that a portion of it is not shown to the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;|&amp;quot; can be used as a separator for Loading details that need not be shown to the client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media Schedules, when a Loading is entered containing &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;, only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; is reflected in Schedule Printouts and Invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the ENTIRE Loading details (BOTH before and after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;) is reflected in Booking Orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, in Plans, Media Plans show only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;. But Cost Plans will show ONLY the portion after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; (not BOTH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loading.jpg|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to compare budgets per media type in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by media type can easily be done by creating a dummy vehicle per media type, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by media type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy vehicle called Newspaper Budget was created which is linked to the media type Newspapers. The budget meant for media type Newspapers was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per type shows budget vs actual figures for media type Newspapers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy vehicle.jpg |600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mt budgetfile.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis mt.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to set budgets per client (instead of brand) to compare budgets in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by client (instead of brand) can be done by creating a dummy brand per client, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy brand called Al Nabooda Budget was created under the client Al Nabooda Automobile. The budget meant for the client Al Nabooda Automobile was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per client shows budget vs actual figures for the client Al Nabooda Automobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy brand.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Budget file per client.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis per client.jpg  |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter a discount on total net as an amount and not percentage?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schedule files, discount on the total net bill amount is given by entering a discount % in the Agency Discount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of percentage discount, users may want this discount to be shown as an amount. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A discount can be entered directly as a negative amount in the vehicle line following the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a vehicle file &amp;quot;DISC&amp;quot; (Discounts).&lt;br /&gt;
#Use this vehicle in the schedule and enter a negative amount under one of the columns (e.g. Disc/Load/Others) in the vehicle line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; somewhere in the schedule, as mentioned in [[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_save_a_schedule_file_with_negative_net_unit_amount_in_a_vehicle_line.3F|Saving a schedule file with negative net unit amount]] .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter general discount for all the clients for a Vehicle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A general discount can be set for all the Clients in the Vehicle rate card file under Client specific rates. Keep the client code field blank and enter the discount. This discount rate will automatically appear for all the Clients for this vehicle. In case there is already an entry with a specific client code, then for that client the discount entered against its code will be picked and for every other client discount in the blank line will be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vr file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_when_there_is_no_difference_between_bill_and_cost| How to handle operations where there is no difference between bill and cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_to_restrict_users_from_seeing_media_billing_information|How to hide media billing information from certain departments?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisations_for_a_client_with_separate_planning.2C_booking_and_invoicing_teams_who_bill_at_cost|How to set up authorisations for a client with separate planning, booking and invoicing teams who bill at cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Accessing large reports via emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
When getting reports delivered by email, if the report size is more than 10Mb then, instead of the report being embedded in or attached to the email, the email will contain a web browser link to the file instead of the file itself. This gets around restrictions on email size commonly imposed by email servers. This applies to reports which are either embedded within the email body or attached files. NOTE: The link is only valid for one hour after the email is sent so users must download the report before then.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7329</id>
		<title>Media FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7329"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T06:40:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Why am I not able to enter a negative amount in the vehicle line? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How do I get subtotals on a Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to get subtotals at least one or more options in the Order field has to be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediadiaryfaq.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to show cost tax amount in Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please read [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Report_on_Cost_VAT_Tax | Report on Cost VAT Tax]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is a despatch status?==&lt;br /&gt;
Despatch status can be the fax number, address, e-mail, date, representative name, etc or any other information regarding the despatch of a booking order or invoice generated from NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch status of the booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch status can be viewed in the ‘despatch record’ column when generating a list of the booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Viewingdespatchstatus.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch status of existing booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old order from Media &amp;gt; Booking Orders &amp;gt; Old Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Updatedespatchorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch date shows on the clients statement of account in the finance module. Before generating the client account statement select Despatch date in Options on the Statement of account page, this adds a Date Sent column in the client account statement which shows the despatch date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Despatchdatestatement.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter/update the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old Media Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Old med inv.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I save an invoice proforma in NEOSYS?===&lt;br /&gt;
When generating an invoice, select Save Proforma on the invoice formatting page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediainvoiceproforma.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view saved invoice proformas?===&lt;br /&gt;
To view saved invoice proformas go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas and enter the proformas invoice number in the Invoice No. field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Invoiceproformas.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I add or amend client order number when reprinting invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas to view the Old Media Invoices page as shown in [[Media_FAQ#Where_can_I_view_saved_invoice_proformas.3F|&amp;quot;Where can I view saved invoice proformas&amp;quot;]]. Enter the invoice number in the Invoice No. field and the new client order number in the Client Order No. field, then click Reprint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be useful when the order number is not known at the time of invoicing e.g when invoicing early or when the client changes their mind. It saves having to manually amend the invoice text before submission to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The client order number on the schedule is also updated, but only if it is both present and matches the order number being amended on the invoice. This is to avoid confusion in the rare case when issuing multiple invoices with different client order numbers from the same schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I cancel/credit note an invoice?===&lt;br /&gt;
New Method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click invoice on the schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Credit note option.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the credit note in journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OLD Method:&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an Invoice in media you need to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove the ad dates from the date grid in schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the INVOICE button at the top of the dates column (you will be asked to update the version number (say no) and save the schedule (say yes)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the invoice creation screen don’t chose any options (except maybe enter the invoice date) and click &amp;quot;Proforma&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the invoice journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to invoice a specific range of ads in a schedule spanning over many months?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to do this, certify the ads in the date range you want to invoice and then, invoice using the option &amp;quot;Certified Ads Only&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to certification screen by clicking the &#039;Certify&#039; button in the schedule file or Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Certificates &amp;gt; Certificate/Voucher File.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Date Range and Schedule No and click &#039;Update All&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter [[Media_Types_File#Certification | Certification No]] and click OK. A popup will inform you of how many ads were certified.&lt;br /&gt;
#Return to the schedule file, click &#039;Invoice&#039; button and under the option title &amp;quot;Certified/All&amp;quot; choose the option &amp;quot;Certified ads only&amp;quot; and invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to do partial invoicing in a schedule?===&lt;br /&gt;
Summary of the procedure for 50% partial invoicing:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#After the schedule has been booked, add &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; under the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column for all vehicle lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; from all vehicle lines&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can get tedious in case of schedules with too many lines, but you will save time using the keyboard shortcuts mentioned in the detailed steps below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the first vehicle line, under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column enter -50% (don&#039;t press enter or any key yet)&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the keyboard down arrow key&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; key when you get the popup &amp;quot;Do you want the changes to be rebooked?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard shortcut Alt + y (to copy the -50% from previous line)&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 till all lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first vehicle&#039;s &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;Del&amp;quot; key and then down arrow key. Repeat this till no lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I cancel a booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an issued booking order you can remove the appearance dates from the Dates calendar in the media schedule and click on Book to generate a media booking cancellation for the ads that have been removed from the Dates calendar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Bookingordercancel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I suppress free ads on the booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
On the New booking order page you can select the Suppress Free option in order to not show the free ads on the booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Suppressfreeads.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may be possible that for some reason the number of ads that you have charged the client for are more than the number of ads you actually booked with the vehicle supplier. NEOSYS allows you to enter this information in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For eg, you bill the client for 500 radio spots and place an order for only 400 actually. Now the agency can enter the number of ads as 500 in the schedule, 100 of which can be selected as &#039;free to agency&#039; ads. If you do not want these &#039;free to agency&#039; ads to show in the booking order you can select Suppress free ads when generating the order to prevent them from showing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to do free ads for digital media?==&lt;br /&gt;
To enter Free Ads, we can put the Ads on a separate line and type a word like &amp;quot;FREE&amp;quot; in the discount column so that the net unit price of that line is zero, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Free_Ads_Digital_Media.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I assess the value of free ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
The Net amount for free ads is zero and same appears in all media diary reports. The gross amount also appears as blank because the gross columns in the media diary report are for paid ads where gross price is the unit price multiplied by the total number of ads. The ads with net unit price zero are considered free ads and not paid, so gross price for them appears as blank in the gross bill/cost columns. Hence it becomes difficult to assess the value of free ads, as gross is blank and net value is zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following reports to evaluate free ads:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In Media Diary reports, look for Gross cost/bill in the Net Free cost/bill columns.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Summary of Paid and Free Ads&amp;quot; report shows the gross bill for the free ads in schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#How_do_I_issue_a_credit_note_for_part_of_a_schedule.3F How do I issue a credit note for specific ads?]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Schedule_file#Version_section|What is a version?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I view historical changes made to a database record?==&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a database record in NEOSYS is updated or modified; the system creates a new version of it and saves the record creating a trail of all previously edited versions linked to the most updated one. Whenever a database record is opened for viewing, the user will get a complete list of history of edits done on the record along with a link to each version. This will help the user to pull out historic edits on any single record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to split large schedules?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There could be scenarios where the schedule created is too large to save or too big to be handled by NEOSYS. This could be because there are too many spots across too many dates or the vehicle used does not support bulk ads. To address such issues schedules can be split into smaller schedules. To do so&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the schedule in question to a new schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the new schedule, remove the past ads that are already booked and invoiced in the older schedule. Only retain ads for future dates and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the old schedule, remove future ads that are now present in the newly copied schedule and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get subtotals on a schedule/plan printout?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the subtotals to appear on the printout the schedule/plan lines have to be separated by a blank line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The schedule printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The invoice printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I insert new rows in the schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
Schedule lines can be added or removed conveniently by clicking on the &#039;+&#039; and &#039;-&#039; icons respectively. You can also do so by clicking on the Vehicle code field and press &#039;ctrl+n&#039; (to add a line above the selected field) or the &#039;down arrow&#039; key (to add a line below the selected field). When inserting a schedule row NEOSYS gives us various options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediascheduleinsertline.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in a vehicle line?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you try to save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in any vehicle line, you will face the below error message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NET UNIT AMOUNT CANNOT BE NEGATIVE, WITHOUT COMMENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This message is deliberately vague and not a plain statement because entering negative amounts will cause variety of issues such as negative income, negative figures in some billing analysis reports and possibly even breaking VAT regulations over reporting of discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, the total number of ads for the client in use will increase along with Media diary report displaying negative figures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However as long as the Finance team is aware of these possible issues, NEOSYS allows users to enter a negative Net Amount in the vehicle line, IF the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; is entered somewhere in the schedule. You can sneak it into any field in the schedule file, such as Private comments, so it doesn&#039;t show to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend doing this in TEST database first, to check how the Media and Finance reports display the ads and their amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why am I not allowed to enter a negative amount in the vehicle line?===&lt;br /&gt;
A negative amount cannot be directly entered in the Gross Unit Amount field since NEOSYS does not allow you to enter any amount less than &#039;0&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Negative amt.png|frameless|223x223px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple methods of entering negative amounts in the vehicle line, which depend on how you want Media reports and Finance accounts to display or record these amounts. Some examples are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-100AED&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039; or &#039;Other&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;50AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-200%&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039;. (This adds a positive balance to Gross Unit Amt total in Media Diary, which you may not prefer)&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;50&#039; in &#039;Loading&#039; and &#039;-200%&#039; in &#039;Discount&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to restrict the days on which ads can be placed==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are four ways to restrict this. In order of precedence,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Days field. (Values: Numbers 1-7) See Market file to check what number correlates to which day of the week.&lt;br /&gt;
#Program/Position field. (Keywords: FRIDAY/ friday/ FRI/ fri) For single day use &amp;quot;Mon&amp;quot;, ranges use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed&amp;quot;, ranges &amp;amp; single day use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed Sat&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
#Specification field. (Keywords: Same as point 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Vehicle file (Refer [[Vehicle_File#Day_of_Week|Day of week]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Adrestrict.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods?==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the multiple period schedule numbers are entered in the Schedule Code/No field by inserting extra lines select the vehicle you wish to book (will show automatically if only one vehicle in the schedule) and select the One combined order option. This would generate one single order for all the schedules even if they belong to separate periods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Multiperiodbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue separate booking orders for each vehicle in a schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
As the schedule number appears on the Schedule Code/No field the system will ask you which vehicles you wish to book considering the schedule has multiple vehicles. The system would generate an independent booking order for each of the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE - even if one or more vehicles have the same supplier there will be a separate booking order for each vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Massbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to send out one consolidated booking order comprising multiple schedules, vehicle and suppliers to an associate agency. Once you have entered the multiple schedule numbers and selected the required vehicle/vehicles select the One combined order option, this option would issue one consolidated booking order for all the vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Consolidateorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue Amendment Booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order with multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
For issuing amendment booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order, all vehicle lines of all schedules which are a part of the consolidated/combined booking order need to be amended. Follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For schedules that do not require any change, enter a dot on the vehicle line (which appeared in the combined booking order), eg. in the &amp;quot;Loading&amp;quot; field and save the schedule. Then remove the dot and resave the schedule. A message to rebook this line will appear, to which you MUST select Yes.&lt;br /&gt;
#For the schedule&#039;s vehicle line where an actual change is required, make the amendment and then select the &amp;quot;Book&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add all the schedules and the vehicle code in new booking page, select the &amp;quot;One combined order&amp;quot; option and select any Amendment Order Style as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that you check the Preview/Draft before clicking Book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I book one media vehicle through different suppliers?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is not uncommon and perfectly normal to book a particular media/vehicle through different suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS you have to create a new vehicle file record with a different vehicle code but with similar details and linked to the alternative supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the correct vehicle code for any particular schedule and booking, all the various operational and management reports can distinguish between the two operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to merge the two vehicles on management reports then mark the second and subsequent media vehicle records &amp;quot;analyse as&amp;quot; field to be the original vehicle code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get billing analysis both by supplier and in total for the vehicle, ensure that the vehicle name is spelt and punctuated ABSOLUTELY IDENTICAL on all Vehicle File records for the same vehicle on all suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you order the report simply by vehicle, the reporting program will merge the billings into one line where the names are identical. If you want to see the billings of the vehicle per supplier use order 1. by vehicle 2. by supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to modify / add terms to Media Booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To amend or to add the standard notes/terms at the bottom of booking orders, go to Media --&amp;gt; Files --&amp;gt; Media Type File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The booking order notes are different for each media type - Magazines, Radio etc. so you must select the type of media that you want to change and do them all one by one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Open and select a media type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the desire booking notes. There may be separate sections for English and other languages so you should consider changing the language in all sections. Each language sections starts something like %SPANISH% etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media type file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What tax % is used when using the &amp;quot;Add Standard Tax&amp;quot; on the booking order creation?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system first checks the &amp;quot;Invoice tax code&amp;quot; field  in the Media Configuration File for the rate%. Otherwise if no tax code is entered then the system uses first tax code in the Tax Rate File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system does not use the tax/VAT code from the schedule, because that is the tax/VAT rate to the client which could, at least in principle, be zero or something else, and be different from the tax/VAT rate charged by the supplier to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I create a Transmission Certificate/Airing Certificate?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For all ads on one schedule, you can print the schedule in the style of a “Certificate” [[File:mediascheduleprint.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To filter certified ads by more specific criteria, select the Certified filter in the media diary, including the other filters you require. Remember to re-title the media diary report however you like eg “Transmission Certificate”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MediaDiaryTransCertFilter.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How are ads certified automatically?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Automatic_certification_by_importing_Ad_monitoring_data Automatic certification by importing Ad monitoring data]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter multilevel clients and brands in the Client and Brand File?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see how multilevel clients can be entered, refer [[Agency_FAQ#How_do_I_classify_clients_based_on_industry_or_parent_company.3F|How do I classify clients based on industry or parent company?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multilevel brands are represented by indenting the brand names. The number of spaces in indenting signifies the level of a particular brand. Enter the brands in the Client and Brand File as shown in the example below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example Level 1 brands are Mondelez International and Nestle. Notice the red highlight which indicates that Level 2 brand names Kraft, Cadbury, Wonka and L&#039;oreal are indented by 1 space and the Level 3 brands like Capri Sun, Twirl, Nerds etc. are indented by 2 spaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sub-brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While searching for brands under the client, the list will show multilevel brands as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Brandsselect.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I stop a specific brand within Client and Brand file?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can stop usage of brands on documents by putting the tag &amp;lt;STOP&amp;gt; in the brand name under the client and brand file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After doing so,user will get the following message if he selects this brand:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stop error.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I use different client names for media and for billing purposes?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A standard issue faced by all agencies is that sometimes they have to act as a third-party between another agency (A) and that agency&#039;s client (C), i.e. they receive instructions from and have to bill A for ads that belong to C. Here the booking order will show client name C and invoice will be issued to Agency A.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, in the Client and Brand file for agency &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;, put &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; at the beginning of the brand name with a colon between &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the brand name. So name of the brand will be &amp;quot;C:brandname&amp;quot;. Then the booking order will display client name as &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the invoice will be issued to &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example shown below, the agency acts as a third-party agency by billing &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; for ads that belong to the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot;. To do this, in the &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; Client and Brand file, brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is created with name &amp;quot;KIA:Cerato&amp;quot;, where KIA is the client that owns the brand &amp;quot;Cerato&amp;quot;. So when brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is used in a schedule, when issuing a Booking Order it shows the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot;. But when issuing an invoice, it will be issued to the agency &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CandB File.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Booking Order.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Invoice.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the numeric value that is accepted in week plan ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter number of ads by week separated by slashes (e.g. &amp;quot;1/2//4&amp;quot; mean 1 ad in the 1st week, 2 in the 2nd and 4 in the 4th week. For weeks that cross two months, put something like &amp;quot;2+3&amp;quot; to indicate ads per month)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I handle &amp;quot;Allow Over Plan&amp;quot; error?==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Error:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  “Cannot save “REF###” because:&lt;br /&gt;
   YTD Planned Amount Exceeded (XXX)”&lt;br /&gt;
   If authorized, you may check the “Allow Over Plan” checkbox in the schedule heading”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Explanation:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens when the planned amount (in the media plan) for the brand and client is more less then the scheduled ie the schedule is in excess of the plan for that period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Solution:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
This is just a warning and you can avoid this message by clicking on allow over budget next to the company code section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I avoid getting 0 (zero) invoices to clients when amending cost to supplier after invoicing the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
After invoicing a schedule, if you change any cost information (leaving the bill information intact) and issue a cost invoice (to create the relevant journal entries), the system will also issue a 0 (zero) invoice to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These zero invoices cannot be avoided and help to track any audit trail information. Either way the zero items do not appear on the outstanding statement so it shouldn&#039;t be a problem at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(SB to please add more)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to setup and operate the List of Materials Pending Delivery reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Pending_Materials|Refer here to set up the List of materials pending]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways to get off from the list of pending list&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Materials file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Material &amp;gt; Materials File. To get the Material details on the screen enter the material code on the material number field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Material code can be seen on the List of material pending delivery on the Original Schedule Column.&lt;br /&gt;
#To get the material off from the pending list, enter the material code or enter anything in the material code field to indicate the delivery and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Schedule===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The material code can also be entered in the materials section on the bottom of the schedule file without going to the Material File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; When Materials from one schedule are reused on other schedules, then, to avoid duplicate materials records being generated in the material file by the secondary schedule, the original schedule no and material letter should be entered in the secondary schedule&#039;s material section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered?==&lt;br /&gt;
All the currency on the cost line is taken from the vehicle file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the steps to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the vehicle file and change the currency you want to show on the cost line in the schedule and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the schedule and re-type the details in a new line and delete wrongly entered line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to view a weekly summary of scheduled ads for a brand?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media schedules can consolidated and printed in the format of media plans by printing an empty dummy media plan (one with no lines). After creating such a empty dummy plan, printing it results in the plan printout being dynamically &amp;quot;reverse engineered&amp;quot; on the fly from whatever approved media schedules are currently in the system for the same brand and period as the empty plan. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plan printout currency is always base currency currently regardless of whatever currency you put on the dummy plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Steps:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create an EMPTY plan for the desired period and brand that you want.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039; - You only need do this once)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createemtpyplan.jpg|center|frame|How to create empty plan]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Plans &amp;gt; Plan File and click &amp;quot;Print/Send&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:menumediaplanplanprintout.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Type: Weekly (Select time and details columns if you want them)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createdetailedsummaryrpt.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Print/Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display language, frequency and circulation for a vehicle ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently there are two ways for displaying this information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle notes &lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information into the VEHICLE FILE NOTES field which it great if you use the same vehicle on many schedule lines. Notes at the bottom of the schedule work best in this scenario.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Eg: A schedule with 20 lines but only 5 vehicles .. the information is best places as three lines of notes in the footing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Alternatively you can add the information at the vehicle name in abbreviated fashion. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclenotes.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle names&lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information to the name means that the information shows wherever the name shows which ends up pretty good eg on billing analysis report too. It allows any type of information to be shown without adding lots of custom columns which vary tremendously per media type, client and market.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclename.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Circulation is the number of paid subscribers that magazines and newspapers have. Broadcast media such as television and radio do not use the term circulation, instead they measure their audiences in terms of viewers and listeners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display artwork / creative / misc charges in a schedule to a client?==&lt;br /&gt;
Full service agencies generally tend to provide clients with a single media schedule outlining the media vehicles proposed along with artwork, creative, misc charges related to this specific campaign. Other NEOSYS clients would create a media schedule separately and issue a job estimate for the artwork charges. This article will explain how to incorporate the media vehicles and artwork/other charges in a single schedule printout for client approval.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 1===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is suitable if we want to enter additional charges on a per ad basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such charges can be entered in the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; charges column on the media schedule data entry screen. If there are multiple charges, these could be entered separated with a forward slash. You can also enter text to indicate the type of charge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ProductionChargeinSch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 2===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is applicable if we have multiple ads/vehicles and want to show additional charges as a single amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use the following method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a dummy vehicle called ARTWORK with an internal (dummy) supplier&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new line in the schedule using dummy artwork vehicle&lt;br /&gt;
#Select any date and assign 1 ad to it so that the number of ads is 1 for this vehicle&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkanydate.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter gross unit cost in the bill column.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Do not enter anything in the cost column&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicle.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A printout of the above schedule will look like as follows:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicleschdprint.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Suppressing day and date of vehicle program from appearing on schedule printout and invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not wish to display the day and date on this schedule or on the invoice you can refer to the following procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In Schedule File&lt;br /&gt;
#*Leave the dates blank&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter the Number of Ads directly &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:leavedatesblankschedule.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While printing the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Print/Send &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:deselectcheckno.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While generating the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select All Ads under Certified/All&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Create Invoice &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:invoicechecknumber.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not view the booking order for an ad which is moved to a different date?==&lt;br /&gt;
While moving an ad to a different date, we first remove the existing ad from the date on which is scheduled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this process, all information related to the ad is lost i.e. booking order no. /certificates / supplier invoice no. / invoice no. etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens irrespective of whether the schedule is saved or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a specific example below, we can notice this happening when we try to enter the supplier invoice number for an ad which has been moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#We schedule an ad for the 25th of a May &amp;amp; Book it &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-1.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move the ad to 30th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move it back to the 25th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-3.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While trying to enter the supplier invoice number for that ad, we now notice that although the Schedule file shows a booking order no. the Supplier invoice file does not reflect the same. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-4.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to mark/flag special ads in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flags can be used for a variety of purposes, for example to indicate which ads are subject to special deals with the client or supplier and get related reports. Such reports could aid in the calculation of volume rebates for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available flags are currently SINGLE letters from A-Z without any specific meaning so as to provide maximum flexibility. You could standardise on using the flag &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; to indicate ads that form part of sponsorship deals for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the schedule file has any tax code entered, then the flag &amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; is used when user does not want the cost tax to be shown in the Media Diary report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple flags can be entered per plan or schedule line and apply to all ads on that line. For example flags Q, B and C can be entered in any order as QBC or CBQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In future, financial journals may be generated depending on flags entered, for example invoices for ads subject to volume rebates could post a percentage to Provision for Rebate A/cs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to certify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS when an ad is certified it means the ad has appeared.  It is just a way to differentiate between the ads that have appeared from the ones that have not yet appeared.  When we click on ‘certify’ the number of ads with details would appear and we can use a number or a letter (eg X,12) below the Certificate/ Voucher no. to signify that the ad is certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; - in case of magazines and newspapers most agencies use the page number on which the ad has appeared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:certify.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we can see above in the image the letter &#039;x&#039; is used as the certificate number. Certification can be done per ad and we also have the option of issuing the invoice directly after certifying the ad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details on how to certify ads, refer to: [[Certificates/_Voucher_file#Certifying_Ads | Certifying Ads]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to uncertify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
To uncertify ads you need to select the certificate file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Goto Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Certificates -&amp;gt; Certificate / Voucher File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the schedule number&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select Yes for certified&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select search all &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-2.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A list with all the certified ads on that schedule is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#*You can remove the details entered in field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select certify, this will uncertify the ad on the schedule.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-3.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are Certified Ads displayed as Uncertified in Media Progress Summary?==&lt;br /&gt;
====Causes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an Ad is certified as Wrong Ad. For further information see   [[Using NEOSYS Media System#Processing List of Wrong Ads | Processing List of Wrong Ads]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Numbers like &#039;000000&#039; or &#039;0&#039; are entered as Certificate/Voucher No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In both the above cases the Ads are certified as Wrong and hence don&#039;t appear in the Media Progress Summary. This issue comes up only in media progress summary. In all other Media Diary Reports the Wrong Ads do not show up as uncertified Ads.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:Adwrong.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MPSum.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MediaDiary1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to stop the Client Name from being displayed on the Booking Orders?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can be configured, to NOT show the client name on the booking orders, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the supplier is marked with &amp;quot;Show Client on Orders: YES&amp;quot; in the Supplier File then the client name will always be shown on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise the client will be HIDDEN from orders if in the Client File for the client in question, any of the following is true. If none of the following is true, then the client name will show on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as Sundry Client (ie one-off bookings where the actual one-off client name is entered in the Brand Name)&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as &amp;quot;AGENCY&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client type is not marked &amp;quot;DIRECT&amp;quot; AND the main Media Configuration File says &amp;quot;Show Client Name on Orders: NO&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the Media Configuration File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-client-no.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the supplier file &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-supp.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The client should be marked as AGENCY in stead of direct in the Client &amp;amp; Brand File. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-direct.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle &amp;quot;No Response from the database server in 600 seconds&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:nr.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If NEOSYS cannot generate the report within 10 minutes (600 seconds) then you will get an error message saying &amp;quot;No response in 600 seconds from the database server at .....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media module, Media Diary reports that take more than 10 minutes can be sent to the user in the email body or as an email attachment. To receive reports in this way, choose Email Body or Email Attach under Report Delivery options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At times, the report might be too huge that even if you select Email Attachment option, the user with get an email saying &amp;quot;Error in sendmail.js&amp;quot; instead of getting the report.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, it is better to use the option Email Body because if report is too large, then user will get an email with a link that they can click on to get the report. Also see [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_email_not_received#Check_the_size_of_the_mail_being_sent_to_client.27s_email_account this article for other reasons why email is not received]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:eb.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/General_FAQ#Why_is_NEOSYS_taking_a_long_time_to_generate_a_report.3F Why is NEOSYS taking a long time to generate a report]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Media Diary Report showing unexpected results?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Diary report is unreliable if it is generated while users are updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives wrong details for schedules that were not updated during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives 3 different reports for the same options entered in a time frame of 30 to 60 minutes without running the command [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Run_CREATEADS| CREATEADS] performed only by NEOSYS Support.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Possible Cause===&lt;br /&gt;
This issue occurs because there were interrelated files that were being saved during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While generating the media diary, NEOSYS searches for various combinations like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Vehicle &amp;amp; Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Brand &amp;amp; Date etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user updates the system, various inter-related files are frozen and the data related to those files will not appear in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
While we are working on a fix for this issue in NEOSYS, a workaround to get reliable and accurate reports is to generate a report from the test dataset.&lt;br /&gt;
The test dataset is a copy of the live data from the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
This report will not have real time data but will be more reliable as the chances of users updating the test dataset are very low.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If users insist that they want reports in real time then they should accept that the reports will be unreliable as NEOSYS cannot freeze many user windows for some users to take real time reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more data is updated into the system then the old report needs to be discarded and new report needs to be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus NEOSYS recommends that media diary reports should be generated when users are not updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on Troubleshooting Media Diary reports see [[Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Details_missing_in_Media_Diary_or_Changes_in_Files_does_not_reflect_in_Media_Diary| Details Missing in Media Diary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Ads_are_missing_from_media_diary_reports_when_filtering_using_schedule_client_or_brand_although_ads_are_actually_present_in_the_schedule Why are Ads missing from media diary reports when filtering using schedule client or brand although ads are actually present in the schedule]==&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the invoice/ booking order showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule contains ads only for October 1 and 10?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediainvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
The reason why the booking order / invoice is showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule only contains ads for Oct 1, 2012 and Oct 10, 2012 is because NEOSYS is showing dates FROM – UPTO (see the dash?) as is a common requirement for Outdoor Media. This is caused because of entering data like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification field for media type Outdoor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
Don’t put anything like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification for media type “outdoor/out of home” unless you want to indicate a NUMBER OF DAYS OR NUMBER OF WEEKS, NUMBER OF MONTHS ETC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, use a dash instead of a comma … “xxxxxx - 999 xxxx”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperinvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Gross Amount field picking up the amount before the comma in the Specification field?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numeric specification in the ratecard is used as the gross unit rate for some rate card setups by clients. For example, &amp;quot;500, Sun-Thurs&amp;quot;, which takes 500 as the Gross unit amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The comma identifies the amount before it as the Gross unit amount so, entering text like &amp;quot;500,000 Impressions&amp;quot; will put 500 in the Gross Amount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros2.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of a comma, put a space or single quote, so that it reads 500 000 or 500&#039;000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGross.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the total number of ads shown in schedule not matching with the ads with dates in schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_dates.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens only when the user manually changes the No of Ads in the schedule. In such situations, while trying to save the schedule, the system prompts the user with the following warning message. The schedule can be saved only if the user saves the schedule despite the warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_save.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also while trying to invoice such a schedule, the system again prompts the user to correct the schedule date or skip checking numbers. Only if the user manually changes the option to Check Numbers:No, the invoice can be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_invoicing.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the media diary of such schedules, every row represents one of the ads that have a date. However the total of Paid Ads Bill shows the total number of ads that have been paid for (this includes the ads without dates). Similarly, the total of Bill Amount shows the total bill paid by the client for ALL the ads in the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_mediadiary.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why doesn&#039;t my NEOSYS schedule agree with my spreadsheet?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably NEOSYS and your spreadsheet are using different rounding rules &lt;br /&gt;
for the calculation of Net Unit Price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your spreadsheet is calculating the Net Unit Price, for example from &lt;br /&gt;
Gross Unit Price less discount, and NOT ROUNDING IT to a whole number of &lt;br /&gt;
cents before using it in later calculations, then there will be &lt;br /&gt;
differences in some case because NEOSYS rounds any calculated Net Unit &lt;br /&gt;
Price, to cents by default, BEFORE using it in any further calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that spreadsheets may be configured to DISPLAY only two decimal &lt;br /&gt;
places while secretly keeping fractional cents behind the scenes. This &lt;br /&gt;
means that just because you SEE two decimal places in your spreadsheet, &lt;br /&gt;
it doesnt mean that it is using only two decimal places for onward &lt;br /&gt;
calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Neither way can be declared absolutely right or wrong. NEOSYS method has &lt;br /&gt;
the advantage that what you see is what you get, and can be checked with &lt;br /&gt;
a calculator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 60%; height: 100px; text-align: center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|GROSS UNIT PRICE||LESS DISC%||UNROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||ROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||xQTY OF ADS||TOTAL AMOUNT1||TOTAL AMOUNT2||DIFFERENCE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|30.00||7.25||27.825||27.83||10||278.25||278.30||0.05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 1 - Increase the number of decimals in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the standard solution for digital media where unit prices can be &lt;br /&gt;
very small, or even measured in cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the GROSS UNIT PRICE with more than two decimal places. eg 10.0000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS will then calculate, display and use the Net Unit Price with the &lt;br /&gt;
same decimal places. ie with fractional instead of whole cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 2 - Use ROUND() function in Excel===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change your Excel to match NEOSYS. Use the rounding function &lt;br /&gt;
ROUND(CELL,2) to ensure that the net unit price is rounded to a whole &lt;br /&gt;
number of cents before being multiplied by the number of ads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 3 - Direct entry===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Omit all the other columns and enter the amount that you want directly &lt;br /&gt;
into the Net Unit Cost column. Put number of ads 1 ie package deal. Then &lt;br /&gt;
you can get whatever you want in the total amount column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are there discrepancies between Media Diary report and Billing analysis report?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary is based on the date that the ad appeared whereas Billing Analysis is based on the financial period of the posting which is usually the date of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since invoices are usually raised in a different month from the date of appearance of the ad, Media Diary is rarely, if ever, in agreement with Billing Analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from the above, invoices might be left unposted or even deleted before being posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also additional postings might be made to P&amp;amp;L billing accounts and therefore have analysis codes and appear in billings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One possible way to reconcile the two might be to filter the media diary on invoice date. But an ad may have multiple invoices if it is credited or adjusted and these adjustments may be in different months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Final story is that Media Diary gives you an accurate picture of actual advertising by month the ad appeared, whereas Billing analysis gives you an accurate picture of media billing by month of billing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is there a discrepancy between total billing as per Media Diary report and total billings as per list of invoices?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The total billing as per media diary may differ slightly from the total billing as per the list of invoices. This is due to unavoidable rounding differences because percentages calculated per invoice line logically will not always agree to the cent with percentages calculated per invoice totals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get payment status details on media diary reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
The payment details columns are suppressed from the media diary reports by default but will show if you select one or more payment status filter options. If you select &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; then you get all ads (which is the same as if don’t make any selection), but you will get the payment details columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mediadiarypaymentoption.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Margin and Margin(base) in Media Diary export?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary export to Excel/CSV includes columns Margin and Margin (Base) subject to authorisation, but only if you choose both Bill and Cost options for exporting. Note that the default option is to only export Bill information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What can go on a consolidated booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows you put place many periods and many media (vehicles) on a single schedule. It does not however allow multiple brands on one schedule. Despite this, in order to facilitate monthly invoicing, it is common to enter a media schedule (plan) for a single brand for a single month for one or more media vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore in some cases you might wish to combine more than one schedule into a single booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Common examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many brands on one booking order. If a client has many brands then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many media on one booking order. If a supplier has many media then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many periods on one booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any combination of the above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rare examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many clients on one booking order. If the media is special or you have a group of clients that are associated and should be booked as a group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many suppliers on one booking order. It is hard to imagine where this would be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also refer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_booking_order_for_a_vehicle_from_different_schedules_with_multiple_periods.3F|How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_consolidated_booking_order_for_multiple_vehicles.3F|How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I upload a scanned copy of an ad that appeared to the Certificate File?==&lt;br /&gt;
While certifying each ad users can upload the scanned copy of the appeared ad using material option. These images can be later viewed in their respective schedules by selecting the image button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(1)	Click on the materials icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2)	Browser for the scanned image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(3)	Upload the image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:cert1.jpg‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Broadcast Orders/Play Lists?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Broadcast Order on the Schedules menu. This will come better once the proper tv bookings per break data entry is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter Loading such that a portion of it is not shown to the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;|&amp;quot; can be used as a separator for Loading details that need not be shown to the client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media Schedules, when a Loading is entered containing &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;, only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; is reflected in Schedule Printouts and Invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the ENTIRE Loading details (BOTH before and after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;) is reflected in Booking Orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, in Plans, Media Plans show only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;. But Cost Plans will show ONLY the portion after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; (not BOTH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loading.jpg|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to compare budgets per media type in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by media type can easily be done by creating a dummy vehicle per media type, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by media type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy vehicle called Newspaper Budget was created which is linked to the media type Newspapers. The budget meant for media type Newspapers was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per type shows budget vs actual figures for media type Newspapers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy vehicle.jpg |600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mt budgetfile.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis mt.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to set budgets per client (instead of brand) to compare budgets in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by client (instead of brand) can be done by creating a dummy brand per client, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy brand called Al Nabooda Budget was created under the client Al Nabooda Automobile. The budget meant for the client Al Nabooda Automobile was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per client shows budget vs actual figures for the client Al Nabooda Automobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy brand.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Budget file per client.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis per client.jpg  |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter a discount on total net as an amount and not percentage?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schedule files, discount on the total net bill amount is given by entering a discount % in the Agency Discount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of percentage discount, users may want this discount to be shown as an amount. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A discount can be entered directly as a negative amount in the vehicle line following the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a vehicle file &amp;quot;DISC&amp;quot; (Discounts).&lt;br /&gt;
#Use this vehicle in the schedule and enter a negative amount under one of the columns (e.g. Disc/Load/Others) in the vehicle line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; somewhere in the schedule, as mentioned in [[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_save_a_schedule_file_with_negative_net_unit_amount_in_a_vehicle_line.3F|Saving a schedule file with negative net unit amount]] .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter general discount for all the clients for a Vehicle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A general discount can be set for all the Clients in the Vehicle rate card file under Client specific rates. Keep the client code field blank and enter the discount. This discount rate will automatically appear for all the Clients for this vehicle. In case there is already an entry with a specific client code, then for that client the discount entered against its code will be picked and for every other client discount in the blank line will be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vr file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_when_there_is_no_difference_between_bill_and_cost| How to handle operations where there is no difference between bill and cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_to_restrict_users_from_seeing_media_billing_information|How to hide media billing information from certain departments?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisations_for_a_client_with_separate_planning.2C_booking_and_invoicing_teams_who_bill_at_cost|How to set up authorisations for a client with separate planning, booking and invoicing teams who bill at cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Accessing large reports via emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
When getting reports delivered by email, if the report size is more than 10Mb then, instead of the report being embedded in or attached to the email, the email will contain a web browser link to the file instead of the file itself. This gets around restrictions on email size commonly imposed by email servers. This applies to reports which are either embedded within the email body or attached files. NOTE: The link is only valid for one hour after the email is sent so users must download the report before then.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7328</id>
		<title>Media FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7328"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T06:38:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Why am I not able to enter a negative amount in the vehicle line? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How do I get subtotals on a Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to get subtotals at least one or more options in the Order field has to be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediadiaryfaq.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to show cost tax amount in Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please read [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Report_on_Cost_VAT_Tax | Report on Cost VAT Tax]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is a despatch status?==&lt;br /&gt;
Despatch status can be the fax number, address, e-mail, date, representative name, etc or any other information regarding the despatch of a booking order or invoice generated from NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch status of the booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch status can be viewed in the ‘despatch record’ column when generating a list of the booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Viewingdespatchstatus.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch status of existing booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old order from Media &amp;gt; Booking Orders &amp;gt; Old Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Updatedespatchorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch date shows on the clients statement of account in the finance module. Before generating the client account statement select Despatch date in Options on the Statement of account page, this adds a Date Sent column in the client account statement which shows the despatch date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Despatchdatestatement.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter/update the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old Media Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Old med inv.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I save an invoice proforma in NEOSYS?===&lt;br /&gt;
When generating an invoice, select Save Proforma on the invoice formatting page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediainvoiceproforma.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view saved invoice proformas?===&lt;br /&gt;
To view saved invoice proformas go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas and enter the proformas invoice number in the Invoice No. field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Invoiceproformas.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I add or amend client order number when reprinting invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas to view the Old Media Invoices page as shown in [[Media_FAQ#Where_can_I_view_saved_invoice_proformas.3F|&amp;quot;Where can I view saved invoice proformas&amp;quot;]]. Enter the invoice number in the Invoice No. field and the new client order number in the Client Order No. field, then click Reprint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be useful when the order number is not known at the time of invoicing e.g when invoicing early or when the client changes their mind. It saves having to manually amend the invoice text before submission to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The client order number on the schedule is also updated, but only if it is both present and matches the order number being amended on the invoice. This is to avoid confusion in the rare case when issuing multiple invoices with different client order numbers from the same schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I cancel/credit note an invoice?===&lt;br /&gt;
New Method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click invoice on the schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Credit note option.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the credit note in journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OLD Method:&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an Invoice in media you need to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove the ad dates from the date grid in schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the INVOICE button at the top of the dates column (you will be asked to update the version number (say no) and save the schedule (say yes)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the invoice creation screen don’t chose any options (except maybe enter the invoice date) and click &amp;quot;Proforma&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the invoice journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to invoice a specific range of ads in a schedule spanning over many months?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to do this, certify the ads in the date range you want to invoice and then, invoice using the option &amp;quot;Certified Ads Only&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to certification screen by clicking the &#039;Certify&#039; button in the schedule file or Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Certificates &amp;gt; Certificate/Voucher File.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Date Range and Schedule No and click &#039;Update All&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter [[Media_Types_File#Certification | Certification No]] and click OK. A popup will inform you of how many ads were certified.&lt;br /&gt;
#Return to the schedule file, click &#039;Invoice&#039; button and under the option title &amp;quot;Certified/All&amp;quot; choose the option &amp;quot;Certified ads only&amp;quot; and invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to do partial invoicing in a schedule?===&lt;br /&gt;
Summary of the procedure for 50% partial invoicing:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#After the schedule has been booked, add &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; under the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column for all vehicle lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; from all vehicle lines&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can get tedious in case of schedules with too many lines, but you will save time using the keyboard shortcuts mentioned in the detailed steps below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the first vehicle line, under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column enter -50% (don&#039;t press enter or any key yet)&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the keyboard down arrow key&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; key when you get the popup &amp;quot;Do you want the changes to be rebooked?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard shortcut Alt + y (to copy the -50% from previous line)&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 till all lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first vehicle&#039;s &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;Del&amp;quot; key and then down arrow key. Repeat this till no lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I cancel a booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an issued booking order you can remove the appearance dates from the Dates calendar in the media schedule and click on Book to generate a media booking cancellation for the ads that have been removed from the Dates calendar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Bookingordercancel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I suppress free ads on the booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
On the New booking order page you can select the Suppress Free option in order to not show the free ads on the booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Suppressfreeads.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may be possible that for some reason the number of ads that you have charged the client for are more than the number of ads you actually booked with the vehicle supplier. NEOSYS allows you to enter this information in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For eg, you bill the client for 500 radio spots and place an order for only 400 actually. Now the agency can enter the number of ads as 500 in the schedule, 100 of which can be selected as &#039;free to agency&#039; ads. If you do not want these &#039;free to agency&#039; ads to show in the booking order you can select Suppress free ads when generating the order to prevent them from showing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to do free ads for digital media?==&lt;br /&gt;
To enter Free Ads, we can put the Ads on a separate line and type a word like &amp;quot;FREE&amp;quot; in the discount column so that the net unit price of that line is zero, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Free_Ads_Digital_Media.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I assess the value of free ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
The Net amount for free ads is zero and same appears in all media diary reports. The gross amount also appears as blank because the gross columns in the media diary report are for paid ads where gross price is the unit price multiplied by the total number of ads. The ads with net unit price zero are considered free ads and not paid, so gross price for them appears as blank in the gross bill/cost columns. Hence it becomes difficult to assess the value of free ads, as gross is blank and net value is zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following reports to evaluate free ads:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In Media Diary reports, look for Gross cost/bill in the Net Free cost/bill columns.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Summary of Paid and Free Ads&amp;quot; report shows the gross bill for the free ads in schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#How_do_I_issue_a_credit_note_for_part_of_a_schedule.3F How do I issue a credit note for specific ads?]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Schedule_file#Version_section|What is a version?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I view historical changes made to a database record?==&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a database record in NEOSYS is updated or modified; the system creates a new version of it and saves the record creating a trail of all previously edited versions linked to the most updated one. Whenever a database record is opened for viewing, the user will get a complete list of history of edits done on the record along with a link to each version. This will help the user to pull out historic edits on any single record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to split large schedules?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There could be scenarios where the schedule created is too large to save or too big to be handled by NEOSYS. This could be because there are too many spots across too many dates or the vehicle used does not support bulk ads. To address such issues schedules can be split into smaller schedules. To do so&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the schedule in question to a new schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the new schedule, remove the past ads that are already booked and invoiced in the older schedule. Only retain ads for future dates and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the old schedule, remove future ads that are now present in the newly copied schedule and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get subtotals on a schedule/plan printout?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the subtotals to appear on the printout the schedule/plan lines have to be separated by a blank line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The schedule printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The invoice printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I insert new rows in the schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
Schedule lines can be added or removed conveniently by clicking on the &#039;+&#039; and &#039;-&#039; icons respectively. You can also do so by clicking on the Vehicle code field and press &#039;ctrl+n&#039; (to add a line above the selected field) or the &#039;down arrow&#039; key (to add a line below the selected field). When inserting a schedule row NEOSYS gives us various options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediascheduleinsertline.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in a vehicle line?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you try to save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in any vehicle line, you will face the below error message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NET UNIT AMOUNT CANNOT BE NEGATIVE, WITHOUT COMMENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This message is deliberately vague and not a plain statement because entering negative amounts will cause variety of issues such as negative income, negative figures in some billing analysis reports and possibly even breaking VAT regulations over reporting of discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, the total number of ads for the client in use will increase along with Media diary report displaying negative figures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However as long as the Finance team is aware of these possible issues, NEOSYS allows users to enter a negative Net Amount in the vehicle line, IF the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; is entered somewhere in the schedule. You can sneak it into any field in the schedule file, such as Private comments, so it doesn&#039;t show to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend doing this in TEST database first, to check how the Media and Finance reports display the ads and their amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why am I not able to enter a negative amount in the vehicle line?===&lt;br /&gt;
A negative amount cannot be directly entered in the Gross Unit Amount field since NEOSYS does not allow you to enter any amount less than &#039;0&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Negative amt.png|frameless|223x223px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple methods of entering negative amounts in the vehicle line, which depend on how you want the Media and Finance to display or record these amounts. Some examples are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-100AED&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039; or &#039;Other&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;50AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-200%&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039;. (This adds a positive balance to Gross Unit Amt total in Media Diary, which you may not prefer)&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;50&#039; in &#039;Loading&#039; and &#039;-200%&#039; in &#039;Discount&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to restrict the days on which ads can be placed==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are four ways to restrict this. In order of precedence,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Days field. (Values: Numbers 1-7) See Market file to check what number correlates to which day of the week.&lt;br /&gt;
#Program/Position field. (Keywords: FRIDAY/ friday/ FRI/ fri) For single day use &amp;quot;Mon&amp;quot;, ranges use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed&amp;quot;, ranges &amp;amp; single day use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed Sat&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
#Specification field. (Keywords: Same as point 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Vehicle file (Refer [[Vehicle_File#Day_of_Week|Day of week]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Adrestrict.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods?==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the multiple period schedule numbers are entered in the Schedule Code/No field by inserting extra lines select the vehicle you wish to book (will show automatically if only one vehicle in the schedule) and select the One combined order option. This would generate one single order for all the schedules even if they belong to separate periods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Multiperiodbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue separate booking orders for each vehicle in a schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
As the schedule number appears on the Schedule Code/No field the system will ask you which vehicles you wish to book considering the schedule has multiple vehicles. The system would generate an independent booking order for each of the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE - even if one or more vehicles have the same supplier there will be a separate booking order for each vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Massbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to send out one consolidated booking order comprising multiple schedules, vehicle and suppliers to an associate agency. Once you have entered the multiple schedule numbers and selected the required vehicle/vehicles select the One combined order option, this option would issue one consolidated booking order for all the vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Consolidateorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue Amendment Booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order with multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
For issuing amendment booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order, all vehicle lines of all schedules which are a part of the consolidated/combined booking order need to be amended. Follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For schedules that do not require any change, enter a dot on the vehicle line (which appeared in the combined booking order), eg. in the &amp;quot;Loading&amp;quot; field and save the schedule. Then remove the dot and resave the schedule. A message to rebook this line will appear, to which you MUST select Yes.&lt;br /&gt;
#For the schedule&#039;s vehicle line where an actual change is required, make the amendment and then select the &amp;quot;Book&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add all the schedules and the vehicle code in new booking page, select the &amp;quot;One combined order&amp;quot; option and select any Amendment Order Style as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that you check the Preview/Draft before clicking Book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I book one media vehicle through different suppliers?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is not uncommon and perfectly normal to book a particular media/vehicle through different suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS you have to create a new vehicle file record with a different vehicle code but with similar details and linked to the alternative supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the correct vehicle code for any particular schedule and booking, all the various operational and management reports can distinguish between the two operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to merge the two vehicles on management reports then mark the second and subsequent media vehicle records &amp;quot;analyse as&amp;quot; field to be the original vehicle code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get billing analysis both by supplier and in total for the vehicle, ensure that the vehicle name is spelt and punctuated ABSOLUTELY IDENTICAL on all Vehicle File records for the same vehicle on all suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you order the report simply by vehicle, the reporting program will merge the billings into one line where the names are identical. If you want to see the billings of the vehicle per supplier use order 1. by vehicle 2. by supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to modify / add terms to Media Booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To amend or to add the standard notes/terms at the bottom of booking orders, go to Media --&amp;gt; Files --&amp;gt; Media Type File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The booking order notes are different for each media type - Magazines, Radio etc. so you must select the type of media that you want to change and do them all one by one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Open and select a media type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the desire booking notes. There may be separate sections for English and other languages so you should consider changing the language in all sections. Each language sections starts something like %SPANISH% etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media type file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What tax % is used when using the &amp;quot;Add Standard Tax&amp;quot; on the booking order creation?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system first checks the &amp;quot;Invoice tax code&amp;quot; field  in the Media Configuration File for the rate%. Otherwise if no tax code is entered then the system uses first tax code in the Tax Rate File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system does not use the tax/VAT code from the schedule, because that is the tax/VAT rate to the client which could, at least in principle, be zero or something else, and be different from the tax/VAT rate charged by the supplier to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I create a Transmission Certificate/Airing Certificate?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For all ads on one schedule, you can print the schedule in the style of a “Certificate” [[File:mediascheduleprint.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To filter certified ads by more specific criteria, select the Certified filter in the media diary, including the other filters you require. Remember to re-title the media diary report however you like eg “Transmission Certificate”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MediaDiaryTransCertFilter.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How are ads certified automatically?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Automatic_certification_by_importing_Ad_monitoring_data Automatic certification by importing Ad monitoring data]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter multilevel clients and brands in the Client and Brand File?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see how multilevel clients can be entered, refer [[Agency_FAQ#How_do_I_classify_clients_based_on_industry_or_parent_company.3F|How do I classify clients based on industry or parent company?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multilevel brands are represented by indenting the brand names. The number of spaces in indenting signifies the level of a particular brand. Enter the brands in the Client and Brand File as shown in the example below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example Level 1 brands are Mondelez International and Nestle. Notice the red highlight which indicates that Level 2 brand names Kraft, Cadbury, Wonka and L&#039;oreal are indented by 1 space and the Level 3 brands like Capri Sun, Twirl, Nerds etc. are indented by 2 spaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sub-brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While searching for brands under the client, the list will show multilevel brands as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Brandsselect.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I stop a specific brand within Client and Brand file?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can stop usage of brands on documents by putting the tag &amp;lt;STOP&amp;gt; in the brand name under the client and brand file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After doing so,user will get the following message if he selects this brand:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stop error.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I use different client names for media and for billing purposes?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A standard issue faced by all agencies is that sometimes they have to act as a third-party between another agency (A) and that agency&#039;s client (C), i.e. they receive instructions from and have to bill A for ads that belong to C. Here the booking order will show client name C and invoice will be issued to Agency A.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, in the Client and Brand file for agency &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;, put &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; at the beginning of the brand name with a colon between &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the brand name. So name of the brand will be &amp;quot;C:brandname&amp;quot;. Then the booking order will display client name as &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the invoice will be issued to &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example shown below, the agency acts as a third-party agency by billing &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; for ads that belong to the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot;. To do this, in the &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; Client and Brand file, brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is created with name &amp;quot;KIA:Cerato&amp;quot;, where KIA is the client that owns the brand &amp;quot;Cerato&amp;quot;. So when brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is used in a schedule, when issuing a Booking Order it shows the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot;. But when issuing an invoice, it will be issued to the agency &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CandB File.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Booking Order.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Invoice.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the numeric value that is accepted in week plan ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter number of ads by week separated by slashes (e.g. &amp;quot;1/2//4&amp;quot; mean 1 ad in the 1st week, 2 in the 2nd and 4 in the 4th week. For weeks that cross two months, put something like &amp;quot;2+3&amp;quot; to indicate ads per month)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I handle &amp;quot;Allow Over Plan&amp;quot; error?==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Error:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  “Cannot save “REF###” because:&lt;br /&gt;
   YTD Planned Amount Exceeded (XXX)”&lt;br /&gt;
   If authorized, you may check the “Allow Over Plan” checkbox in the schedule heading”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Explanation:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens when the planned amount (in the media plan) for the brand and client is more less then the scheduled ie the schedule is in excess of the plan for that period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Solution:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
This is just a warning and you can avoid this message by clicking on allow over budget next to the company code section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I avoid getting 0 (zero) invoices to clients when amending cost to supplier after invoicing the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
After invoicing a schedule, if you change any cost information (leaving the bill information intact) and issue a cost invoice (to create the relevant journal entries), the system will also issue a 0 (zero) invoice to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These zero invoices cannot be avoided and help to track any audit trail information. Either way the zero items do not appear on the outstanding statement so it shouldn&#039;t be a problem at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(SB to please add more)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to setup and operate the List of Materials Pending Delivery reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Pending_Materials|Refer here to set up the List of materials pending]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways to get off from the list of pending list&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Materials file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Material &amp;gt; Materials File. To get the Material details on the screen enter the material code on the material number field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Material code can be seen on the List of material pending delivery on the Original Schedule Column.&lt;br /&gt;
#To get the material off from the pending list, enter the material code or enter anything in the material code field to indicate the delivery and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Schedule===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The material code can also be entered in the materials section on the bottom of the schedule file without going to the Material File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; When Materials from one schedule are reused on other schedules, then, to avoid duplicate materials records being generated in the material file by the secondary schedule, the original schedule no and material letter should be entered in the secondary schedule&#039;s material section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered?==&lt;br /&gt;
All the currency on the cost line is taken from the vehicle file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the steps to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the vehicle file and change the currency you want to show on the cost line in the schedule and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the schedule and re-type the details in a new line and delete wrongly entered line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to view a weekly summary of scheduled ads for a brand?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media schedules can consolidated and printed in the format of media plans by printing an empty dummy media plan (one with no lines). After creating such a empty dummy plan, printing it results in the plan printout being dynamically &amp;quot;reverse engineered&amp;quot; on the fly from whatever approved media schedules are currently in the system for the same brand and period as the empty plan. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plan printout currency is always base currency currently regardless of whatever currency you put on the dummy plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Steps:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create an EMPTY plan for the desired period and brand that you want.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039; - You only need do this once)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createemtpyplan.jpg|center|frame|How to create empty plan]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Plans &amp;gt; Plan File and click &amp;quot;Print/Send&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:menumediaplanplanprintout.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Type: Weekly (Select time and details columns if you want them)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createdetailedsummaryrpt.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Print/Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display language, frequency and circulation for a vehicle ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently there are two ways for displaying this information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle notes &lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information into the VEHICLE FILE NOTES field which it great if you use the same vehicle on many schedule lines. Notes at the bottom of the schedule work best in this scenario.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Eg: A schedule with 20 lines but only 5 vehicles .. the information is best places as three lines of notes in the footing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Alternatively you can add the information at the vehicle name in abbreviated fashion. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclenotes.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle names&lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information to the name means that the information shows wherever the name shows which ends up pretty good eg on billing analysis report too. It allows any type of information to be shown without adding lots of custom columns which vary tremendously per media type, client and market.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclename.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Circulation is the number of paid subscribers that magazines and newspapers have. Broadcast media such as television and radio do not use the term circulation, instead they measure their audiences in terms of viewers and listeners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display artwork / creative / misc charges in a schedule to a client?==&lt;br /&gt;
Full service agencies generally tend to provide clients with a single media schedule outlining the media vehicles proposed along with artwork, creative, misc charges related to this specific campaign. Other NEOSYS clients would create a media schedule separately and issue a job estimate for the artwork charges. This article will explain how to incorporate the media vehicles and artwork/other charges in a single schedule printout for client approval.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 1===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is suitable if we want to enter additional charges on a per ad basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such charges can be entered in the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; charges column on the media schedule data entry screen. If there are multiple charges, these could be entered separated with a forward slash. You can also enter text to indicate the type of charge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ProductionChargeinSch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 2===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is applicable if we have multiple ads/vehicles and want to show additional charges as a single amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use the following method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a dummy vehicle called ARTWORK with an internal (dummy) supplier&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new line in the schedule using dummy artwork vehicle&lt;br /&gt;
#Select any date and assign 1 ad to it so that the number of ads is 1 for this vehicle&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkanydate.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter gross unit cost in the bill column.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Do not enter anything in the cost column&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicle.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A printout of the above schedule will look like as follows:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicleschdprint.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Suppressing day and date of vehicle program from appearing on schedule printout and invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not wish to display the day and date on this schedule or on the invoice you can refer to the following procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In Schedule File&lt;br /&gt;
#*Leave the dates blank&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter the Number of Ads directly &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:leavedatesblankschedule.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While printing the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Print/Send &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:deselectcheckno.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While generating the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select All Ads under Certified/All&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Create Invoice &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:invoicechecknumber.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not view the booking order for an ad which is moved to a different date?==&lt;br /&gt;
While moving an ad to a different date, we first remove the existing ad from the date on which is scheduled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this process, all information related to the ad is lost i.e. booking order no. /certificates / supplier invoice no. / invoice no. etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens irrespective of whether the schedule is saved or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a specific example below, we can notice this happening when we try to enter the supplier invoice number for an ad which has been moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#We schedule an ad for the 25th of a May &amp;amp; Book it &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-1.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move the ad to 30th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move it back to the 25th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-3.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While trying to enter the supplier invoice number for that ad, we now notice that although the Schedule file shows a booking order no. the Supplier invoice file does not reflect the same. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-4.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to mark/flag special ads in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flags can be used for a variety of purposes, for example to indicate which ads are subject to special deals with the client or supplier and get related reports. Such reports could aid in the calculation of volume rebates for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available flags are currently SINGLE letters from A-Z without any specific meaning so as to provide maximum flexibility. You could standardise on using the flag &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; to indicate ads that form part of sponsorship deals for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the schedule file has any tax code entered, then the flag &amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; is used when user does not want the cost tax to be shown in the Media Diary report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple flags can be entered per plan or schedule line and apply to all ads on that line. For example flags Q, B and C can be entered in any order as QBC or CBQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In future, financial journals may be generated depending on flags entered, for example invoices for ads subject to volume rebates could post a percentage to Provision for Rebate A/cs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to certify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS when an ad is certified it means the ad has appeared.  It is just a way to differentiate between the ads that have appeared from the ones that have not yet appeared.  When we click on ‘certify’ the number of ads with details would appear and we can use a number or a letter (eg X,12) below the Certificate/ Voucher no. to signify that the ad is certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; - in case of magazines and newspapers most agencies use the page number on which the ad has appeared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:certify.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we can see above in the image the letter &#039;x&#039; is used as the certificate number. Certification can be done per ad and we also have the option of issuing the invoice directly after certifying the ad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details on how to certify ads, refer to: [[Certificates/_Voucher_file#Certifying_Ads | Certifying Ads]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to uncertify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
To uncertify ads you need to select the certificate file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Goto Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Certificates -&amp;gt; Certificate / Voucher File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the schedule number&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select Yes for certified&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select search all &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-2.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A list with all the certified ads on that schedule is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#*You can remove the details entered in field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select certify, this will uncertify the ad on the schedule.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-3.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are Certified Ads displayed as Uncertified in Media Progress Summary?==&lt;br /&gt;
====Causes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an Ad is certified as Wrong Ad. For further information see   [[Using NEOSYS Media System#Processing List of Wrong Ads | Processing List of Wrong Ads]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Numbers like &#039;000000&#039; or &#039;0&#039; are entered as Certificate/Voucher No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In both the above cases the Ads are certified as Wrong and hence don&#039;t appear in the Media Progress Summary. This issue comes up only in media progress summary. In all other Media Diary Reports the Wrong Ads do not show up as uncertified Ads.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:Adwrong.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MPSum.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MediaDiary1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to stop the Client Name from being displayed on the Booking Orders?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can be configured, to NOT show the client name on the booking orders, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the supplier is marked with &amp;quot;Show Client on Orders: YES&amp;quot; in the Supplier File then the client name will always be shown on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise the client will be HIDDEN from orders if in the Client File for the client in question, any of the following is true. If none of the following is true, then the client name will show on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as Sundry Client (ie one-off bookings where the actual one-off client name is entered in the Brand Name)&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as &amp;quot;AGENCY&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client type is not marked &amp;quot;DIRECT&amp;quot; AND the main Media Configuration File says &amp;quot;Show Client Name on Orders: NO&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the Media Configuration File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-client-no.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the supplier file &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-supp.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The client should be marked as AGENCY in stead of direct in the Client &amp;amp; Brand File. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-direct.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle &amp;quot;No Response from the database server in 600 seconds&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:nr.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If NEOSYS cannot generate the report within 10 minutes (600 seconds) then you will get an error message saying &amp;quot;No response in 600 seconds from the database server at .....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media module, Media Diary reports that take more than 10 minutes can be sent to the user in the email body or as an email attachment. To receive reports in this way, choose Email Body or Email Attach under Report Delivery options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At times, the report might be too huge that even if you select Email Attachment option, the user with get an email saying &amp;quot;Error in sendmail.js&amp;quot; instead of getting the report.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, it is better to use the option Email Body because if report is too large, then user will get an email with a link that they can click on to get the report. Also see [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_email_not_received#Check_the_size_of_the_mail_being_sent_to_client.27s_email_account this article for other reasons why email is not received]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:eb.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/General_FAQ#Why_is_NEOSYS_taking_a_long_time_to_generate_a_report.3F Why is NEOSYS taking a long time to generate a report]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Media Diary Report showing unexpected results?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Diary report is unreliable if it is generated while users are updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives wrong details for schedules that were not updated during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives 3 different reports for the same options entered in a time frame of 30 to 60 minutes without running the command [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Run_CREATEADS| CREATEADS] performed only by NEOSYS Support.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Possible Cause===&lt;br /&gt;
This issue occurs because there were interrelated files that were being saved during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While generating the media diary, NEOSYS searches for various combinations like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Vehicle &amp;amp; Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Brand &amp;amp; Date etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user updates the system, various inter-related files are frozen and the data related to those files will not appear in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
While we are working on a fix for this issue in NEOSYS, a workaround to get reliable and accurate reports is to generate a report from the test dataset.&lt;br /&gt;
The test dataset is a copy of the live data from the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
This report will not have real time data but will be more reliable as the chances of users updating the test dataset are very low.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If users insist that they want reports in real time then they should accept that the reports will be unreliable as NEOSYS cannot freeze many user windows for some users to take real time reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more data is updated into the system then the old report needs to be discarded and new report needs to be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus NEOSYS recommends that media diary reports should be generated when users are not updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on Troubleshooting Media Diary reports see [[Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Details_missing_in_Media_Diary_or_Changes_in_Files_does_not_reflect_in_Media_Diary| Details Missing in Media Diary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Ads_are_missing_from_media_diary_reports_when_filtering_using_schedule_client_or_brand_although_ads_are_actually_present_in_the_schedule Why are Ads missing from media diary reports when filtering using schedule client or brand although ads are actually present in the schedule]==&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the invoice/ booking order showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule contains ads only for October 1 and 10?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediainvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
The reason why the booking order / invoice is showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule only contains ads for Oct 1, 2012 and Oct 10, 2012 is because NEOSYS is showing dates FROM – UPTO (see the dash?) as is a common requirement for Outdoor Media. This is caused because of entering data like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification field for media type Outdoor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
Don’t put anything like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification for media type “outdoor/out of home” unless you want to indicate a NUMBER OF DAYS OR NUMBER OF WEEKS, NUMBER OF MONTHS ETC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, use a dash instead of a comma … “xxxxxx - 999 xxxx”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperinvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Gross Amount field picking up the amount before the comma in the Specification field?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numeric specification in the ratecard is used as the gross unit rate for some rate card setups by clients. For example, &amp;quot;500, Sun-Thurs&amp;quot;, which takes 500 as the Gross unit amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The comma identifies the amount before it as the Gross unit amount so, entering text like &amp;quot;500,000 Impressions&amp;quot; will put 500 in the Gross Amount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros2.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of a comma, put a space or single quote, so that it reads 500 000 or 500&#039;000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGross.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the total number of ads shown in schedule not matching with the ads with dates in schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_dates.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens only when the user manually changes the No of Ads in the schedule. In such situations, while trying to save the schedule, the system prompts the user with the following warning message. The schedule can be saved only if the user saves the schedule despite the warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_save.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also while trying to invoice such a schedule, the system again prompts the user to correct the schedule date or skip checking numbers. Only if the user manually changes the option to Check Numbers:No, the invoice can be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_invoicing.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the media diary of such schedules, every row represents one of the ads that have a date. However the total of Paid Ads Bill shows the total number of ads that have been paid for (this includes the ads without dates). Similarly, the total of Bill Amount shows the total bill paid by the client for ALL the ads in the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_mediadiary.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why doesn&#039;t my NEOSYS schedule agree with my spreadsheet?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably NEOSYS and your spreadsheet are using different rounding rules &lt;br /&gt;
for the calculation of Net Unit Price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your spreadsheet is calculating the Net Unit Price, for example from &lt;br /&gt;
Gross Unit Price less discount, and NOT ROUNDING IT to a whole number of &lt;br /&gt;
cents before using it in later calculations, then there will be &lt;br /&gt;
differences in some case because NEOSYS rounds any calculated Net Unit &lt;br /&gt;
Price, to cents by default, BEFORE using it in any further calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that spreadsheets may be configured to DISPLAY only two decimal &lt;br /&gt;
places while secretly keeping fractional cents behind the scenes. This &lt;br /&gt;
means that just because you SEE two decimal places in your spreadsheet, &lt;br /&gt;
it doesnt mean that it is using only two decimal places for onward &lt;br /&gt;
calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Neither way can be declared absolutely right or wrong. NEOSYS method has &lt;br /&gt;
the advantage that what you see is what you get, and can be checked with &lt;br /&gt;
a calculator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 60%; height: 100px; text-align: center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|GROSS UNIT PRICE||LESS DISC%||UNROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||ROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||xQTY OF ADS||TOTAL AMOUNT1||TOTAL AMOUNT2||DIFFERENCE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|30.00||7.25||27.825||27.83||10||278.25||278.30||0.05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 1 - Increase the number of decimals in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the standard solution for digital media where unit prices can be &lt;br /&gt;
very small, or even measured in cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the GROSS UNIT PRICE with more than two decimal places. eg 10.0000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS will then calculate, display and use the Net Unit Price with the &lt;br /&gt;
same decimal places. ie with fractional instead of whole cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 2 - Use ROUND() function in Excel===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change your Excel to match NEOSYS. Use the rounding function &lt;br /&gt;
ROUND(CELL,2) to ensure that the net unit price is rounded to a whole &lt;br /&gt;
number of cents before being multiplied by the number of ads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 3 - Direct entry===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Omit all the other columns and enter the amount that you want directly &lt;br /&gt;
into the Net Unit Cost column. Put number of ads 1 ie package deal. Then &lt;br /&gt;
you can get whatever you want in the total amount column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are there discrepancies between Media Diary report and Billing analysis report?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary is based on the date that the ad appeared whereas Billing Analysis is based on the financial period of the posting which is usually the date of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since invoices are usually raised in a different month from the date of appearance of the ad, Media Diary is rarely, if ever, in agreement with Billing Analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from the above, invoices might be left unposted or even deleted before being posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also additional postings might be made to P&amp;amp;L billing accounts and therefore have analysis codes and appear in billings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One possible way to reconcile the two might be to filter the media diary on invoice date. But an ad may have multiple invoices if it is credited or adjusted and these adjustments may be in different months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Final story is that Media Diary gives you an accurate picture of actual advertising by month the ad appeared, whereas Billing analysis gives you an accurate picture of media billing by month of billing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is there a discrepancy between total billing as per Media Diary report and total billings as per list of invoices?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The total billing as per media diary may differ slightly from the total billing as per the list of invoices. This is due to unavoidable rounding differences because percentages calculated per invoice line logically will not always agree to the cent with percentages calculated per invoice totals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get payment status details on media diary reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
The payment details columns are suppressed from the media diary reports by default but will show if you select one or more payment status filter options. If you select &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; then you get all ads (which is the same as if don’t make any selection), but you will get the payment details columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mediadiarypaymentoption.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Margin and Margin(base) in Media Diary export?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary export to Excel/CSV includes columns Margin and Margin (Base) subject to authorisation, but only if you choose both Bill and Cost options for exporting. Note that the default option is to only export Bill information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What can go on a consolidated booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows you put place many periods and many media (vehicles) on a single schedule. It does not however allow multiple brands on one schedule. Despite this, in order to facilitate monthly invoicing, it is common to enter a media schedule (plan) for a single brand for a single month for one or more media vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore in some cases you might wish to combine more than one schedule into a single booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Common examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many brands on one booking order. If a client has many brands then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many media on one booking order. If a supplier has many media then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many periods on one booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any combination of the above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rare examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many clients on one booking order. If the media is special or you have a group of clients that are associated and should be booked as a group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many suppliers on one booking order. It is hard to imagine where this would be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also refer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_booking_order_for_a_vehicle_from_different_schedules_with_multiple_periods.3F|How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_consolidated_booking_order_for_multiple_vehicles.3F|How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I upload a scanned copy of an ad that appeared to the Certificate File?==&lt;br /&gt;
While certifying each ad users can upload the scanned copy of the appeared ad using material option. These images can be later viewed in their respective schedules by selecting the image button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(1)	Click on the materials icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2)	Browser for the scanned image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(3)	Upload the image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:cert1.jpg‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Broadcast Orders/Play Lists?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Broadcast Order on the Schedules menu. This will come better once the proper tv bookings per break data entry is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter Loading such that a portion of it is not shown to the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;|&amp;quot; can be used as a separator for Loading details that need not be shown to the client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media Schedules, when a Loading is entered containing &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;, only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; is reflected in Schedule Printouts and Invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the ENTIRE Loading details (BOTH before and after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;) is reflected in Booking Orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, in Plans, Media Plans show only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;. But Cost Plans will show ONLY the portion after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; (not BOTH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loading.jpg|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to compare budgets per media type in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by media type can easily be done by creating a dummy vehicle per media type, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by media type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy vehicle called Newspaper Budget was created which is linked to the media type Newspapers. The budget meant for media type Newspapers was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per type shows budget vs actual figures for media type Newspapers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy vehicle.jpg |600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mt budgetfile.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis mt.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to set budgets per client (instead of brand) to compare budgets in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by client (instead of brand) can be done by creating a dummy brand per client, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy brand called Al Nabooda Budget was created under the client Al Nabooda Automobile. The budget meant for the client Al Nabooda Automobile was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per client shows budget vs actual figures for the client Al Nabooda Automobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy brand.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Budget file per client.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis per client.jpg  |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter a discount on total net as an amount and not percentage?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schedule files, discount on the total net bill amount is given by entering a discount % in the Agency Discount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of percentage discount, users may want this discount to be shown as an amount. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A discount can be entered directly as a negative amount in the vehicle line following the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a vehicle file &amp;quot;DISC&amp;quot; (Discounts).&lt;br /&gt;
#Use this vehicle in the schedule and enter a negative amount under one of the columns (e.g. Disc/Load/Others) in the vehicle line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; somewhere in the schedule, as mentioned in [[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_save_a_schedule_file_with_negative_net_unit_amount_in_a_vehicle_line.3F|Saving a schedule file with negative net unit amount]] .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter general discount for all the clients for a Vehicle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A general discount can be set for all the Clients in the Vehicle rate card file under Client specific rates. Keep the client code field blank and enter the discount. This discount rate will automatically appear for all the Clients for this vehicle. In case there is already an entry with a specific client code, then for that client the discount entered against its code will be picked and for every other client discount in the blank line will be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vr file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_when_there_is_no_difference_between_bill_and_cost| How to handle operations where there is no difference between bill and cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_to_restrict_users_from_seeing_media_billing_information|How to hide media billing information from certain departments?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisations_for_a_client_with_separate_planning.2C_booking_and_invoicing_teams_who_bill_at_cost|How to set up authorisations for a client with separate planning, booking and invoicing teams who bill at cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Accessing large reports via emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
When getting reports delivered by email, if the report size is more than 10Mb then, instead of the report being embedded in or attached to the email, the email will contain a web browser link to the file instead of the file itself. This gets around restrictions on email size commonly imposed by email servers. This applies to reports which are either embedded within the email body or attached files. NOTE: The link is only valid for one hour after the email is sent so users must download the report before then.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7327</id>
		<title>Media FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Media_FAQ&amp;diff=7327"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T06:33:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* How do I save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in a vehicle line? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How do I get subtotals on a Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to get subtotals at least one or more options in the Order field has to be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediadiaryfaq.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to show cost tax amount in Media Diary?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please read [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Report_on_Cost_VAT_Tax | Report on Cost VAT Tax]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is a despatch status?==&lt;br /&gt;
Despatch status can be the fax number, address, e-mail, date, representative name, etc or any other information regarding the despatch of a booking order or invoice generated from NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch status of the booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch status can be viewed in the ‘despatch record’ column when generating a list of the booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Viewingdespatchstatus.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch status of existing booking orders?===&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old order from Media &amp;gt; Booking Orders &amp;gt; Old Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Updatedespatchorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
The despatch date shows on the clients statement of account in the finance module. Before generating the client account statement select Despatch date in Options on the Statement of account page, this adds a Date Sent column in the client account statement which shows the despatch date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Despatchdatestatement.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I enter or update the despatch date of existing invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter/update the order despatch status in the New Despatch Status field when reprinting the old Media Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Old med inv.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I save an invoice proforma in NEOSYS?===&lt;br /&gt;
When generating an invoice, select Save Proforma on the invoice formatting page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediainvoiceproforma.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I view saved invoice proformas?===&lt;br /&gt;
To view saved invoice proformas go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas and enter the proformas invoice number in the Invoice No. field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Invoiceproformas.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I add or amend client order number when reprinting invoices?===&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, go to Media &amp;gt; Invoices &amp;gt; Old Invoices/ Proformas to view the Old Media Invoices page as shown in [[Media_FAQ#Where_can_I_view_saved_invoice_proformas.3F|&amp;quot;Where can I view saved invoice proformas&amp;quot;]]. Enter the invoice number in the Invoice No. field and the new client order number in the Client Order No. field, then click Reprint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be useful when the order number is not known at the time of invoicing e.g when invoicing early or when the client changes their mind. It saves having to manually amend the invoice text before submission to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The client order number on the schedule is also updated, but only if it is both present and matches the order number being amended on the invoice. This is to avoid confusion in the rare case when issuing multiple invoices with different client order numbers from the same schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I cancel/credit note an invoice?===&lt;br /&gt;
New Method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click invoice on the schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Credit note option.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the credit note in journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OLD Method:&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an Invoice in media you need to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove the ad dates from the date grid in schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the INVOICE button at the top of the dates column (you will be asked to update the version number (say no) and save the schedule (say yes)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the invoice creation screen don’t chose any options (except maybe enter the invoice date) and click &amp;quot;Proforma&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the Proforma is all OK then click Invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#Don’t forget to post the invoice journals created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to invoice a specific range of ads in a schedule spanning over many months?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to do this, certify the ads in the date range you want to invoice and then, invoice using the option &amp;quot;Certified Ads Only&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to certification screen by clicking the &#039;Certify&#039; button in the schedule file or Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Certificates &amp;gt; Certificate/Voucher File.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Date Range and Schedule No and click &#039;Update All&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter [[Media_Types_File#Certification | Certification No]] and click OK. A popup will inform you of how many ads were certified.&lt;br /&gt;
#Return to the schedule file, click &#039;Invoice&#039; button and under the option title &amp;quot;Certified/All&amp;quot; choose the option &amp;quot;Certified ads only&amp;quot; and invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to do partial invoicing in a schedule?===&lt;br /&gt;
Summary of the procedure for 50% partial invoicing:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#After the schedule has been booked, add &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; under the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column for all vehicle lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot; from all vehicle lines&lt;br /&gt;
#Invoice the schedule again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can get tedious in case of schedules with too many lines, but you will save time using the keyboard shortcuts mentioned in the detailed steps below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the first vehicle line, under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; column enter -50% (don&#039;t press enter or any key yet)&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the keyboard down arrow key&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; key when you get the popup &amp;quot;Do you want the changes to be rebooked?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard shortcut Alt + y (to copy the -50% from previous line)&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 till all lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice (this gives you the first 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first vehicle&#039;s &amp;quot;-50%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Press keyboard &amp;quot;Del&amp;quot; key and then down arrow key. Repeat this till no lines have -50% under &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Issue invoice again (this will give you the remaining 50% invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I cancel a booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To cancel an issued booking order you can remove the appearance dates from the Dates calendar in the media schedule and click on Book to generate a media booking cancellation for the ads that have been removed from the Dates calendar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Bookingordercancel.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I suppress free ads on the booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
On the New booking order page you can select the Suppress Free option in order to not show the free ads on the booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Suppressfreeads.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may be possible that for some reason the number of ads that you have charged the client for are more than the number of ads you actually booked with the vehicle supplier. NEOSYS allows you to enter this information in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For eg, you bill the client for 500 radio spots and place an order for only 400 actually. Now the agency can enter the number of ads as 500 in the schedule, 100 of which can be selected as &#039;free to agency&#039; ads. If you do not want these &#039;free to agency&#039; ads to show in the booking order you can select Suppress free ads when generating the order to prevent them from showing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to do free ads for digital media?==&lt;br /&gt;
To enter Free Ads, we can put the Ads on a separate line and type a word like &amp;quot;FREE&amp;quot; in the discount column so that the net unit price of that line is zero, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Free_Ads_Digital_Media.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I assess the value of free ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
The Net amount for free ads is zero and same appears in all media diary reports. The gross amount also appears as blank because the gross columns in the media diary report are for paid ads where gross price is the unit price multiplied by the total number of ads. The ads with net unit price zero are considered free ads and not paid, so gross price for them appears as blank in the gross bill/cost columns. Hence it becomes difficult to assess the value of free ads, as gross is blank and net value is zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following reports to evaluate free ads:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In Media Diary reports, look for Gross cost/bill in the Net Free cost/bill columns.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Summary of Paid and Free Ads&amp;quot; report shows the gross bill for the free ads in schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#How_do_I_issue_a_credit_note_for_part_of_a_schedule.3F How do I issue a credit note for specific ads?]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Schedule_file#Version_section|What is a version?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I view historical changes made to a database record?==&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a database record in NEOSYS is updated or modified; the system creates a new version of it and saves the record creating a trail of all previously edited versions linked to the most updated one. Whenever a database record is opened for viewing, the user will get a complete list of history of edits done on the record along with a link to each version. This will help the user to pull out historic edits on any single record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to split large schedules?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There could be scenarios where the schedule created is too large to save or too big to be handled by NEOSYS. This could be because there are too many spots across too many dates or the vehicle used does not support bulk ads. To address such issues schedules can be split into smaller schedules. To do so&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the schedule in question to a new schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the new schedule, remove the past ads that are already booked and invoiced in the older schedule. Only retain ads for future dates and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the old schedule, remove future ads that are now present in the newly copied schedule and save the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get subtotals on a schedule/plan printout?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the subtotals to appear on the printout the schedule/plan lines have to be separated by a blank line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The schedule printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The invoice printout will appear as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Subtotalsprintout3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I insert new rows in the schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
Schedule lines can be added or removed conveniently by clicking on the &#039;+&#039; and &#039;-&#039; icons respectively. You can also do so by clicking on the Vehicle code field and press &#039;ctrl+n&#039; (to add a line above the selected field) or the &#039;down arrow&#039; key (to add a line below the selected field). When inserting a schedule row NEOSYS gives us various options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Mediascheduleinsertline.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in a vehicle line?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you try to save a schedule file with negative net unit amount in any vehicle line, you will face the below error message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 NET UNIT AMOUNT CANNOT BE NEGATIVE, WITHOUT COMMENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This message is deliberately vague and not a plain statement because entering negative amounts will cause variety of issues such as negative income, negative figures in some billing analysis reports and possibly even breaking VAT regulations over reporting of discounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, the total number of ads for the client in use will increase along with Media diary report displaying negative figures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However as long as the Finance team is aware of these possible issues, NEOSYS allows users to enter a negative Net Amount in the vehicle line, IF the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; is entered somewhere in the schedule. You can sneak it into any field in the schedule file, such as Private comments, so it doesn&#039;t show to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend doing this in TEST database first, to check how the Media and Finance reports display the ads and their amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why am I not able to enter a negative amount in the vehicle line? ===&lt;br /&gt;
A negative amount cannot be directly entered in the Gross Unit Amount field since NEOSYS does not allow you to enter any amount less than &#039;0&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Negative amt.png|frameless|223x223px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple methods of entering negative amounts in the vehicle line, which depend on how you want the Media Diary report and Finance to display or record these amounts. Some examples are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-100AED&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter &#039;50AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;-200%&#039; in any field, for example &#039;Discount&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter &#039;0AED&#039; Gross amount and &#039;50&#039; in &#039;Loading&#039; and &#039;-200%&#039; in &#039;Discount&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to restrict the days on which ads can be placed==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are four ways to restrict this. In order of precedence,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Days field. (Values: Numbers 1-7) See Market file to check what number correlates to which day of the week.&lt;br /&gt;
#Program/Position field. (Keywords: FRIDAY/ friday/ FRI/ fri) For single day use &amp;quot;Mon&amp;quot;, ranges use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed&amp;quot;, ranges &amp;amp; single day use &amp;quot;Mon-Wed Sat&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
#Specification field. (Keywords: Same as point 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Vehicle file (Refer [[Vehicle_File#Day_of_Week|Day of week]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Adrestrict.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods?==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the multiple period schedule numbers are entered in the Schedule Code/No field by inserting extra lines select the vehicle you wish to book (will show automatically if only one vehicle in the schedule) and select the One combined order option. This would generate one single order for all the schedules even if they belong to separate periods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Multiperiodbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue separate booking orders for each vehicle in a schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
As the schedule number appears on the Schedule Code/No field the system will ask you which vehicles you wish to book considering the schedule has multiple vehicles. The system would generate an independent booking order for each of the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE - even if one or more vehicles have the same supplier there will be a separate booking order for each vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Massbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to send out one consolidated booking order comprising multiple schedules, vehicle and suppliers to an associate agency. Once you have entered the multiple schedule numbers and selected the required vehicle/vehicles select the One combined order option, this option would issue one consolidated booking order for all the vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Consolidateorder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I issue Amendment Booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order with multiple vehicles?==&lt;br /&gt;
For issuing amendment booking order for a consolidated/combined booking order, all vehicle lines of all schedules which are a part of the consolidated/combined booking order need to be amended. Follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For schedules that do not require any change, enter a dot on the vehicle line (which appeared in the combined booking order), eg. in the &amp;quot;Loading&amp;quot; field and save the schedule. Then remove the dot and resave the schedule. A message to rebook this line will appear, to which you MUST select Yes.&lt;br /&gt;
#For the schedule&#039;s vehicle line where an actual change is required, make the amendment and then select the &amp;quot;Book&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add all the schedules and the vehicle code in new booking page, select the &amp;quot;One combined order&amp;quot; option and select any Amendment Order Style as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that you check the Preview/Draft before clicking Book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I book one media vehicle through different suppliers?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is not uncommon and perfectly normal to book a particular media/vehicle through different suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS you have to create a new vehicle file record with a different vehicle code but with similar details and linked to the alternative supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using the correct vehicle code for any particular schedule and booking, all the various operational and management reports can distinguish between the two operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to merge the two vehicles on management reports then mark the second and subsequent media vehicle records &amp;quot;analyse as&amp;quot; field to be the original vehicle code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get billing analysis both by supplier and in total for the vehicle, ensure that the vehicle name is spelt and punctuated ABSOLUTELY IDENTICAL on all Vehicle File records for the same vehicle on all suppliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you order the report simply by vehicle, the reporting program will merge the billings into one line where the names are identical. If you want to see the billings of the vehicle per supplier use order 1. by vehicle 2. by supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to modify / add terms to Media Booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
To amend or to add the standard notes/terms at the bottom of booking orders, go to Media --&amp;gt; Files --&amp;gt; Media Type File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The booking order notes are different for each media type - Magazines, Radio etc. so you must select the type of media that you want to change and do them all one by one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Open and select a media type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the desire booking notes. There may be separate sections for English and other languages so you should consider changing the language in all sections. Each language sections starts something like %SPANISH% etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media type file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What tax % is used when using the &amp;quot;Add Standard Tax&amp;quot; on the booking order creation?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system first checks the &amp;quot;Invoice tax code&amp;quot; field  in the Media Configuration File for the rate%. Otherwise if no tax code is entered then the system uses first tax code in the Tax Rate File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system does not use the tax/VAT code from the schedule, because that is the tax/VAT rate to the client which could, at least in principle, be zero or something else, and be different from the tax/VAT rate charged by the supplier to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I create a Transmission Certificate/Airing Certificate?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For all ads on one schedule, you can print the schedule in the style of a “Certificate” [[File:mediascheduleprint.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To filter certified ads by more specific criteria, select the Certified filter in the media diary, including the other filters you require. Remember to re-title the media diary report however you like eg “Transmission Certificate”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MediaDiaryTransCertFilter.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How are ads certified automatically?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Automatic_certification_by_importing_Ad_monitoring_data Automatic certification by importing Ad monitoring data]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter multilevel clients and brands in the Client and Brand File?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see how multilevel clients can be entered, refer [[Agency_FAQ#How_do_I_classify_clients_based_on_industry_or_parent_company.3F|How do I classify clients based on industry or parent company?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multilevel brands are represented by indenting the brand names. The number of spaces in indenting signifies the level of a particular brand. Enter the brands in the Client and Brand File as shown in the example below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example Level 1 brands are Mondelez International and Nestle. Notice the red highlight which indicates that Level 2 brand names Kraft, Cadbury, Wonka and L&#039;oreal are indented by 1 space and the Level 3 brands like Capri Sun, Twirl, Nerds etc. are indented by 2 spaces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sub-brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While searching for brands under the client, the list will show multilevel brands as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Brandsselect.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I stop a specific brand within Client and Brand file?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can stop usage of brands on documents by putting the tag &amp;lt;STOP&amp;gt; in the brand name under the client and brand file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Brands.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After doing so,user will get the following message if he selects this brand:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stop error.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I use different client names for media and for billing purposes?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A standard issue faced by all agencies is that sometimes they have to act as a third-party between another agency (A) and that agency&#039;s client (C), i.e. they receive instructions from and have to bill A for ads that belong to C. Here the booking order will show client name C and invoice will be issued to Agency A.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, in the Client and Brand file for agency &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;, put &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; at the beginning of the brand name with a colon between &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the brand name. So name of the brand will be &amp;quot;C:brandname&amp;quot;. Then the booking order will display client name as &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; and the invoice will be issued to &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example shown below, the agency acts as a third-party agency by billing &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; for ads that belong to the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot;. To do this, in the &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; Client and Brand file, brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is created with name &amp;quot;KIA:Cerato&amp;quot;, where KIA is the client that owns the brand &amp;quot;Cerato&amp;quot;. So when brand &amp;quot;CERA&amp;quot; is used in a schedule, when issuing a Booking Order it shows the final client &amp;quot;KIA&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot;. But when issuing an invoice, it will be issued to the agency &amp;quot;XYZ Agency&amp;quot; as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CandB File.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Booking Order.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Invoice.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the numeric value that is accepted in week plan ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter number of ads by week separated by slashes (e.g. &amp;quot;1/2//4&amp;quot; mean 1 ad in the 1st week, 2 in the 2nd and 4 in the 4th week. For weeks that cross two months, put something like &amp;quot;2+3&amp;quot; to indicate ads per month)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:weekplan.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I handle &amp;quot;Allow Over Plan&amp;quot; error?==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Error:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  “Cannot save “REF###” because:&lt;br /&gt;
   YTD Planned Amount Exceeded (XXX)”&lt;br /&gt;
   If authorized, you may check the “Allow Over Plan” checkbox in the schedule heading”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Explanation:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens when the planned amount (in the media plan) for the brand and client is more less then the scheduled ie the schedule is in excess of the plan for that period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Solution:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
This is just a warning and you can avoid this message by clicking on allow over budget next to the company code section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I avoid getting 0 (zero) invoices to clients when amending cost to supplier after invoicing the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
After invoicing a schedule, if you change any cost information (leaving the bill information intact) and issue a cost invoice (to create the relevant journal entries), the system will also issue a 0 (zero) invoice to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These zero invoices cannot be avoided and help to track any audit trail information. Either way the zero items do not appear on the outstanding statement so it shouldn&#039;t be a problem at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(SB to please add more)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to setup and operate the List of Materials Pending Delivery reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Pending_Materials|Refer here to set up the List of materials pending]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways to get off from the list of pending list&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Materials file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Material &amp;gt; Materials File. To get the Material details on the screen enter the material code on the material number field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Material code can be seen on the List of material pending delivery on the Original Schedule Column.&lt;br /&gt;
#To get the material off from the pending list, enter the material code or enter anything in the material code field to indicate the delivery and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===From the Schedule===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The material code can also be entered in the materials section on the bottom of the schedule file without going to the Material File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; When Materials from one schedule are reused on other schedules, then, to avoid duplicate materials records being generated in the material file by the secondary schedule, the original schedule no and material letter should be entered in the secondary schedule&#039;s material section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered?==&lt;br /&gt;
All the currency on the cost line is taken from the vehicle file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the steps to change the currency on the cost line if wrongly entered&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the vehicle file and change the currency you want to show on the cost line in the schedule and save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now go to the schedule and re-type the details in a new line and delete wrongly entered line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to view a weekly summary of scheduled ads for a brand?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media schedules can consolidated and printed in the format of media plans by printing an empty dummy media plan (one with no lines). After creating such a empty dummy plan, printing it results in the plan printout being dynamically &amp;quot;reverse engineered&amp;quot; on the fly from whatever approved media schedules are currently in the system for the same brand and period as the empty plan. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plan printout currency is always base currency currently regardless of whatever currency you put on the dummy plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Steps:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create an EMPTY plan for the desired period and brand that you want.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039; - You only need do this once)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createemtpyplan.jpg|center|frame|How to create empty plan]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Media &amp;gt; Plans &amp;gt; Plan File and click &amp;quot;Print/Send&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:menumediaplanplanprintout.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Type: Weekly (Select time and details columns if you want them)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[file:createdetailedsummaryrpt.jpg|center|frame|How to generate detailed summary report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Print/Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display language, frequency and circulation for a vehicle ?==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently there are two ways for displaying this information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle notes &lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information into the VEHICLE FILE NOTES field which it great if you use the same vehicle on many schedule lines. Notes at the bottom of the schedule work best in this scenario.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Eg: A schedule with 20 lines but only 5 vehicles .. the information is best places as three lines of notes in the footing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Alternatively you can add the information at the vehicle name in abbreviated fashion. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclenotes.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Using vehicle names&lt;br /&gt;
#*Adding the information to the name means that the information shows wherever the name shows which ends up pretty good eg on billing analysis report too. It allows any type of information to be shown without adding lots of custom columns which vary tremendously per media type, client and market.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:vehiclename.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Circulation is the number of paid subscribers that magazines and newspapers have. Broadcast media such as television and radio do not use the term circulation, instead they measure their audiences in terms of viewers and listeners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to display artwork / creative / misc charges in a schedule to a client?==&lt;br /&gt;
Full service agencies generally tend to provide clients with a single media schedule outlining the media vehicles proposed along with artwork, creative, misc charges related to this specific campaign. Other NEOSYS clients would create a media schedule separately and issue a job estimate for the artwork charges. This article will explain how to incorporate the media vehicles and artwork/other charges in a single schedule printout for client approval.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 1===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is suitable if we want to enter additional charges on a per ad basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such charges can be entered in the &amp;quot;Other&amp;quot; charges column on the media schedule data entry screen. If there are multiple charges, these could be entered separated with a forward slash. You can also enter text to indicate the type of charge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ProductionChargeinSch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 2===&lt;br /&gt;
This method is applicable if we have multiple ads/vehicles and want to show additional charges as a single amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use the following method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a dummy vehicle called ARTWORK with an internal (dummy) supplier&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new line in the schedule using dummy artwork vehicle&lt;br /&gt;
#Select any date and assign 1 ad to it so that the number of ads is 1 for this vehicle&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkanydate.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter gross unit cost in the bill column.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Do not enter anything in the cost column&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicle.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A printout of the above schedule will look like as follows:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:artworkvehicleschdprint.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Suppressing day and date of vehicle program from appearing on schedule printout and invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not wish to display the day and date on this schedule or on the invoice you can refer to the following procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In Schedule File&lt;br /&gt;
#*Leave the dates blank&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter the Number of Ads directly &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:leavedatesblankschedule.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While printing the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Print/Send &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:deselectcheckno.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While generating the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select All Ads under Certified/All&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select List option under Date Format&lt;br /&gt;
#*Deselect “Check Numbers” option&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click on Create Invoice &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:invoicechecknumber.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not view the booking order for an ad which is moved to a different date?==&lt;br /&gt;
While moving an ad to a different date, we first remove the existing ad from the date on which is scheduled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this process, all information related to the ad is lost i.e. booking order no. /certificates / supplier invoice no. / invoice no. etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens irrespective of whether the schedule is saved or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a specific example below, we can notice this happening when we try to enter the supplier invoice number for an ad which has been moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#We schedule an ad for the 25th of a May &amp;amp; Book it &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-1.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move the ad to 30th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#We move it back to the 25th of May &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-3.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#While trying to enter the supplier invoice number for that ad, we now notice that although the Schedule file shows a booking order no. the Supplier invoice file does not reflect the same. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:supp-4.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to mark/flag special ads in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flags can be used for a variety of purposes, for example to indicate which ads are subject to special deals with the client or supplier and get related reports. Such reports could aid in the calculation of volume rebates for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available flags are currently SINGLE letters from A-Z without any specific meaning so as to provide maximum flexibility. You could standardise on using the flag &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; to indicate ads that form part of sponsorship deals for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the schedule file has any tax code entered, then the flag &amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; is used when user does not want the cost tax to be shown in the Media Diary report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple flags can be entered per plan or schedule line and apply to all ads on that line. For example flags Q, B and C can be entered in any order as QBC or CBQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In future, financial journals may be generated depending on flags entered, for example invoices for ads subject to volume rebates could post a percentage to Provision for Rebate A/cs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to certify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS when an ad is certified it means the ad has appeared.  It is just a way to differentiate between the ads that have appeared from the ones that have not yet appeared.  When we click on ‘certify’ the number of ads with details would appear and we can use a number or a letter (eg X,12) below the Certificate/ Voucher no. to signify that the ad is certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; - in case of magazines and newspapers most agencies use the page number on which the ad has appeared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:certify.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we can see above in the image the letter &#039;x&#039; is used as the certificate number. Certification can be done per ad and we also have the option of issuing the invoice directly after certifying the ad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details on how to certify ads, refer to: [[Certificates/_Voucher_file#Certifying_Ads | Certifying Ads]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to uncertify ads?==&lt;br /&gt;
To uncertify ads you need to select the certificate file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Goto Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Certificates -&amp;gt; Certificate / Voucher File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the schedule number&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select Yes for certified&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select search all &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-2.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#A list with all the certified ads on that schedule is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#*You can remove the details entered in field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select certify, this will uncertify the ad on the schedule.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:uncertify-3.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are Certified Ads displayed as Uncertified in Media Progress Summary?==&lt;br /&gt;
====Causes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an Ad is certified as Wrong Ad. For further information see   [[Using NEOSYS Media System#Processing List of Wrong Ads | Processing List of Wrong Ads]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Numbers like &#039;000000&#039; or &#039;0&#039; are entered as Certificate/Voucher No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In both the above cases the Ads are certified as Wrong and hence don&#039;t appear in the Media Progress Summary. This issue comes up only in media progress summary. In all other Media Diary Reports the Wrong Ads do not show up as uncertified Ads.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:Adwrong.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MPSum.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:MediaDiary1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to stop the Client Name from being displayed on the Booking Orders?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can be configured, to NOT show the client name on the booking orders, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the supplier is marked with &amp;quot;Show Client on Orders: YES&amp;quot; in the Supplier File then the client name will always be shown on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise the client will be HIDDEN from orders if in the Client File for the client in question, any of the following is true. If none of the following is true, then the client name will show on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as Sundry Client (ie one-off bookings where the actual one-off client name is entered in the Brand Name)&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client is marked as &amp;quot;AGENCY&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*HIDDEN: if the client type is not marked &amp;quot;DIRECT&amp;quot; AND the main Media Configuration File says &amp;quot;Show Client Name on Orders: NO&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the Media Configuration File &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-client-no.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The option to show Client Name on Orders should be set to &amp;quot;NO&amp;quot; in the supplier file &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-supp.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The client should be marked as AGENCY in stead of direct in the Client &amp;amp; Brand File. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:bo-direct.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle &amp;quot;No Response from the database server in 600 seconds&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:nr.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If NEOSYS cannot generate the report within 10 minutes (600 seconds) then you will get an error message saying &amp;quot;No response in 600 seconds from the database server at .....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media module, Media Diary reports that take more than 10 minutes can be sent to the user in the email body or as an email attachment. To receive reports in this way, choose Email Body or Email Attach under Report Delivery options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At times, the report might be too huge that even if you select Email Attachment option, the user with get an email saying &amp;quot;Error in sendmail.js&amp;quot; instead of getting the report.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, it is better to use the option Email Body because if report is too large, then user will get an email with a link that they can click on to get the report. Also see [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_email_not_received#Check_the_size_of_the_mail_being_sent_to_client.27s_email_account this article for other reasons why email is not received]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:eb.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/General_FAQ#Why_is_NEOSYS_taking_a_long_time_to_generate_a_report.3F Why is NEOSYS taking a long time to generate a report]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Media Diary Report showing unexpected results?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Diary report is unreliable if it is generated while users are updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives wrong details for schedules that were not updated during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
#Media diary gives 3 different reports for the same options entered in a time frame of 30 to 60 minutes without running the command [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Run_CREATEADS| CREATEADS] performed only by NEOSYS Support.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Possible Cause===&lt;br /&gt;
This issue occurs because there were interrelated files that were being saved during the time the report was requested for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While generating the media diary, NEOSYS searches for various combinations like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Vehicle &amp;amp; Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Brand &amp;amp; Date etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user updates the system, various inter-related files are frozen and the data related to those files will not appear in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
While we are working on a fix for this issue in NEOSYS, a workaround to get reliable and accurate reports is to generate a report from the test dataset.&lt;br /&gt;
The test dataset is a copy of the live data from the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
This report will not have real time data but will be more reliable as the chances of users updating the test dataset are very low.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If users insist that they want reports in real time then they should accept that the reports will be unreliable as NEOSYS cannot freeze many user windows for some users to take real time reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more data is updated into the system then the old report needs to be discarded and new report needs to be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus NEOSYS recommends that media diary reports should be generated when users are not updating the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on Troubleshooting Media Diary reports see [[Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Details_missing_in_Media_Diary_or_Changes_in_Files_does_not_reflect_in_Media_Diary| Details Missing in Media Diary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Media_System#Ads_are_missing_from_media_diary_reports_when_filtering_using_schedule_client_or_brand_although_ads_are_actually_present_in_the_schedule Why are Ads missing from media diary reports when filtering using schedule client or brand although ads are actually present in the schedule]==&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the invoice/ booking order showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule contains ads only for October 1 and 10?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediainvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
The reason why the booking order / invoice is showing dates like April 2013 even though the schedule only contains ads for Oct 1, 2012 and Oct 10, 2012 is because NEOSYS is showing dates FROM – UPTO (see the dash?) as is a common requirement for Outdoor Media. This is caused because of entering data like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification field for media type Outdoor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
Don’t put anything like “xxxxxx,999 xxxx” in the specification for media type “outdoor/out of home” unless you want to indicate a NUMBER OF DAYS OR NUMBER OF WEEKS, NUMBER OF MONTHS ETC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, use a dash instead of a comma … “xxxxxx - 999 xxxx”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperschedule.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:outdoormediaproperinvoice.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Gross Amount field picking up the amount before the comma in the Specification field?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numeric specification in the ratecard is used as the gross unit rate for some rate card setups by clients. For example, &amp;quot;500, Sun-Thurs&amp;quot;, which takes 500 as the Gross unit amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Problem Explained===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The comma identifies the amount before it as the Gross unit amount so, entering text like &amp;quot;500,000 Impressions&amp;quot; will put 500 in the Gross Amount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGros2.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of a comma, put a space or single quote, so that it reads 500 000 or 500&#039;000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SpecGross.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the total number of ads shown in schedule not matching with the ads with dates in schedule?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_dates.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This happens only when the user manually changes the No of Ads in the schedule. In such situations, while trying to save the schedule, the system prompts the user with the following warning message. The schedule can be saved only if the user saves the schedule despite the warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_save.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also while trying to invoice such a schedule, the system again prompts the user to correct the schedule date or skip checking numbers. Only if the user manually changes the option to Check Numbers:No, the invoice can be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_invoicing.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the media diary of such schedules, every row represents one of the ads that have a date. However the total of Paid Ads Bill shows the total number of ads that have been paid for (this includes the ads without dates). Similarly, the total of Bill Amount shows the total bill paid by the client for ALL the ads in the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:noa_mediadiary.jpg|1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why doesn&#039;t my NEOSYS schedule agree with my spreadsheet?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably NEOSYS and your spreadsheet are using different rounding rules &lt;br /&gt;
for the calculation of Net Unit Price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your spreadsheet is calculating the Net Unit Price, for example from &lt;br /&gt;
Gross Unit Price less discount, and NOT ROUNDING IT to a whole number of &lt;br /&gt;
cents before using it in later calculations, then there will be &lt;br /&gt;
differences in some case because NEOSYS rounds any calculated Net Unit &lt;br /&gt;
Price, to cents by default, BEFORE using it in any further calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that spreadsheets may be configured to DISPLAY only two decimal &lt;br /&gt;
places while secretly keeping fractional cents behind the scenes. This &lt;br /&gt;
means that just because you SEE two decimal places in your spreadsheet, &lt;br /&gt;
it doesnt mean that it is using only two decimal places for onward &lt;br /&gt;
calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Neither way can be declared absolutely right or wrong. NEOSYS method has &lt;br /&gt;
the advantage that what you see is what you get, and can be checked with &lt;br /&gt;
a calculator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width: 60%; height: 100px; text-align: center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|GROSS UNIT PRICE||LESS DISC%||UNROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||ROUNDED NET UNIT PRICE1||xQTY OF ADS||TOTAL AMOUNT1||TOTAL AMOUNT2||DIFFERENCE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|30.00||7.25||27.825||27.83||10||278.25||278.30||0.05&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 1 - Increase the number of decimals in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the standard solution for digital media where unit prices can be &lt;br /&gt;
very small, or even measured in cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the GROSS UNIT PRICE with more than two decimal places. eg 10.0000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS will then calculate, display and use the Net Unit Price with the &lt;br /&gt;
same decimal places. ie with fractional instead of whole cents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 2 - Use ROUND() function in Excel===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change your Excel to match NEOSYS. Use the rounding function &lt;br /&gt;
ROUND(CELL,2) to ensure that the net unit price is rounded to a whole &lt;br /&gt;
number of cents before being multiplied by the number of ads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution 3 - Direct entry===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Omit all the other columns and enter the amount that you want directly &lt;br /&gt;
into the Net Unit Cost column. Put number of ads 1 ie package deal. Then &lt;br /&gt;
you can get whatever you want in the total amount column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are there discrepancies between Media Diary report and Billing analysis report?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary is based on the date that the ad appeared whereas Billing Analysis is based on the financial period of the posting which is usually the date of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since invoices are usually raised in a different month from the date of appearance of the ad, Media Diary is rarely, if ever, in agreement with Billing Analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from the above, invoices might be left unposted or even deleted before being posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also additional postings might be made to P&amp;amp;L billing accounts and therefore have analysis codes and appear in billings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One possible way to reconcile the two might be to filter the media diary on invoice date. But an ad may have multiple invoices if it is credited or adjusted and these adjustments may be in different months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Final story is that Media Diary gives you an accurate picture of actual advertising by month the ad appeared, whereas Billing analysis gives you an accurate picture of media billing by month of billing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is there a discrepancy between total billing as per Media Diary report and total billings as per list of invoices?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The total billing as per media diary may differ slightly from the total billing as per the list of invoices. This is due to unavoidable rounding differences because percentages calculated per invoice line logically will not always agree to the cent with percentages calculated per invoice totals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get payment status details on media diary reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
The payment details columns are suppressed from the media diary reports by default but will show if you select one or more payment status filter options. If you select &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; then you get all ads (which is the same as if don’t make any selection), but you will get the payment details columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mediadiarypaymentoption.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Margin and Margin(base) in Media Diary export?==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Diary export to Excel/CSV includes columns Margin and Margin (Base) subject to authorisation, but only if you choose both Bill and Cost options for exporting. Note that the default option is to only export Bill information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What can go on a consolidated booking order?==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows you put place many periods and many media (vehicles) on a single schedule. It does not however allow multiple brands on one schedule. Despite this, in order to facilitate monthly invoicing, it is common to enter a media schedule (plan) for a single brand for a single month for one or more media vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore in some cases you might wish to combine more than one schedule into a single booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Common examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many brands on one booking order. If a client has many brands then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many media on one booking order. If a supplier has many media then you might wish to book all at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many periods on one booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any combination of the above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rare examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many clients on one booking order. If the media is special or you have a group of clients that are associated and should be booked as a group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could book many suppliers on one booking order. It is hard to imagine where this would be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also refer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_booking_order_for_a_vehicle_from_different_schedules_with_multiple_periods.3F|How do I issue one booking order for a vehicle from different schedules with multiple periods]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_issue_one_consolidated_booking_order_for_multiple_vehicles.3F|How do I issue one consolidated booking order for multiple vehicles?]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I upload a scanned copy of an ad that appeared to the Certificate File?==&lt;br /&gt;
While certifying each ad users can upload the scanned copy of the appeared ad using material option. These images can be later viewed in their respective schedules by selecting the image button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(1)	Click on the materials icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2)	Browser for the scanned image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(3)	Upload the image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:cert1.jpg‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to get Broadcast Orders/Play Lists?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Broadcast Order on the Schedules menu. This will come better once the proper tv bookings per break data entry is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter Loading such that a portion of it is not shown to the client?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;|&amp;quot; can be used as a separator for Loading details that need not be shown to the client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Media Schedules, when a Loading is entered containing &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;, only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; is reflected in Schedule Printouts and Invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the ENTIRE Loading details (BOTH before and after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;) is reflected in Booking Orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, in Plans, Media Plans show only the portion BEFORE the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot;. But Cost Plans will show ONLY the portion after the &amp;quot;|&amp;quot; (not BOTH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loading.jpg|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to compare budgets per media type in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by media type can easily be done by creating a dummy vehicle per media type, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by media type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy vehicle called Newspaper Budget was created which is linked to the media type Newspapers. The budget meant for media type Newspapers was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per type shows budget vs actual figures for media type Newspapers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy vehicle.jpg |600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mt budgetfile.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis mt.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to set budgets per client (instead of brand) to compare budgets in billing analysis reports?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Budgeting by client (instead of brand) can be done by creating a dummy brand per client, entering the budget on that and then taking the billing analysis report by client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the below example, a dummy brand called Al Nabooda Budget was created under the client Al Nabooda Automobile. The budget meant for the client Al Nabooda Automobile was entered against this dummy vehicle in the Budget File. The resulting billing analysis report per client shows budget vs actual figures for the client Al Nabooda Automobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dummy brand.jpg |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Budget file per client.jpg |1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billing analysis per client.jpg  |1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter a discount on total net as an amount and not percentage?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schedule files, discount on the total net bill amount is given by entering a discount % in the Agency Discount field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of percentage discount, users may want this discount to be shown as an amount. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A discount can be entered directly as a negative amount in the vehicle line following the below steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a vehicle file &amp;quot;DISC&amp;quot; (Discounts).&lt;br /&gt;
#Use this vehicle in the schedule and enter a negative amount under one of the columns (e.g. Disc/Load/Others) in the vehicle line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the word &amp;quot;NEGATIVE&amp;quot; somewhere in the schedule, as mentioned in [[Media_FAQ#How_do_I_save_a_schedule_file_with_negative_net_unit_amount_in_a_vehicle_line.3F|Saving a schedule file with negative net unit amount]] .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to enter general discount for all the clients for a Vehicle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A general discount can be set for all the Clients in the Vehicle rate card file under Client specific rates. Keep the client code field blank and enter the discount. This discount rate will automatically appear for all the Clients for this vehicle. In case there is already an entry with a specific client code, then for that client the discount entered against its code will be picked and for every other client discount in the blank line will be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vr file.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_when_there_is_no_difference_between_bill_and_cost| How to handle operations where there is no difference between bill and cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisation_to_restrict_users_from_seeing_media_billing_information|How to hide media billing information from certain departments?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Setting_up_authorisations_for_a_client_with_separate_planning.2C_booking_and_invoicing_teams_who_bill_at_cost|How to set up authorisations for a client with separate planning, booking and invoicing teams who bill at cost?]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Accessing large reports via emails in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
When getting reports delivered by email, if the report size is more than 10Mb then, instead of the report being embedded in or attached to the email, the email will contain a web browser link to the file instead of the file itself. This gets around restrictions on email size commonly imposed by email servers. This applies to reports which are either embedded within the email body or attached files. NOTE: The link is only valid for one hour after the email is sent so users must download the report before then.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Negative_amt.png&amp;diff=7326</id>
		<title>File:Negative amt.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Negative_amt.png&amp;diff=7326"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T06:28:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Error msg when entering a negative amount directly in the Gross Amt field&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7319</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7319"/>
		<updated>2021-08-03T07:19:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Ledger Account */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger can be generated for a period range of your choosing. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger -&amp;gt; Ledger Account)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &#039;Change&#039; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which be the default range if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select a single or multiple companies, as required. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by Search. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you want to view. By default, &#039;Movements during the period&#039; and &#039;Outstanding items at the end of the period&#039; are selected.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ledger Account filters :===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display transactions either by a range of dates or use the Period range entered in the Settings. Date range filters by the transaction dates entered in the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display a detailed or a simplified report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ledger Account: Used for internal purposes. Includes links to the voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Statement of Account: Used for external purposes. Provides an official summary of an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display &#039;Despatch Date&#039;, &#039;Approval Date&#039; and &#039;Due Date&#039;. The dates are generated from the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Billing Analysis columns (eg: Client, Supplier, Type etc.) will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose &#039;Yes&#039; to display on all account types or &#039;No&#039; to suppress it on all types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Per A/c&#039; checkbox to force headers for each account on the report, treating each account as a separate page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the preferred form of output between html (with or without letterhead) and pdf (portrait or landscape). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Account type(s):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS provides several options for choosing the type of transactions to display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements during the period: Transactions that occur in the date or period range specified. Displays all details of the transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements totalled by type of voucher: Same report as above but displays only the type of voucher and the total, suppressing the reference and the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the end of the period: Display entries/transactions that are pending allocation at the end of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the beginning of the period: Display all unallocated entries/transactions from the beginning of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items: Display all transactions that include open item accounts, providing an item-wise balance showing the transactions in the specified account and it&#039;s contra-account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items (current period only): Same as above option but will display only transactions in the current period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overdue items: Display all transactions which are overdue past the Due date entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a due date. A due date is required if Account type &#039;Overdue items only&#039; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the outstanding subtotaled by month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this filter to either include or exclude any contra accounts from your report. Contra accounts are accounts with an opposite balance to the selected accounts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank to display all journal types or choose a specific journal type to filter transactions by it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax/VAT category(ies):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select from list of tax codes to display only transactions that use the selected tax code(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Unposted Vouchers&#039; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;By company&#039; checkbox to generate a consolidated report of all companies selected with all the transactions grouped by the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Show allocation&#039; checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Using_NEOSYS_Media_System&amp;diff=7313</id>
		<title>Using NEOSYS Media System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Using_NEOSYS_Media_System&amp;diff=7313"/>
		<updated>2021-08-03T06:55:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Copying a plan to a schedule in NEOSYS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Multi-brand plans and schedules==&lt;br /&gt;
A plan/schedule is per brand. If you must execute multiple brands on one plan or schedule then you must create a master brand, perhaps a “corporate brand”. You can further indicate the exact brands in various places within the body of the plan/schedule but in particular you can indicate the brand code per material, in the material table at the bottom of the plan/schedule data entry screen. This goes part way to supporting multi-brand plans/schedules. For example the media diary shows the brand per material however the billing analysis reports and most other NEOSYS documents are based on the overall brand of the plan/schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to create a media schedule in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can view a short video tutorial which explains how to create a media schedule in NEOSYS by clicking on http://youtu.be/iNm4TrUNl8M or visit the neosys youtube channel at http://www.youtube.com/user/neosysdubai/videos for all available tutorial videos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Copying Plans in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that on pasting into Excel etc it splits each line into multiple lines ONE PER DATE in the grid, but on pasting back into NEOSYS, it combines such lines back up into one schedule line where possible, i.e. the lines that are identical except for the date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying plans created in Excel to NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create an Excel sheet as shown below&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that the title name for each column in the excel sheet is as per the field name in the schedule file  &lt;br /&gt;
#*To save time you only need to put one of two words of the column title eg media or vehicle will have the same effect as Media Vehicle )&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy ALL the cells from the excel file including the header row &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image: planimport.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#In NEOSYS, open the required schedule, go to Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Schedules -&amp;gt; Schedule File&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the schedule details such as schedule no., campaign, company etc &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image: scheduleheader.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the media vehicle field and paste the copied cells&lt;br /&gt;
#*The cells will now be pasted to its respective fields &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image: schedulecontent.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying plans created in NEOSYS to Excel===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In NEOSYS, open the required schedule, go to Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Schedules -&amp;gt; Schedule File&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the details from the vehicle lines that you require, as shown below. Crudely select the rows you want to copy or press Ctrl+A to select the whole document, then press Ctrl+C to copy &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Schcopy1.png|1500px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Open Excel and paste (Ctrl+V). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:excelop1.png|1500px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying vehicle lines in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the schedule file, copy the vehicle line that you require. (Highlight the details and then press Ctrl+C or press Ctrl+A followed by Ctrl+C for copying all) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Schcopy2.png|1500px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to the Media Vehicle field in the schedule file where you wish to copy the details and paste (Ctrl+V). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Schcopy3.png|1500px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Copying a plan to a schedule in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new schedule by either entering a suitable new schedule code of your choosing or press Enter or click New to get the next schedule number.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the &#039;Copy From Plan&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the number or code of the plan that you want to copy, or click the popup, or enter something to search for in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the month that you want to copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#Decide if you want to copy all or only some of the rows of the plan. Only rows with with ads on the month selected will be copied or selectable. However, if there are no numbers of ads on the plan, all rows will be copied or selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Copy All - copy all rows of the plan&lt;br /&gt;
#*Copy Some - select the rows that you want to copy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a plan or schedule numbering method==&lt;br /&gt;
Before creating a plan or schedule you need to decide whether to number it sequentially or code it manually. You don&#039;t have to stick to one method or the other every time and can use a combination of both methods depending on the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following principles apply to both schedules and plans, however plans are nearly always best suited to the manual coding method. Note that if you are using schedules like plans then they are also best suited to the manual coding method.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Automatic numbering===&lt;br /&gt;
If you use NEOSYS to process a random stream of orders from clients, for example a lot of newspaper or classified ads, you are forced to use the NEOSYS automatic numbering system. However this means that will later on you will always have to be given the schedule number in order to access it, or you will have to search for it within NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two ways to get automatic numbers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the New button&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter a single letter in the schedule number field (e.g. &amp;quot;X&amp;quot;) and press Enter. You will get a schedule number like X9999 i.e. the next sequence number in the series of whatever letter you chose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manual numbering===&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using NEOSYS for monthly or yearly scheduling for major clients, there is a great way to avoid the bother of always searching for schedule numbers. Just manually create your own schedule numbers according to some consistent logic just as you would when inventing a standard for naming spreadsheet or word processing files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is well worth learning this method and not just using the automatic schedule numbering system for everything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In all cases the schedule number should start with a basic structure like - BRANDCODE+YEAR+MONTH. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Brand code ideally remains constant, year and month will change as per period. The month is subject to change more frequently and hence placed towards the tail end of the schedule/plan number)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a COKE campaign in December 2010.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Single digit months should be entered like 08 for consistency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To help you get started with this method remember the pattern like this: (BBB represents the brand code, YY represents the year and MM represents the month)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 BBBYYMM (recommended - year first, month second)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some people prefer to reverse the year and the month as follows. However this can get very confusing if everybody in your company does it their own way is not consistent (does &amp;quot;1110&amp;quot; Nov 2010 or Oct 2011?)  so we recommend that you all stick to the &amp;quot;year first&amp;quot; &amp;quot;month second&amp;quot; concept since it allows correct alphabetic sorting if the need arises within or outside NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 BBBMMYY (not recommended - month first, year second)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not infrequently you may have more than one schedule for a particular brand on one month. In this case simply extend the basic schedule number according to some consistent logic. Here are some examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012B&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012C&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012TV&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012RADIO&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012ETC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you decide on your schedule number, just type it in the schedule number field and hit the enter key and select the option to create a new schedule (you may also copy an existing one).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Concepts and Calculation under Discounts and other charges==&lt;br /&gt;
===What is net amount?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Net Amount in the following discussion refers to the interim resultant amount after all the additions and deductions are made up to the point in question - ignoring any additions and deductions in columns to the right. It is therefore a varying amount (not shown on the screen or printout) and depends on where you are in the steps of progressive calculation towards the final Net Amount which is shown in the Net Unit Amount column on screen and printouts. If we say &amp;quot;10%N&amp;quot; (or just &amp;quot;10%&amp;quot; since N is always implied) then we mean 10% on the Net Amount as defined above. By comparison, &amp;quot;10%n&amp;quot; means 10% calculated on “one before net”, in other words, 10% of the intermediate net amount calculated *before* the last addition/deduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculation in discount/charges columns===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Code&lt;br /&gt;
!Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
!Format&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; g&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|It means &amp;quot;one after gross&amp;quot;. If &amp;quot;g&amp;quot; is appended it means the value is xx% of the value in one column after the gross column&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |xx%g&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; G&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|It means &amp;quot;on gross&amp;quot;.If &amp;quot;G&amp;quot; is appended it means the value is xx% on the gross amount&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |xx%G&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; n&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|It means &amp;quot;one before net&amp;quot;. If &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; is appended it means the value is xx% of the value in one column before the net column&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |xx%n&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; N&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|It means &amp;quot;on net&amp;quot;. If &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; is appended it means the value is xx% of the net amount&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |xx%N&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below are few examples of the usage of these codes. Check the calculations highlighted in green in particular, to understand the difference when using these codes. By default calculations in a column are carried out on the net value available from the previous column to the left. If the immediate previous column is empty, then the net amount from the next column available to the left is considered for calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The codes listed above can be used in any column under discounts and charges to override the default calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that sometimes different codes effectively mean the same thing. For example N, G, g or n in the first addition/deduction column all mean the same thing since there is nothing to work on but the Gross Unit Amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Significance of “g”====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example below we use “g” to calculate fee on Gross + &amp;quot;one after gross&amp;quot; which in this case is Loading. If loading were absent, then the value present in the next available column to the right of gross column is used as the &amp;quot;one after gross&amp;quot;. By default each column calculation is carried out on the net value. If &amp;quot;g&amp;quot; were absent, then fee would be calculated on the net. In this particular example we append &amp;quot;g&amp;quot; to fee and loading is present, hence fee is calculated on Gross + Loading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below is the screenshot of the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:g.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of Bill with the use of “g” is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;65%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |Bill&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Gross&lt;br /&gt;
!Loading&lt;br /&gt;
!Discount&lt;br /&gt;
!Commission&lt;br /&gt;
!Fee&lt;br /&gt;
!Total&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Value (AED)&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -11.2&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20.16&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5.6&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |86.24&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -10% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |86.24&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Cumulative&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |86.24&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |86.24&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Significance of “G”====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, we use “G” to calculate fee on gross. By default, fee would be calculated on the net obtained from the first available column to the left which in this case is the commission column. We specify “G” to override this default calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
Below is the screenshot of an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:g1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of Bill with the use of “G” is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;65%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |Bill&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Gross&lt;br /&gt;
!Loading&lt;br /&gt;
!Discount&lt;br /&gt;
!Commission&lt;br /&gt;
!Fee&lt;br /&gt;
!Total&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Value (AED)&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -11.2&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20.16&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.64&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -10% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.64&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Cumulative&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.64&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Significance of “n”====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example we use “n” to calculate fee on &amp;quot;one before net&amp;quot;. In this case Discount is the column which is &amp;quot;one before net&amp;quot; as the net value is obtained from the Commission column. If commission column was empty then Discount would be considered as the &amp;quot;net&amp;quot; column and Loading would be the &amp;quot;one before net&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default each column calculation is carried out on the net value. If &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; were absent, then fee would be calculated on the net from the commission column. In this particular instance where we append &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; to fee and commission and discount are present, fee is calculated on net available in the discount column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below is the screenshot of the example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:n.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of Bill with the use of “n” is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;65%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |Bill&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Gross&lt;br /&gt;
!Loading&lt;br /&gt;
!Discount&lt;br /&gt;
!Commission&lt;br /&gt;
!Fee&lt;br /&gt;
!Total&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Value (AED)&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -11.2&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20.16&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5.04&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.68&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -10% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.68&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Cumulative&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.68&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.68&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Significance of “N”====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use “N” to specify default calculation which is &amp;quot;on net&amp;quot;. Hence appending &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; or blank space has the same effect. In this example, fee is calculated on net after commission is subtracted. Below is the screenshot of an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:n1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of Bill with the use of “N” is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;65%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |Bill&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Gross&lt;br /&gt;
!Loading&lt;br /&gt;
!Discount&lt;br /&gt;
!Commission&lt;br /&gt;
!Fee&lt;br /&gt;
!Total&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Value (AED)&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -11.2&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20.16&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +4.03&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |84.67&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -10% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5% of 80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |84.67&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Cumulative&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |84.67&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |84.67&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Commission based costing===&lt;br /&gt;
It’s the situation when the commission is not returned to the client and no fee is charged. An example is shown below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CBC.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example agency subtracts commission of 5% from the cost and not from the bill as commission is not returned to the client. No fee is charged in this transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fee based costing===&lt;br /&gt;
It’s the situation when commission is returned to client and a fee is charged. An example is shown below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FBC1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example agency subtracts commission of 5% from the bill and the cost, and charges the client a 15% fee for this transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Booking without showing all discounts and charges from the supplier==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can optionally issue media booking orders with certain discounts and charges omitted.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This allows the final net cost of media to be recorded in NEOSYS while not forcing the final net cost to be shown on booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
On media plans and schedules append the letter &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; (or &amp;quot;x&amp;quot;) to the discount or charge(s) that are not to show on the booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
For example, enter a discount as -5%X if it is not to be shown on the booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Handling Cost to Agency/Cost to Client in online media==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In online/digital media if the user is entering the impressions as a package on the rate card i.e. 1 rate for 500,000 impressions, then when handling free to agency / free to client there seems to be a problem and I have outlined an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agency cost: 500,000 impressions paid and 500,000 impressions free&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Client bill: 750,000 impressions paid and 250,000 impressions free&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case a package can&#039;t be made of 500,000 each as then it shows the same for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Solution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a costing issue so it should show in the existing costing columns as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:onlinemedia.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a date range for the appearance of Ads under any media type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clients may want to set a date range for appearance of their Ads. The can be many reasons for it, some of which are stated below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Handling long term bookings in Outdoor, Digital or continuous daily bookings in Newspapers:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In case you need to do bookings for a series of days i.e. 10 days or 4 weeks, especially with Outdoor, NEOSYS allows you to enter the same in the specification as follows, then follow instructions for entering material code given in the end:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,4 weeks&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,28 days&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,1 month&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,3 months&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,1 year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*TV Ad having no fixed date of appearance:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Creating Ads when the day of their appearance is not fixed. This mainly happens when Client wants to give an option to the channel to air the ad on any day of the week. In Television media sometimes there is no guarantee that the channel will place the ads especially when the dates are pin picked by clients. So giving the channel option to air any day of the week increases the chances of the Ads getting aired.e.g if you have an ad which you want to appear any day between 6th - 10th June, enter the date range in specification as follows and follow the instructions given in the end:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TV commercial about nutrition,5 days&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have entered the specification, enter a Material code (e.g. X) on the start date of the campaign in the date grid box. You MUST enter a Material code(e.g. X) in the Date grid, for the date range to show in schedule printout.&lt;br /&gt;
This feature doesn&#039;t have an effect on the amounts, but instead NEOSYS calculates the start and stop date based on the date you select in the Date grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039; Below screenshots show how the entered date range is reflected in the booking orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Tvad.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Tvbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Why doesn&#039;t the date range appear in Schedule printout even after entering booking specifications like shown above?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This issue is noticed in a schedule printout when the following settings are used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A numeral is used in the date grid to select the start date&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;List&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; option is chosen under Date Format in the Media Schedule Printout screen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid this problem ensure that a Material code (e.g. X) is used in the date grid, to select start date of the campaign. This issue occurs only in schedule printout. The date range appears properly in booking orders and invoices even if a numeral is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to check an Ad status==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beside running a Media Diary to check the status of ads of a schedule, there are two other quicker methods. (In normal circumstances there is no difference between the three methods)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Hanging cursor over individual ad dates in a vehicle line on a schedule. (See [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Understanding_how_ads_appear_in_different_colors_in_the_schedule | Ad status colour coding]]) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:adstatus3.png|400px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Updating (Changing/Removing) Ad date/material in Dates popup grid will open a different popup that shows ad status per ad on each line. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:adstatus.png|1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Handling booking of additional dates on already booked lines==&lt;br /&gt;
===Situation explained===&lt;br /&gt;
In a schedule which has a line which is already booked (eg. booking order no 10001) and later on you add another date to that line and book the same (eg. booking order no 10002) and thereafter you cancel or amend the 1st ad, the cancellation or amendment order mentions the booking order reference number of the 2nd booked ad (i.e. 10002). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution explained===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS is designed to only show the last booking order as it doesn&#039;t support handling of multiple dates with multiple orders as ad dates are not linked to the booking order number. In such a situation above, any new dates have to added on to new lines in the same schedule. Incase you do need to add the date to the same line, then it is recommended that you cancel the first ad and rebook both the ads again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to book a schedule with one vehicle in different lines with different currencies==&lt;br /&gt;
===Situation explained===&lt;br /&gt;
Vehicle ABC with currency USD was selected on line 1 of a schedule and thereafter you enter a couple of other lines for other vehicles. Later on you change the currency on the Vehicle File of vehicle ABC to be AED and enter another line in the schedule - i.e. line 4 for vehicle ABC with currency AED. Now, when you go to book this vehicle and click on the book button on the New Booking Order Page, the booking order will show only the 1st line of that vehicle as NEOSYS cannot send a consolidated booking order for the same vehicle with different currencies. &lt;br /&gt;
===Solution explained===&lt;br /&gt;
Hence you need to send separate booking orders for the same vehicle as they are in different currencies. So, either you can book vehicle ABC from line 1 first and click on the book button again to book the next one, or if you want to book vehicle ABC from line 4, just put in the line number of the schedule in the option below and click on book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:vehiclelineselection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to book specific lines in a schedule with multiple lines of that vehicle==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Situation explained===&lt;br /&gt;
Schedule has several lines for the same vehicle. You want to create separate booking orders for each line or a combination of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution explained===&lt;br /&gt;
You need to specify the line number while generating the booking order. In case you want only one line, then specify that line number in the Schedule lines Ids field. If you want a combination of lines then specify those line numbers in the Schedule lines Ids field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;To book a single line &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:book1line.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;To book a combination of lines&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:bookmultiline.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Showing the Brand/Product Name on Booking Orders for Sundry and Agency clients==&lt;br /&gt;
On booking orders for clients which are marked as “Sundry” or “Agency” clients, the brand name (from the NEOSYS Client/Brand File) is presented as the client name and the product name is omitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you still want the product name to show on the booking order enter the brand name on the Client/Brand file with a colon in the form “XYZ Corp:ABC”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Processing List of Wrong Ads==&lt;br /&gt;
Agencies have to cope with the fact that ads placed in publications can go wrong and hence NEOSYS has come up with the following feature to followup/generate a report of such wrong ads which need action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Certification File, generate the required list of ads pending certification, and in the space to enter the Certificate/Voucher/Page number, put the same wrapped in round brackets eg. (XXXX).&lt;br /&gt;
#Later on you can take the ordinary List of Ads Pending Certification report and it will include all those with the Certificate/Voucher/Page numbers in brackets just as if there was no number at all and thereafter you can follow-up on such ads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Pend-ads.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatic certification by importing Ad monitoring data==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Automatic certification can be done using data provided by advertising monitoring services. The data must be provided, in or converted, to a special format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The columns of the import file are matched with scheduled ads and is based on the following criteria:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;date&amp;quot;: Must exactly match the scheduled date (if the time is greater than 24:00 then 25:00 on 20/01/2010 does *not* match 01:00 on 21/01/2010, nor does it match 01:00 on 19/01/2010)&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;submedium&amp;quot; : Must be exact Vehicle Name or exact Alias in NEOSYS Vehicle File (case insensitive)&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;brand&amp;quot; : Must be exact Brand Name or exact Alias in NEOSYS Client/Brand File (case Insensitive)&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;duration&amp;quot; : Must match duration on NEOSYS Schedule File from -1 to +3 seconds&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;advertizing time&amp;quot; (*not* &amp;quot;program time&amp;quot;) : Must be no more than 30 mins before, or 30 mins after, the scheduled time or time range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case there are multiple matching ads in the schedule file for some ad in the import file then only the first scheduled ad found will be certified. The remainder will remain uncertified unless there are also multiple similar ads in the import file. Only if there are an equal number of matching ads in the import file will all the scheduled ads be certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case there is more than one similar ad in the import file for an ad that has been scheduled, then the balance of the imported ads will be loaded into the unmatched ads file and are listed for comparison while doing manual certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is advisable to use a fixed terminology when discussing automatic certification to avoid confusion between unmatched ads and uncertified ads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*“UNMATCHED ads” refers to monitored ads that NEOSYS has not been able to match up to scheduled ads in NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
*“UNCERTIFIED ads” are ads scheduled in NEOSYS which have a) not been matched with monitored ads automatically and b) not certified manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Invoicing “Certified Ads Only” after invoicing “All Ads”==&lt;br /&gt;
The following issue only occurs in old versions of NEOSYS. In newer versions of NEOSYS, invoiced ads which have not been certified will not be credited when requesting an invoice on &amp;quot;certified ads only&amp;quot; basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In old versions of NEOSYS, invoicing with the “certified ads only” options means both of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#“issue invoice for any uninvoiced ads that are certified”&lt;br /&gt;
#“issue credit note for any invoiced ads that aren’t certified” … this may be unexpected behaviour by the user&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In other words, if you invoice “certified ads only” then any ads already invoiced which do not have a certificate (either you already invoiced “All Ads” without certifying, or you removed the certificate number after invoicing “Certified Ads Only”) - will have a credit note issued for them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This behaviour allows issuing credit notes for specific ads by removing the certificate number without removing the ad from the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like issuing normal credit notes this also means that, even if schedules are fully invoiced and do not appear on the List of Schedules Pending Invoicing or List of Ads Pending Invoicing reports, you can get credit notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users need to learn that invoicing “Certified Ads only” after invoicing “All Ads” should be avoided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cancelling or Amending Incorrect Client Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Using_NEOSYS_Agency_System#Cancelling_or_Amending_Incorrect_Client_Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel and/or reissue an invoice using a credit note===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====To cancel an invoice permanently====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#From the Schedule File, remove the ads that need to be cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &amp;quot;Invoice&amp;quot; button to get the New Invoice screen&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Create Proforma&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
#Check that the credit note looks okay&lt;br /&gt;
#If the credit note looks okay, click on Invoice and the credit note will be created to reflect the cancelled ads&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====To cancel an invoice when you intend it to be reissued====&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS has a special option to enable you to create a credit note without removing the ads from a schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Schedule File, click on the “Invoice” button to get the New Invoice screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Credit Note date in the Invoice date field&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Invoice type option select “Credit Note”&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the “Create Proforma” button&lt;br /&gt;
#Check that the credit note looks okay.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the credit note looks okay, click on Invoice and the credit note will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To reissue an invoice, cancel the original invoice as above then amend the schedule (or the other way around – it doesn’t matter) and issue another invoice using the usual steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Credit Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Notes for reduction in billable cost===&lt;br /&gt;
A credit note is a document which indicates a reduction of the amount that a client has to pay versus invoices issued to date. It can be thought of an arithmetical negative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many varied reasons why this could be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Ads not appearing properly&lt;br /&gt;
*Accidental overbilling&lt;br /&gt;
*Discounting&lt;br /&gt;
*Renegotiation/Disputes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get a credit note for the required amount follow this procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Amend the schedule to show the final net position and billing amount to the client. This could involve removing ads or giving additional discounts etc.&lt;br /&gt;
#Use NEOSYS New Invoices and request a new &amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;. You will actually get a credit note representing the changes that you have made in step 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NB. Do NOT select Invoice Type: &amp;quot;Credit Note&amp;quot; since this is for totally reversing the total invoiced to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====What if none of the discount and charge columns are vacant?====&lt;br /&gt;
You can place multiple discounts in one column using / to separate the discounts eg &amp;quot;-5%/-1% discount&amp;quot;. An optional additional word/comment must be preceded by a space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Debit Notes for increase in billable amount===&lt;br /&gt;
Note that you can also get debit notes (supplementary invoices) in a similar manner to the above if you add ads or increase costs on the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you both add and subtract ads and costs then the additional &amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot; issued is either a debit note or credit note depending if the net effect increases or decreases the amount payable by the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Note for reissuing &amp;quot;amended&amp;quot; invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you wish to completely reissue an invoice which has been incorrectly raised. This can happen both when the erroneous invoice has been sent to the client and beforehand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good accounting procedure requires that once an invoice has been issued then it cannot simple be &amp;quot;cancelled&amp;quot; and forgotten as if it never existed. It must first be reversed by issuance of a &amp;quot;credit note&amp;quot; which is a kind of invoice with a negative amount. The logic is that there should not be two slightly documents floating around with the SAME INVOICE NUMBER as this can lead to accidental or deliberate confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, if an invoice has been issued wrongly and you wish to provide a corrected version then follow this procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do it in the TESTING AND TRAINING DATABASE first time or use PROFORMA option to ensure what you get is correct BEFORE actually issuing actual credit notes and invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Reversal the original invoice using NEOSYS &amp;quot;New Invoices&amp;quot; with Invoice Type option &amp;quot;Credit Note&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Amend the schedule to what you want it to be&lt;br /&gt;
#Get a new invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: It doesn&#039;t matter what order steps 1. and 2. are done. Even after you modify a schedule, NEOSYS remembers exactly what was invoiced and reverse what was invoiced, not what is on the schedule at the time of requesting the credit note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It doesn&#039;t matter how you amend a schedule, NEOSYS always keeps an internal copy of the schedule &amp;quot;as it was invoiced&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Issuing separate invoices or credit notes for selected discounts and charges===&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can optionally provide clients with a supplementary invoices/credit notes for certain discounts and charges. Without this option, all discounts and charges would have to show on a single invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
On media plans and schedules append the letter &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; (or &amp;quot;x&amp;quot;) to the discount or charge(s) that are not to show on the initial invoice and should appear on a separate invoice/credit note.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
For example, enter a discount as -5%X if it is to be shown on a separate credit note. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
When creating invoices to clients, an option is provided on the invoice creation form to allow raising of either a) the initial invoice only, or b) the final invoice/credit note only or c) both at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
You cannot raise the final invoice/credit note unless the initial invoice is actually raised. Note that this means that you cannot get proforma invoices for the &amp;quot;Both&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I issue a credit note for part of a schedule?=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are instances where a schedule can have single or multiple invoices and you would like to cancel the amount invoiced for only specific ads or part of a schedule in these invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To select specific ads in a schedule, you can use the Supplier and Vehicle filter on the New Media Invoices/Proformas page. This technique will help narrow down the selection to specific ads. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The way to get a credit note for part of a schedule with the intention of re-invoicing them again later is to delete them, get the credit note and then add them back. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the ads to be credited into a new temporary schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove the ads from the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#Ask for an invoice (you will get a credit note)&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the ads back into the schedule by copying from the temporary schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the temporary schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not ideal but is only rarely required. If it becomes a frequent requirement then NEOSYS software may be developed to handle it more automatically. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are only a few ads, you can skip the use of the temporary schedule and do it all manually. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recreated ads will unfortunately be missing booking order information but the original booking orders are still stored in the schedule for inspection and if you must have a booking order number for the ads on the media diary then you can rebook them and put a note on the new order referring back to the original order. If you really want everything documented correctly you can issue a booking order cancellation at the same time as the credit note. These booking orders would not be sent to the media supplier of course. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Likewise any certification information will be lost when the ads are deleted. This will have to be re-entered after the ads are added back into the schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following way does not work in NEOSYS at the moment &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Decertify some invoiced ads&lt;br /&gt;
#Ask for an invoice for &amp;quot;certified ads only&amp;quot;  hoping to get a credit note for the ads that are no longer certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Removing unnecessary items from List of Schedules Pending Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Troubleshooting NEOSYS Media System#Removing unnecessary items from List of Schedules Pending Invoices|Removing unnecessary items from List of Schedules Pending Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Processing of Incoming Media Supplier Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Verifying incoming supplier invoices is a major agency task - possibly greater in effort than the issuing of the original bookings.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The general strategy in NEOSYS for checking is to have a kind of holding account (called a WIP/accrued costs account) which shows at all times the exact difference between the costs as-booked-and-invoiced-to-clients, and the actual cost of supplier invoices received and posted to date.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The most common practice is for NEOSYS to automatically open a single WIP/accrual account for each schedule. This allows pending costs to be fully managed and controlled within the system and with a full breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The WIP/accrual accounts are typically configured as open-item accounts to allow even greater control by seeing exactly which media costs are pending within a particular schedule. In a large schedule with many media this is important. Standard &amp;quot;allocation&amp;quot; of debits to credits within the schedule a/c closes off items one by one leaving pending items clearly visible. It may be easy to visually match debits and credits in any particular schedule WIP/accrual account and not bother with allocation.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Note: No manual correction journals should be posted directly into the income and costs account under any circumstances. All corrections must be made in the original Schedule File and corresponding financial correction journals will be generated automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why should Media Accrual Accounts be Open Item and not Balance Forward?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accrual Accounts are best thought of as identical to Supplier A/cs but for supplier invoices that expect to receive but have not received yet. If the accrual accounts are kept as a Balance Forward, then it is impossible to get a breakdown of the balance in accrual account especially in large schedules with many media. Without getting a breakdown of the balance in accrual account, it becomes very difficult to understand what all costs the supplier invoice has been received and what exactly are the pending costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WIP===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If supplier invoices are received and posted BEFORE the clients are invoiced then the WIP/accrued cost account will represent WIP, other words it will be a debit balance representing the total value of supplier invoices received and posted but which have yet to be billed to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Accrued Costs===&lt;br /&gt;
If the supplier invoices are received and posted only after the clients are invoiced then the WIP/accrued cost account will represent accrued costs, in order words it will be a credit balance representing the value of costs as-booked-and-invoiced-to-client for which supplier invoices have not been received and posted.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Process if a supplier invoice is acceptable===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Media Supplier Invoice File locate the ads related to the incoming supplier invoice and enter the supplier invoice number against each one.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the space for the supplier invoice numbers you can also put any additional information into the same field. E.g. For a magazine, you could put both the supplier invoice number and the page number where the ad actually appeared. While you are entering the supplier invoice numbers on the ads, check that the cost to the agency on screen - which corresponds to the bookings made - agrees with the supplier invoice that you are checking.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you find that the invoice amount is not correct or any discrepancy, NEOSYS has created a special function to distinguish/followup on such invoices for reporting purposes. To enable this feature for the concerned invoice, enter the supplier invoice number wrapped in round brackets eg. (XXXX). Later on, you can take the ordinary List of Ads Pending Supplier Invoice report and it will include all those with supplier invoice numbers in brackets just as if there was no supplier invoice number at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If the supplier invoice amount is correct - but doesn&#039;t match the booking order cost===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
#Amend the cost-to-agency columns on the schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Request an invoice for the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting for an invoice generates the appropriate accounting entries for cost adjustments to the cost account and the cost accrual accounts in Finance module. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The invoice will generate a zero invoice &amp;quot;to the client&amp;quot; and a &amp;quot;cost invoice&amp;quot; for the difference between the original cost and the new cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario 1  - What are the entries created when the media purchase invoice is slightly more than the booking cost (after invoicing the client)?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eg. Booking order cost was  5000 AED, but the Media Purchase invoice was received for 5500 AED:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/c     DR  0&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/C     CR  0 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       DR  500 &lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        CR  500 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario 2 - What are the entries created when the media purchase invoice is slightly less than the purchase order (after invoicing the client)?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eg. Booking order cost was  5000 AED, but the Media Purchase invoice was received for 4500 AED:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/c     DR  0&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/C     CR  0 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       DR  -500 &lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        CR  -500&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If the supplier invoice is acceptable for posting===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the supplier invoices directly into the Finance Purchase Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supplier A/c                     Credit 100&lt;br /&gt;
Schedule/Accrual A/c        Debit 100&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Locating long overdue Supplier Invoices/Credit Notes===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
- If you have one accrual a/c per schedule automatically created by NEOSYS&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Print the Trial Balance of the Media WIP/Accrual Ledger and investigate the older accounts at the top of the report using the Supplier Invoice File or List of Ads Pending Supplier Invoices report.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
- If you have one accrual a/c per supplier&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Print the Detailed Ledger A/c (Outstanding Items Only) of the Media WIP/Accrual Ledger and investigate the older items using the Supplier Invoice File or List of Ads Pending Supplier Invoices report.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Writing-off long overdue Supplier Invoices/Credit Notes===&lt;br /&gt;
Follow exactly the same steps as in the above section &amp;quot;If the supplier invoice amount is correct - but doesn&#039;t match the booking order cost&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note-&#039;&#039; NEOSYS will generate cost adjustment in the usual media cost accounts but you may like to amend the journal before posting to go to some other a/c such as “other income – supplier invoices not received”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Posting media supplier invoices before issuing schedules to the client===&lt;br /&gt;
Assuming that you are accruing media costs by schedule and not by vehicle or supplier then the contra account of the supplier invoice posting will be the schedule code or, if the schedules codes are pure numbers then SCH9999 where 9999 is the number of the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supplier invoices posted before issuing invoices to client are work in progress (assets) but, in NEOSYS common practice, we still post them into the Media Accruals Ledger which could more properly be called Media Accruals/WIP Ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The accrual account for the schedule is created as soon as the schedule is approved and not only when the invoice is issued to the client. Schedule approval happens in practice automatically at the time of the first booking. Therefore unless you book a schedule (or specifically enter the approval date on the schedule file, there will be no accrual account created for you to post the supplier invoice into. This is logical since if you haven&#039;t booked or specifically approved a schedule then you should arguably not be able to post supplier invoices for that schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Processing wrong Incoming Media Supplier Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
If you find that the invoice amount is not correct or any discrepancy, NEOSYS has created a special function to distinguish/followup on such invoices for reporting purposes. To enable this feature follow the procedure below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Supplier Invoice File, generate the required list of ads pending supplier invoices, and in the space to enter the supplier invoice number, put the same wrapped in round brackets eg. (XXXX).&lt;br /&gt;
#Later on you can take the ordinary List of Ads Pending Supplier Invoice report and it will include all those with supplier invoice numbers in brackets just as if there was no supplier invoice number at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Accounting entries created by the Media System==&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice journal entries are created automatically but are left un-posted under Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entries - Media Invoices/Credit Notes (INV).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These entries are generated automatically by NEOSYS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entries when client is invoice for 120 with cost 100===&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/C             Dr.  + 120&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/c             Cr.  - 120&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/C               Dr.  + 100&lt;br /&gt;
 Media Accrual A/C      Cr.  - 100 (Schedule a/c)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Media accrual is a provision done as you haven’t received supplier invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entries on received a supplier invoice that media has accepted===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039;But while entering the Media Purchase Invoice (Supplier Invoice) you need to pass a manual entry under Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journal &amp;gt; Journal Entry - select Media Purchase Invoice, and enter the journal as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Media Accrual A/c      Dr. + 100 (Schedule a/c)&lt;br /&gt;
 Supplier A/c           Cr. - 100 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed note on this topic, refer to [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Processing_of_Incoming_Media_Supplier_Invoices | Processing of Incoming Media Supplier Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Allocating amounts in the accruals a/c against the supplier invoice====&lt;br /&gt;
=====At the same time of receiving/posting the supplier invoice=====&lt;br /&gt;
To allocate the accruals against an incoming supplier invoice, you may click on the ALLOC VCHS column in the Media Purchase Invoice journal and from the pop-up list of unallocated items, click on Allocate and save the document - these items will not appear as outstanding in the accrual ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====After receiving/posting the supplier invoice=====&lt;br /&gt;
Many a times at the time you receive the supplier invoice you are unable to allocate the same against the outstanding items in the accrual account. Hence after posting the same and/or at a date you can go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers Allocation and enter the accrual account number and click on OK - here from the unallocated supplier invoice amounts, select the one you want to allocate by clicking on Allocate button and thereafter it pops up a list of all accruals which are allocatable. From this list select the ones you want to allocate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using NEOSYS VAT/Sales Tax Accounting for Media==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Understanding_VAT/Sales_Tax_in_the_NEOSYS_finance_module#Configuring_NEOSYS_to_handle_VAT.2FSales_Tax| Configuring VAT/Sales Tax in Finance module]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up standard Sales Tax Percentage===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the default VAT/Sales Tax code to be used in the Schedule File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:MediaconfigFileInvVAT.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create a schedule with VAT/Tax%===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If a standard VAT/Sales Tax% is not defined in the Media Configuration File then you must manually add the tax code at the bottom of every schedule that should have tax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same tax code will apply to all ads in the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:scheduleFileVATCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create the invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you do this, Issue a proforma invoice first to check that the tax appears correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:vat3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report on Cost VAT Tax===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get a report on the media cost tax make sure that schedule follows these requirements and then create Media Diary report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All these points MUST be met, otherwise cost tax will not appear in Media Diary report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. &amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; flag should not be used on the schedule line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Schedule has to have any tax code entered, even OZ (0%).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Company file main market agrees with the vehicle file market code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Supplier market code is either blank or agrees with the vehicle market code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the market code is &amp;quot;UAE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;KSA&amp;quot; then system will add 5% to COST TAX. HARDCODED currently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Will be configured per period in the Company File soon and not hard coded since rates and countries may/will change in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Finance Entries===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Entries when client is invoice for 120 with cost 100 and 5% VAT====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/C              Dr.  + 126&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/c              Cr.  - 120&lt;br /&gt;
 VAT Control A/C         Cr.  - 6&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/C                Dr.  + 100&lt;br /&gt;
 Media Accrual A/C       Cr.  - 100 (Schedule a/c)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Media accrual is a provision done as you haven’t received supplier invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Entries on received a supplier invoice that media has accepted====&lt;br /&gt;
When entering the Media Purchase Invoice (Supplier Invoice) you need to pass a manual entry under Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journal &amp;gt; Journal Entry - select Media Purchase Invoice, and enter the journal as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Media Accrual A/c       Dr. + 100 (Schedule a/c)&lt;br /&gt;
 VAT Control A/C         Dr. + 5&lt;br /&gt;
 Supplier A/c            Cr. - 105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed note on this topic, refer to [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Processing_of_Incoming_Media_Supplier_Invoices | Processing of Incoming Media Supplier Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Post the Sales Invoice Journal created===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In Finance Journals, check that the tax columns appear, the tax amount is correct, and then post it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:vat4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check that the Sale Tax A/c is correct===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
It should show an entry for the tax liability incurred by issuing and posting the above sales invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:vat5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to record VAT for FOC (free of cost) ads==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently in NEOSYS, it is not possible to charge ads free of cost and only charge the VAT amount. Although this can be achieved easily using the Finance module, the below solution is for users who require an invoice for the same purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Tax code &#039;OF&#039; in this situation. Tax description: Reversal of Net amount for FOC ads, Tax amount: 0%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Estimate file, enter the FOC amount with the usual 5% tax (OS) in the first line. In the second line, enter the negative of the same FOC amount, this time with 0% tax (tax code OF). The net effect is that the total payable amount will be only the VAT amount recorded in the first line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1st line of Estimate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount: 100.00 (FOC amount)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT Code: OS (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT Amount: 5.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2nd line of Estimate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount -100.00 (Reversal of FOC amount)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT Code: OF (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT Amount: 0.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TOTAL:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Total amount billable before VAT 0.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Total VAT billable 5.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Total amount payable after VAT 5.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle production costs on media rate cards==&lt;br /&gt;
Some media like out of home often has production costs which vary in parallel with the base cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One solution in NEOSYS is to place two columns on the rate card. Then on the schedule select the first column while mentally remembering the second amount, then simply type the second amount into the “Loading” or “Other” column. This is likely to be automated in the next version NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are any discounts and charges and they apply only to the base cost then placing the production charges in the “Other” column makes it clear to everybody that they do not take part in the discounting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ratecardproduction.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifying Gross Unit Bill Amount to Client in Ratecards==&lt;br /&gt;
Normally the Gross Unit Bill Amount (in other words, the gross unit cost to the client) is taken from whichever column the user selected from the ratecard when creating media plans or schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#You may specify, in the ratecard&#039;s Client Rates section, which is the default ratecard column to be used per client and/or per brand but this can be overridden during selection.&lt;br /&gt;
#If there is a column titled BILL or CLIENT in the ratecard, and there is no default Ratecard Column specified for the client and/or brand, then that column will be used for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifying Gross Unit Cost to Agency in Ratecards==&lt;br /&gt;
Normally the Gross Unit Cost Amount (in other words, the gross unit cost to the agency) is taken as a copy of the Gross Unit Bill Amount to the Client, however NEOSYS can get a different rate in a number of ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Agency Ratecard Column can be specified per client and/or per brand in the Client Rates section of the ratecard&lt;br /&gt;
#Otherwise, if there is a column titled COST or X in one of the columns after (to the right) of the column selected for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
#The ratecard used to decide the agency costs may be different from the ratecard for the client. Use the Vehicle Cost File to specify the date of the rate card that the agency uses.&lt;br /&gt;
#You can specify a &amp;quot;column offset&amp;quot; in the Vehicle Cost File. For example a cost offset of 10 would mean that if the first ten columns are rates for the client then the second 10 columns would the costs to the agency in parallel. ie if the client rate is taken from column 3 then the agency rate will be taken from column 13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restricting Access to Selected Ratecard columns==&lt;br /&gt;
In the Authorisation File put a task called RATECARD ACCESS “XYZ” where XYZ is the title of the ratecard column eg “COST”. The quotes are required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add an appropriate lock to the task and give the key to the authorised users only in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you can restrict access to the first 10 columns with a task RATECARD ACCESS A (with no quotes). The second 10 columns can be restricted with RATECARD ACCESS B .. and so on up to the current maximum of 40 columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Use and Manage Materials==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to assign a material to an ad, simply type a letter to identify that material, into the Dates calender of the schedule as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Material_calender.jpg| 1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the schedule is saved, the material automatically appears in the [[Schedule_file#Section_7| table of materials on the bottom of the schedule file]]. Also, a corresponding [[Material_File| Material File]] is automatically created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Materials can be tracked using the  [[List_of_Materials| List of Materials]] report in the Media --&amp;gt; Materials menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can also be [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Pending_Materials| set up to send out an email alert warning about the list of pending material]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using Media Material File==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Material_File| Material file]] records are automatically generated from the schedules you enter.The material number is the schedule number (E.g. SCH1001) followed by a fullstop and material letter (e.g. A,B,C) i.e. SCH1001.A . One material is created for each material letter present on the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a schedule reuses material from previous schedules you must enter the previous schedule number in the list of materials at the bottom of the schedule file. This will prevent new material from being created automatically by the new schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you mark materials in the [[Material_File| Material file]] (or [[Schedule_file| Schedule File]]) as having been delivered to you then [[Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Pending_Materials| NEOSYS can alert you daily by email about material due for delivery by deadline date]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Exporting to other finance systems]]==&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting Invoices in Excel Format==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using NEOSYS Invoices menu, Audit Invoices/List&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To “export” we run the normal audit procedure but with output format=xls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also get an html version of the invoices but this currently doesn’t show all the third party system alias codes (only shows first system alias code entry).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classic concepts from financial audit are used to ensure a complete and unduplicated stream import files and invoices. NEOSYS uses system controlled sequential audit numbering so that you can ensure that you have all the invoices up to a certain point and be confident that there are no duplications. The system still works when invoice numbering is discontinuous for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;(Optional/Repeatable)&#039;&#039; EXPORT WITHOUT CLOSING&lt;br /&gt;
#*Followed by visual inspection and maybe a *trial* (not real!) import into other system.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Any new invoices generated afterwards will be appended to the old batch.&lt;br /&gt;
#EXPORT AND CLOSE&lt;br /&gt;
#*Closing will “finalise” the audit batch ensuring that the same invoices will not be exported again.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To “re-export” a prior batch, specify the right audit number – for example the one prior to the current audit no.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If re-exporting, then the current latest other-system client/supplier alias codes will be used&lt;br /&gt;
#Import the exported file/audit batch into your other system.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If any other-system client/supplier alias codes are wrong then fix the codes in NEOSYS and repeat from the previous step&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat from 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Exporting_Invoices_in_Excel_Format.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
To find the current audit number, run the audit report in html format WITHOUT closing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All invoices are appended to current latest audit batch no. Audit batch no starts from “1” per company if invoices are numbered by company, or per database if not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you export and don’t close then any new invoices raise subsequently will be APPENDED to the current latest audit batch no.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you export and don’t close then you should *not* import that batch into your other system (except perhaps on a trial basis) because the next export will contain the same invoices PLUS any new ones. If you do try to import both the old and new version of the same audit batch number then before you import the new version of it, you must edit out the invoices that you have already imported. If you attempt to import both the old and the new extended version of the same audit batch number without doing any editing then your import will:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Fail if it is capable of recognizing duplicate voucher numbers, or&lt;br /&gt;
#Import duplicates transactions if it cannot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you close, then all new invoices will start being appended to a new batch of invoices with a new audit no.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Getting media executive sales commission statements==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can calculate both due and pending commissions as a percentage of the net cost to the client for each ad. The percentage can be determined by the number of days between the invoice and the receipt. Client receipts must be entered into the NEOSYS finance module and allocated against the invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The commission structure must be setup beforehand in the Media Configuration File as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Commission.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the commission structure is setup, use the Media Diary to get commission statements. Make sure that you select one or both of the options “paid” or “unpaid” otherwise you will not get any receipt or commission columns&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media Diary01.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will give you a report something like the following which shows the total commission due and pending per executive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media Diary02.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click on the summary total lines to see the details including the commission % and amount per ad as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media Diary03.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selling TV spots==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is only for when you want full control over positioning of ads in programs and breaks. It is not required for simple TV ad sales.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up the master files===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a vehicle====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots6.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media FAQ#How do I book one media vehicle through different suppliers.3F|Click here for how to handle media vehicle with multiple suppliers]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a rate card with standard price brackets====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specify the station programs and break times/durations for every date (there is a way to import as well)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots8.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entering orders from clients===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Enter ads roughly into programs (not into breaks yet)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must follow the 3 step process below. Specification comes automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: tvspots1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Positioning ads in breaks===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Closer to the actual date position all the ads precisely into breaks====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Lets have a look at all ads on July 5th====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Select an un-positioned ad====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Finally select where in the break this ad should appear compared to other ads.====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is only one break in this program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Issuing orders to the stations===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close to the day of execution issue an order to the station&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots9.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots10.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Understanding the Terminology of words like Invoice/Costs in the Media System==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS practice if you say &amp;quot;invoices&amp;quot; without any further clarification this means and only means SALES invoices. If you said MEDIA invoices (intending to mean media module invoices and to clarify from job module invoices) then there is confusion because the advertising industry standard terminology for NEOSYS media suppliers AND NEOSYS media vehicles is &amp;quot;media&amp;quot; so &amp;quot;media invoices&amp;quot; sounds much like &amp;quot;invoices from the media&amp;quot; which are of course Purchase Invoices. Therefore we MUST call invoices issued out of the NEOSYS media module &amp;quot;Invoices&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Media Sales Invoices&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Media Module Invoices&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;Media Invoices&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When mentioning Cost in NEOSYS, Cost alone means always and only Cost to Agency but you can say Cost to Client/Cost to Agency if you want to spell it out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Understanding how ads appear in different colors in the schedule==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Color shows by preference in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Brown - Scheduled only&lt;br /&gt;
#Green - Booked&lt;br /&gt;
#Blue - Certified&lt;br /&gt;
#Orange - Supplier invoice entered&lt;br /&gt;
#Black - Invoiced&lt;br /&gt;
#Gray - Full Credit Note&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. when you create a new ad in a schedule it will appear as Red. If an ad has been invoiced, it will show as black regardless of if the ad has been certified or not or it has been booked or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A box around the ad means certified wrong or problem on supplier invoice (they are entered without round brackets to indicate that there is some problem)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below screenshot displays how these different type of Ads appear in the schedule. Wiki explains how to schedule/book/certify/certify wrong or invoice ads etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: adcolor1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: adcolor2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatic CPM calculation in Schedule File== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the letters &amp;quot;CPM&amp;quot; are present anywhere in the Specification field in the schedule file, then Gross Unit Cost is converted into Net Unit Cost using a factor of 0.001.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So you can put something like &amp;quot;IMPRESSION CPM*&amp;quot; in the Vehicle Ratecard for automated calculation of cost for digital ads (as shown in screenshot below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UsingRatecardCPM1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the above is entered in the ratecard file, then follow the below steps to use the ratecard entry in a schedule file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In Schedule file select ratecard. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:UsingRatecardCPM2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Then select the option required from that ratecard entry. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:UsingRatecardCPM3.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter number of impressions in the popup (this popup appears only if &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; is entered in the ratecard file &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:UsingRatecardCPM4.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Then the net unit amount gets calculated as shown below. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:UsingRatecardCPM5.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Income Sharing==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This NEOSYS feature provides a method to share any % of income from a particular client between companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g Company A and B are handling two different Newspaper campaigns for ClientX, a % of the fee amount can then be given to company Z.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prerequisites: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Client &amp;amp; Brand File, the two fields, &amp;quot;Company&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;%Share of Fee&amp;quot; are used to dictated what percentage of bill fee to share and with which company. See [[Client_%26_Brand_File#Income_Sharing | Client &amp;amp; Brand File Income Sharing]]&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Media Configuration file, under section Media Accounting, enter the Media Income Share account code. See [[Media_Configuration_File#Income_Share_A.2Fc_No | Media Config Income Share]]&lt;br /&gt;
*In the company file of the company sharing the income, there must be an inter-company account between that company and the company to share income with. See [[Company_File#Other_Companies | Setup intercompany account]]&lt;br /&gt;
*A % or amount must be entered into the Fee column on the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Automatically generated inter-company entries will only be generated if the schedule&#039;s bill has a fee amount or % entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The amount to be shared is a % of the fee entered in the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Screenshot below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Media Configuration file: Define which media type income account you want the companies to share.&lt;br /&gt;
#Client &amp;amp; Brand file: Define which company should receive shared income from other companies and what % of the bill fee should be shared.&lt;br /&gt;
#Schedule file: Make sure that an amount or % is entered in the Fee column. Otherwise no income is shared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ExampleofSharedIncome.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Using_NEOSYS_Media_System&amp;diff=7312</id>
		<title>Using NEOSYS Media System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Using_NEOSYS_Media_System&amp;diff=7312"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T13:58:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Multi-brand plans and schedules==&lt;br /&gt;
A plan/schedule is per brand. If you must execute multiple brands on one plan or schedule then you must create a master brand, perhaps a “corporate brand”. You can further indicate the exact brands in various places within the body of the plan/schedule but in particular you can indicate the brand code per material, in the material table at the bottom of the plan/schedule data entry screen. This goes part way to supporting multi-brand plans/schedules. For example the media diary shows the brand per material however the billing analysis reports and most other NEOSYS documents are based on the overall brand of the plan/schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to create a media schedule in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can view a short video tutorial which explains how to create a media schedule in NEOSYS by clicking on http://youtu.be/iNm4TrUNl8M or visit the neosys youtube channel at http://www.youtube.com/user/neosysdubai/videos for all available tutorial videos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Copying Plans in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that on pasting into Excel etc it splits each line into multiple lines ONE PER DATE in the grid, but on pasting back into NEOSYS, it combines such lines back up into one schedule line where possible, i.e. the lines that are identical except for the date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying plans created in Excel to NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create an Excel sheet as shown below&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that the title name for each column in the excel sheet is as per the field name in the schedule file  &lt;br /&gt;
#*To save time you only need to put one of two words of the column title eg media or vehicle will have the same effect as Media Vehicle )&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy ALL the cells from the excel file including the header row &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image: planimport.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#In NEOSYS, open the required schedule, go to Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Schedules -&amp;gt; Schedule File&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the schedule details such as schedule no., campaign, company etc &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image: scheduleheader.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the media vehicle field and paste the copied cells&lt;br /&gt;
#*The cells will now be pasted to its respective fields &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image: schedulecontent.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying plans created in NEOSYS to Excel===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In NEOSYS, open the required schedule, go to Menu -&amp;gt; Media -&amp;gt; Schedules -&amp;gt; Schedule File&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the details from the vehicle lines that you require, as shown below. Crudely select the rows you want to copy or press Ctrl+A to select the whole document, then press Ctrl+C to copy &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Schcopy1.png|1500px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Open Excel and paste (Ctrl+V). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:excelop1.png|1500px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying vehicle lines in NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the schedule file, copy the vehicle line that you require. (Highlight the details and then press Ctrl+C or press Ctrl+A followed by Ctrl+C for copying all) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Schcopy2.png|1500px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to the Media Vehicle field in the schedule file where you wish to copy the details and paste (Ctrl+V). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Schcopy3.png|1500px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Copying a plan to a schedule in NEOSYS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Start a new schedule according to the usual convention in your company. Either enter a suitable new schedule code of your choosing or just press Enter or click New to get the next schedule number.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the &#039;Copy From Plan&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the number or code of the plan that you want to copy, or click the popup, or enter something to search for in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the month that you want to copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#Decide if you want to copy all or only some of the rows of the plan. Only rows with with ads on the month selected will be copied or selectable. However, if there are no numbers of ads on the plan, all rows will be copied or selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Copy All - to copy all rows of the plan&lt;br /&gt;
#*Copy Some - then select the rows that you want to copy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a plan or schedule numbering method==&lt;br /&gt;
Before creating a plan or schedule you need to decide whether to number it sequentially or code it manually. You don&#039;t have to stick to one method or the other every time and can use a combination of both methods depending on the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following principles apply to both schedules and plans, however plans are nearly always best suited to the manual coding method. Note that if you are using schedules like plans then they are also best suited to the manual coding method.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Automatic numbering===&lt;br /&gt;
If you use NEOSYS to process a random stream of orders from clients, for example a lot of newspaper or classified ads, you are forced to use the NEOSYS automatic numbering system. However this means that will later on you will always have to be given the schedule number in order to access it, or you will have to search for it within NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two ways to get automatic numbers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the New button&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter a single letter in the schedule number field (e.g. &amp;quot;X&amp;quot;) and press Enter. You will get a schedule number like X9999 i.e. the next sequence number in the series of whatever letter you chose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manual numbering===&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using NEOSYS for monthly or yearly scheduling for major clients, there is a great way to avoid the bother of always searching for schedule numbers. Just manually create your own schedule numbers according to some consistent logic just as you would when inventing a standard for naming spreadsheet or word processing files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is well worth learning this method and not just using the automatic schedule numbering system for everything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In all cases the schedule number should start with a basic structure like - BRANDCODE+YEAR+MONTH. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Brand code ideally remains constant, year and month will change as per period. The month is subject to change more frequently and hence placed towards the tail end of the schedule/plan number)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a COKE campaign in December 2010.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Single digit months should be entered like 08 for consistency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To help you get started with this method remember the pattern like this: (BBB represents the brand code, YY represents the year and MM represents the month)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 BBBYYMM (recommended - year first, month second)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some people prefer to reverse the year and the month as follows. However this can get very confusing if everybody in your company does it their own way is not consistent (does &amp;quot;1110&amp;quot; Nov 2010 or Oct 2011?)  so we recommend that you all stick to the &amp;quot;year first&amp;quot; &amp;quot;month second&amp;quot; concept since it allows correct alphabetic sorting if the need arises within or outside NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 BBBMMYY (not recommended - month first, year second)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not infrequently you may have more than one schedule for a particular brand on one month. In this case simply extend the basic schedule number according to some consistent logic. Here are some examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012B&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012C&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012TV&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012RADIO&lt;br /&gt;
 COKE1012ETC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you decide on your schedule number, just type it in the schedule number field and hit the enter key and select the option to create a new schedule (you may also copy an existing one).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Concepts and Calculation under Discounts and other charges==&lt;br /&gt;
===What is net amount?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Net Amount in the following discussion refers to the interim resultant amount after all the additions and deductions are made up to the point in question - ignoring any additions and deductions in columns to the right. It is therefore a varying amount (not shown on the screen or printout) and depends on where you are in the steps of progressive calculation towards the final Net Amount which is shown in the Net Unit Amount column on screen and printouts. If we say &amp;quot;10%N&amp;quot; (or just &amp;quot;10%&amp;quot; since N is always implied) then we mean 10% on the Net Amount as defined above. By comparison, &amp;quot;10%n&amp;quot; means 10% calculated on “one before net”, in other words, 10% of the intermediate net amount calculated *before* the last addition/deduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculation in discount/charges columns===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Code&lt;br /&gt;
!Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
!Format&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; g&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|It means &amp;quot;one after gross&amp;quot;. If &amp;quot;g&amp;quot; is appended it means the value is xx% of the value in one column after the gross column&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |xx%g&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; G&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|It means &amp;quot;on gross&amp;quot;.If &amp;quot;G&amp;quot; is appended it means the value is xx% on the gross amount&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |xx%G&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; n&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|It means &amp;quot;one before net&amp;quot;. If &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; is appended it means the value is xx% of the value in one column before the net column&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |xx%n&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; N&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|It means &amp;quot;on net&amp;quot;. If &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; is appended it means the value is xx% of the net amount&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |xx%N&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below are few examples of the usage of these codes. Check the calculations highlighted in green in particular, to understand the difference when using these codes. By default calculations in a column are carried out on the net value available from the previous column to the left. If the immediate previous column is empty, then the net amount from the next column available to the left is considered for calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The codes listed above can be used in any column under discounts and charges to override the default calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that sometimes different codes effectively mean the same thing. For example N, G, g or n in the first addition/deduction column all mean the same thing since there is nothing to work on but the Gross Unit Amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Significance of “g”====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example below we use “g” to calculate fee on Gross + &amp;quot;one after gross&amp;quot; which in this case is Loading. If loading were absent, then the value present in the next available column to the right of gross column is used as the &amp;quot;one after gross&amp;quot;. By default each column calculation is carried out on the net value. If &amp;quot;g&amp;quot; were absent, then fee would be calculated on the net. In this particular example we append &amp;quot;g&amp;quot; to fee and loading is present, hence fee is calculated on Gross + Loading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below is the screenshot of the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:g.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of Bill with the use of “g” is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;65%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |Bill&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Gross&lt;br /&gt;
!Loading&lt;br /&gt;
!Discount&lt;br /&gt;
!Commission&lt;br /&gt;
!Fee&lt;br /&gt;
!Total&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Value (AED)&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -11.2&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20.16&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5.6&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |86.24&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -10% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |86.24&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Cumulative&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |86.24&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |86.24&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Significance of “G”====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, we use “G” to calculate fee on gross. By default, fee would be calculated on the net obtained from the first available column to the left which in this case is the commission column. We specify “G” to override this default calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
Below is the screenshot of an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:g1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of Bill with the use of “G” is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;65%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |Bill&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Gross&lt;br /&gt;
!Loading&lt;br /&gt;
!Discount&lt;br /&gt;
!Commission&lt;br /&gt;
!Fee&lt;br /&gt;
!Total&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Value (AED)&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -11.2&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20.16&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.64&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -10% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.64&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Cumulative&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.64&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Significance of “n”====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example we use “n” to calculate fee on &amp;quot;one before net&amp;quot;. In this case Discount is the column which is &amp;quot;one before net&amp;quot; as the net value is obtained from the Commission column. If commission column was empty then Discount would be considered as the &amp;quot;net&amp;quot; column and Loading would be the &amp;quot;one before net&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default each column calculation is carried out on the net value. If &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; were absent, then fee would be calculated on the net from the commission column. In this particular instance where we append &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; to fee and commission and discount are present, fee is calculated on net available in the discount column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below is the screenshot of the example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:n.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of Bill with the use of “n” is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;65%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |Bill&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Gross&lt;br /&gt;
!Loading&lt;br /&gt;
!Discount&lt;br /&gt;
!Commission&lt;br /&gt;
!Fee&lt;br /&gt;
!Total&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Value (AED)&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -11.2&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20.16&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5.04&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.68&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -10% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.68&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Cumulative&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.68&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |85.68&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Significance of “N”====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use “N” to specify default calculation which is &amp;quot;on net&amp;quot;. Hence appending &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; or blank space has the same effect. In this example, fee is calculated on net after commission is subtracted. Below is the screenshot of an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:n1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of Bill with the use of “N” is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;65%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |Bill&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Gross&lt;br /&gt;
!Loading&lt;br /&gt;
!Discount&lt;br /&gt;
!Commission&lt;br /&gt;
!Fee&lt;br /&gt;
!Total&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Value (AED)&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -11.2&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20.16&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +4.03&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |84.67&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Explanation&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +12% of 100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -10% of 112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | -20% of 100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#00FF00&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | +5% of 80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |84.67&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |Cumulative&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |112&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |100.8&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |80.64&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |84.67&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; |84.67&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Commission based costing===&lt;br /&gt;
It’s the situation when the commission is not returned to the client and no fee is charged. An example is shown below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CBC.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example agency subtracts commission of 5% from the cost and not from the bill as commission is not returned to the client. No fee is charged in this transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fee based costing===&lt;br /&gt;
It’s the situation when commission is returned to client and a fee is charged. An example is shown below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FBC1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example agency subtracts commission of 5% from the bill and the cost, and charges the client a 15% fee for this transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Booking without showing all discounts and charges from the supplier==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can optionally issue media booking orders with certain discounts and charges omitted.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This allows the final net cost of media to be recorded in NEOSYS while not forcing the final net cost to be shown on booking orders.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
On media plans and schedules append the letter &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; (or &amp;quot;x&amp;quot;) to the discount or charge(s) that are not to show on the booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
For example, enter a discount as -5%X if it is not to be shown on the booking order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Handling Cost to Agency/Cost to Client in online media==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In online/digital media if the user is entering the impressions as a package on the rate card i.e. 1 rate for 500,000 impressions, then when handling free to agency / free to client there seems to be a problem and I have outlined an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agency cost: 500,000 impressions paid and 500,000 impressions free&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Client bill: 750,000 impressions paid and 250,000 impressions free&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case a package can&#039;t be made of 500,000 each as then it shows the same for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Solution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a costing issue so it should show in the existing costing columns as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:onlinemedia.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a date range for the appearance of Ads under any media type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clients may want to set a date range for appearance of their Ads. The can be many reasons for it, some of which are stated below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Handling long term bookings in Outdoor, Digital or continuous daily bookings in Newspapers:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In case you need to do bookings for a series of days i.e. 10 days or 4 weeks, especially with Outdoor, NEOSYS allows you to enter the same in the specification as follows, then follow instructions for entering material code given in the end:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,4 weeks&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,28 days&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,1 month&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,3 months&lt;br /&gt;
 Outdoor hoarding site near Airport,1 year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*TV Ad having no fixed date of appearance:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Creating Ads when the day of their appearance is not fixed. This mainly happens when Client wants to give an option to the channel to air the ad on any day of the week. In Television media sometimes there is no guarantee that the channel will place the ads especially when the dates are pin picked by clients. So giving the channel option to air any day of the week increases the chances of the Ads getting aired.e.g if you have an ad which you want to appear any day between 6th - 10th June, enter the date range in specification as follows and follow the instructions given in the end:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 TV commercial about nutrition,5 days&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have entered the specification, enter a Material code (e.g. X) on the start date of the campaign in the date grid box. You MUST enter a Material code(e.g. X) in the Date grid, for the date range to show in schedule printout.&lt;br /&gt;
This feature doesn&#039;t have an effect on the amounts, but instead NEOSYS calculates the start and stop date based on the date you select in the Date grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039; Below screenshots show how the entered date range is reflected in the booking orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Tvad.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Tvbooking.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Why doesn&#039;t the date range appear in Schedule printout even after entering booking specifications like shown above?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This issue is noticed in a schedule printout when the following settings are used:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A numeral is used in the date grid to select the start date&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;List&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; option is chosen under Date Format in the Media Schedule Printout screen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid this problem ensure that a Material code (e.g. X) is used in the date grid, to select start date of the campaign. This issue occurs only in schedule printout. The date range appears properly in booking orders and invoices even if a numeral is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to check an Ad status==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beside running a Media Diary to check the status of ads of a schedule, there are two other quicker methods. (In normal circumstances there is no difference between the three methods)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Hanging cursor over individual ad dates in a vehicle line on a schedule. (See [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Understanding_how_ads_appear_in_different_colors_in_the_schedule | Ad status colour coding]]) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:adstatus3.png|400px]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Updating (Changing/Removing) Ad date/material in Dates popup grid will open a different popup that shows ad status per ad on each line. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:adstatus.png|1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Handling booking of additional dates on already booked lines==&lt;br /&gt;
===Situation explained===&lt;br /&gt;
In a schedule which has a line which is already booked (eg. booking order no 10001) and later on you add another date to that line and book the same (eg. booking order no 10002) and thereafter you cancel or amend the 1st ad, the cancellation or amendment order mentions the booking order reference number of the 2nd booked ad (i.e. 10002). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution explained===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS is designed to only show the last booking order as it doesn&#039;t support handling of multiple dates with multiple orders as ad dates are not linked to the booking order number. In such a situation above, any new dates have to added on to new lines in the same schedule. Incase you do need to add the date to the same line, then it is recommended that you cancel the first ad and rebook both the ads again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to book a schedule with one vehicle in different lines with different currencies==&lt;br /&gt;
===Situation explained===&lt;br /&gt;
Vehicle ABC with currency USD was selected on line 1 of a schedule and thereafter you enter a couple of other lines for other vehicles. Later on you change the currency on the Vehicle File of vehicle ABC to be AED and enter another line in the schedule - i.e. line 4 for vehicle ABC with currency AED. Now, when you go to book this vehicle and click on the book button on the New Booking Order Page, the booking order will show only the 1st line of that vehicle as NEOSYS cannot send a consolidated booking order for the same vehicle with different currencies. &lt;br /&gt;
===Solution explained===&lt;br /&gt;
Hence you need to send separate booking orders for the same vehicle as they are in different currencies. So, either you can book vehicle ABC from line 1 first and click on the book button again to book the next one, or if you want to book vehicle ABC from line 4, just put in the line number of the schedule in the option below and click on book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:vehiclelineselection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to book specific lines in a schedule with multiple lines of that vehicle==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Situation explained===&lt;br /&gt;
Schedule has several lines for the same vehicle. You want to create separate booking orders for each line or a combination of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Solution explained===&lt;br /&gt;
You need to specify the line number while generating the booking order. In case you want only one line, then specify that line number in the Schedule lines Ids field. If you want a combination of lines then specify those line numbers in the Schedule lines Ids field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;To book a single line &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:book1line.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;To book a combination of lines&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:bookmultiline.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Showing the Brand/Product Name on Booking Orders for Sundry and Agency clients==&lt;br /&gt;
On booking orders for clients which are marked as “Sundry” or “Agency” clients, the brand name (from the NEOSYS Client/Brand File) is presented as the client name and the product name is omitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you still want the product name to show on the booking order enter the brand name on the Client/Brand file with a colon in the form “XYZ Corp:ABC”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Processing List of Wrong Ads==&lt;br /&gt;
Agencies have to cope with the fact that ads placed in publications can go wrong and hence NEOSYS has come up with the following feature to followup/generate a report of such wrong ads which need action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Certification File, generate the required list of ads pending certification, and in the space to enter the Certificate/Voucher/Page number, put the same wrapped in round brackets eg. (XXXX).&lt;br /&gt;
#Later on you can take the ordinary List of Ads Pending Certification report and it will include all those with the Certificate/Voucher/Page numbers in brackets just as if there was no number at all and thereafter you can follow-up on such ads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Pend-ads.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatic certification by importing Ad monitoring data==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Automatic certification can be done using data provided by advertising monitoring services. The data must be provided, in or converted, to a special format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The columns of the import file are matched with scheduled ads and is based on the following criteria:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;date&amp;quot;: Must exactly match the scheduled date (if the time is greater than 24:00 then 25:00 on 20/01/2010 does *not* match 01:00 on 21/01/2010, nor does it match 01:00 on 19/01/2010)&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;submedium&amp;quot; : Must be exact Vehicle Name or exact Alias in NEOSYS Vehicle File (case insensitive)&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;brand&amp;quot; : Must be exact Brand Name or exact Alias in NEOSYS Client/Brand File (case Insensitive)&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;duration&amp;quot; : Must match duration on NEOSYS Schedule File from -1 to +3 seconds&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;advertizing time&amp;quot; (*not* &amp;quot;program time&amp;quot;) : Must be no more than 30 mins before, or 30 mins after, the scheduled time or time range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case there are multiple matching ads in the schedule file for some ad in the import file then only the first scheduled ad found will be certified. The remainder will remain uncertified unless there are also multiple similar ads in the import file. Only if there are an equal number of matching ads in the import file will all the scheduled ads be certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case there is more than one similar ad in the import file for an ad that has been scheduled, then the balance of the imported ads will be loaded into the unmatched ads file and are listed for comparison while doing manual certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is advisable to use a fixed terminology when discussing automatic certification to avoid confusion between unmatched ads and uncertified ads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*“UNMATCHED ads” refers to monitored ads that NEOSYS has not been able to match up to scheduled ads in NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
*“UNCERTIFIED ads” are ads scheduled in NEOSYS which have a) not been matched with monitored ads automatically and b) not certified manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Invoicing “Certified Ads Only” after invoicing “All Ads”==&lt;br /&gt;
The following issue only occurs in old versions of NEOSYS. In newer versions of NEOSYS, invoiced ads which have not been certified will not be credited when requesting an invoice on &amp;quot;certified ads only&amp;quot; basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In old versions of NEOSYS, invoicing with the “certified ads only” options means both of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#“issue invoice for any uninvoiced ads that are certified”&lt;br /&gt;
#“issue credit note for any invoiced ads that aren’t certified” … this may be unexpected behaviour by the user&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In other words, if you invoice “certified ads only” then any ads already invoiced which do not have a certificate (either you already invoiced “All Ads” without certifying, or you removed the certificate number after invoicing “Certified Ads Only”) - will have a credit note issued for them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This behaviour allows issuing credit notes for specific ads by removing the certificate number without removing the ad from the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like issuing normal credit notes this also means that, even if schedules are fully invoiced and do not appear on the List of Schedules Pending Invoicing or List of Ads Pending Invoicing reports, you can get credit notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users need to learn that invoicing “Certified Ads only” after invoicing “All Ads” should be avoided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cancelling or Amending Incorrect Client Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Using_NEOSYS_Agency_System#Cancelling_or_Amending_Incorrect_Client_Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel and/or reissue an invoice using a credit note===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====To cancel an invoice permanently====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#From the Schedule File, remove the ads that need to be cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &amp;quot;Invoice&amp;quot; button to get the New Invoice screen&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Create Proforma&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
#Check that the credit note looks okay&lt;br /&gt;
#If the credit note looks okay, click on Invoice and the credit note will be created to reflect the cancelled ads&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====To cancel an invoice when you intend it to be reissued====&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS has a special option to enable you to create a credit note without removing the ads from a schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Schedule File, click on the “Invoice” button to get the New Invoice screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Credit Note date in the Invoice date field&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Invoice type option select “Credit Note”&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the “Create Proforma” button&lt;br /&gt;
#Check that the credit note looks okay.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the credit note looks okay, click on Invoice and the credit note will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To reissue an invoice, cancel the original invoice as above then amend the schedule (or the other way around – it doesn’t matter) and issue another invoice using the usual steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Credit Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Notes for reduction in billable cost===&lt;br /&gt;
A credit note is a document which indicates a reduction of the amount that a client has to pay versus invoices issued to date. It can be thought of an arithmetical negative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many varied reasons why this could be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Ads not appearing properly&lt;br /&gt;
*Accidental overbilling&lt;br /&gt;
*Discounting&lt;br /&gt;
*Renegotiation/Disputes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get a credit note for the required amount follow this procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Amend the schedule to show the final net position and billing amount to the client. This could involve removing ads or giving additional discounts etc.&lt;br /&gt;
#Use NEOSYS New Invoices and request a new &amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;. You will actually get a credit note representing the changes that you have made in step 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NB. Do NOT select Invoice Type: &amp;quot;Credit Note&amp;quot; since this is for totally reversing the total invoiced to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====What if none of the discount and charge columns are vacant?====&lt;br /&gt;
You can place multiple discounts in one column using / to separate the discounts eg &amp;quot;-5%/-1% discount&amp;quot;. An optional additional word/comment must be preceded by a space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Debit Notes for increase in billable amount===&lt;br /&gt;
Note that you can also get debit notes (supplementary invoices) in a similar manner to the above if you add ads or increase costs on the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you both add and subtract ads and costs then the additional &amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot; issued is either a debit note or credit note depending if the net effect increases or decreases the amount payable by the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Note for reissuing &amp;quot;amended&amp;quot; invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you wish to completely reissue an invoice which has been incorrectly raised. This can happen both when the erroneous invoice has been sent to the client and beforehand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good accounting procedure requires that once an invoice has been issued then it cannot simple be &amp;quot;cancelled&amp;quot; and forgotten as if it never existed. It must first be reversed by issuance of a &amp;quot;credit note&amp;quot; which is a kind of invoice with a negative amount. The logic is that there should not be two slightly documents floating around with the SAME INVOICE NUMBER as this can lead to accidental or deliberate confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, if an invoice has been issued wrongly and you wish to provide a corrected version then follow this procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do it in the TESTING AND TRAINING DATABASE first time or use PROFORMA option to ensure what you get is correct BEFORE actually issuing actual credit notes and invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Reversal the original invoice using NEOSYS &amp;quot;New Invoices&amp;quot; with Invoice Type option &amp;quot;Credit Note&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Amend the schedule to what you want it to be&lt;br /&gt;
#Get a new invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: It doesn&#039;t matter what order steps 1. and 2. are done. Even after you modify a schedule, NEOSYS remembers exactly what was invoiced and reverse what was invoiced, not what is on the schedule at the time of requesting the credit note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It doesn&#039;t matter how you amend a schedule, NEOSYS always keeps an internal copy of the schedule &amp;quot;as it was invoiced&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Issuing separate invoices or credit notes for selected discounts and charges===&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can optionally provide clients with a supplementary invoices/credit notes for certain discounts and charges. Without this option, all discounts and charges would have to show on a single invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
On media plans and schedules append the letter &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; (or &amp;quot;x&amp;quot;) to the discount or charge(s) that are not to show on the initial invoice and should appear on a separate invoice/credit note.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
For example, enter a discount as -5%X if it is to be shown on a separate credit note. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
When creating invoices to clients, an option is provided on the invoice creation form to allow raising of either a) the initial invoice only, or b) the final invoice/credit note only or c) both at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
You cannot raise the final invoice/credit note unless the initial invoice is actually raised. Note that this means that you cannot get proforma invoices for the &amp;quot;Both&amp;quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I issue a credit note for part of a schedule?=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are instances where a schedule can have single or multiple invoices and you would like to cancel the amount invoiced for only specific ads or part of a schedule in these invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To select specific ads in a schedule, you can use the Supplier and Vehicle filter on the New Media Invoices/Proformas page. This technique will help narrow down the selection to specific ads. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The way to get a credit note for part of a schedule with the intention of re-invoicing them again later is to delete them, get the credit note and then add them back. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the ads to be credited into a new temporary schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove the ads from the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#Ask for an invoice (you will get a credit note)&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the ads back into the schedule by copying from the temporary schedule&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the temporary schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not ideal but is only rarely required. If it becomes a frequent requirement then NEOSYS software may be developed to handle it more automatically. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are only a few ads, you can skip the use of the temporary schedule and do it all manually. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recreated ads will unfortunately be missing booking order information but the original booking orders are still stored in the schedule for inspection and if you must have a booking order number for the ads on the media diary then you can rebook them and put a note on the new order referring back to the original order. If you really want everything documented correctly you can issue a booking order cancellation at the same time as the credit note. These booking orders would not be sent to the media supplier of course. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Likewise any certification information will be lost when the ads are deleted. This will have to be re-entered after the ads are added back into the schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following way does not work in NEOSYS at the moment &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Decertify some invoiced ads&lt;br /&gt;
#Ask for an invoice for &amp;quot;certified ads only&amp;quot;  hoping to get a credit note for the ads that are no longer certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Removing unnecessary items from List of Schedules Pending Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Troubleshooting NEOSYS Media System#Removing unnecessary items from List of Schedules Pending Invoices|Removing unnecessary items from List of Schedules Pending Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Processing of Incoming Media Supplier Invoices==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Verifying incoming supplier invoices is a major agency task - possibly greater in effort than the issuing of the original bookings.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The general strategy in NEOSYS for checking is to have a kind of holding account (called a WIP/accrued costs account) which shows at all times the exact difference between the costs as-booked-and-invoiced-to-clients, and the actual cost of supplier invoices received and posted to date.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The most common practice is for NEOSYS to automatically open a single WIP/accrual account for each schedule. This allows pending costs to be fully managed and controlled within the system and with a full breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The WIP/accrual accounts are typically configured as open-item accounts to allow even greater control by seeing exactly which media costs are pending within a particular schedule. In a large schedule with many media this is important. Standard &amp;quot;allocation&amp;quot; of debits to credits within the schedule a/c closes off items one by one leaving pending items clearly visible. It may be easy to visually match debits and credits in any particular schedule WIP/accrual account and not bother with allocation.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Note: No manual correction journals should be posted directly into the income and costs account under any circumstances. All corrections must be made in the original Schedule File and corresponding financial correction journals will be generated automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why should Media Accrual Accounts be Open Item and not Balance Forward?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accrual Accounts are best thought of as identical to Supplier A/cs but for supplier invoices that expect to receive but have not received yet. If the accrual accounts are kept as a Balance Forward, then it is impossible to get a breakdown of the balance in accrual account especially in large schedules with many media. Without getting a breakdown of the balance in accrual account, it becomes very difficult to understand what all costs the supplier invoice has been received and what exactly are the pending costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WIP===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If supplier invoices are received and posted BEFORE the clients are invoiced then the WIP/accrued cost account will represent WIP, other words it will be a debit balance representing the total value of supplier invoices received and posted but which have yet to be billed to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Accrued Costs===&lt;br /&gt;
If the supplier invoices are received and posted only after the clients are invoiced then the WIP/accrued cost account will represent accrued costs, in order words it will be a credit balance representing the value of costs as-booked-and-invoiced-to-client for which supplier invoices have not been received and posted.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Process if a supplier invoice is acceptable===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Media Supplier Invoice File locate the ads related to the incoming supplier invoice and enter the supplier invoice number against each one.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the space for the supplier invoice numbers you can also put any additional information into the same field. E.g. For a magazine, you could put both the supplier invoice number and the page number where the ad actually appeared. While you are entering the supplier invoice numbers on the ads, check that the cost to the agency on screen - which corresponds to the bookings made - agrees with the supplier invoice that you are checking.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you find that the invoice amount is not correct or any discrepancy, NEOSYS has created a special function to distinguish/followup on such invoices for reporting purposes. To enable this feature for the concerned invoice, enter the supplier invoice number wrapped in round brackets eg. (XXXX). Later on, you can take the ordinary List of Ads Pending Supplier Invoice report and it will include all those with supplier invoice numbers in brackets just as if there was no supplier invoice number at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If the supplier invoice amount is correct - but doesn&#039;t match the booking order cost===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
#Amend the cost-to-agency columns on the schedule file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Request an invoice for the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting for an invoice generates the appropriate accounting entries for cost adjustments to the cost account and the cost accrual accounts in Finance module. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The invoice will generate a zero invoice &amp;quot;to the client&amp;quot; and a &amp;quot;cost invoice&amp;quot; for the difference between the original cost and the new cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario 1  - What are the entries created when the media purchase invoice is slightly more than the booking cost (after invoicing the client)?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eg. Booking order cost was  5000 AED, but the Media Purchase invoice was received for 5500 AED:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/c     DR  0&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/C     CR  0 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       DR  500 &lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        CR  500 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario 2 - What are the entries created when the media purchase invoice is slightly less than the purchase order (after invoicing the client)?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eg. Booking order cost was  5000 AED, but the Media Purchase invoice was received for 4500 AED:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/c     DR  0&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/C     CR  0 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       DR  -500 &lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        CR  -500&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If the supplier invoice is acceptable for posting===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the supplier invoices directly into the Finance Purchase Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supplier A/c                     Credit 100&lt;br /&gt;
Schedule/Accrual A/c        Debit 100&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Locating long overdue Supplier Invoices/Credit Notes===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
- If you have one accrual a/c per schedule automatically created by NEOSYS&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Print the Trial Balance of the Media WIP/Accrual Ledger and investigate the older accounts at the top of the report using the Supplier Invoice File or List of Ads Pending Supplier Invoices report.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
- If you have one accrual a/c per supplier&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Print the Detailed Ledger A/c (Outstanding Items Only) of the Media WIP/Accrual Ledger and investigate the older items using the Supplier Invoice File or List of Ads Pending Supplier Invoices report.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Writing-off long overdue Supplier Invoices/Credit Notes===&lt;br /&gt;
Follow exactly the same steps as in the above section &amp;quot;If the supplier invoice amount is correct - but doesn&#039;t match the booking order cost&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note-&#039;&#039; NEOSYS will generate cost adjustment in the usual media cost accounts but you may like to amend the journal before posting to go to some other a/c such as “other income – supplier invoices not received”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Posting media supplier invoices before issuing schedules to the client===&lt;br /&gt;
Assuming that you are accruing media costs by schedule and not by vehicle or supplier then the contra account of the supplier invoice posting will be the schedule code or, if the schedules codes are pure numbers then SCH9999 where 9999 is the number of the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supplier invoices posted before issuing invoices to client are work in progress (assets) but, in NEOSYS common practice, we still post them into the Media Accruals Ledger which could more properly be called Media Accruals/WIP Ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The accrual account for the schedule is created as soon as the schedule is approved and not only when the invoice is issued to the client. Schedule approval happens in practice automatically at the time of the first booking. Therefore unless you book a schedule (or specifically enter the approval date on the schedule file, there will be no accrual account created for you to post the supplier invoice into. This is logical since if you haven&#039;t booked or specifically approved a schedule then you should arguably not be able to post supplier invoices for that schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Processing wrong Incoming Media Supplier Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
If you find that the invoice amount is not correct or any discrepancy, NEOSYS has created a special function to distinguish/followup on such invoices for reporting purposes. To enable this feature follow the procedure below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Supplier Invoice File, generate the required list of ads pending supplier invoices, and in the space to enter the supplier invoice number, put the same wrapped in round brackets eg. (XXXX).&lt;br /&gt;
#Later on you can take the ordinary List of Ads Pending Supplier Invoice report and it will include all those with supplier invoice numbers in brackets just as if there was no supplier invoice number at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Accounting entries created by the Media System==&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice journal entries are created automatically but are left un-posted under Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entries - Media Invoices/Credit Notes (INV).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These entries are generated automatically by NEOSYS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entries when client is invoice for 120 with cost 100===&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/C             Dr.  + 120&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/c             Cr.  - 120&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/C               Dr.  + 100&lt;br /&gt;
 Media Accrual A/C      Cr.  - 100 (Schedule a/c)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Media accrual is a provision done as you haven’t received supplier invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entries on received a supplier invoice that media has accepted===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039;But while entering the Media Purchase Invoice (Supplier Invoice) you need to pass a manual entry under Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journal &amp;gt; Journal Entry - select Media Purchase Invoice, and enter the journal as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Media Accrual A/c      Dr. + 100 (Schedule a/c)&lt;br /&gt;
 Supplier A/c           Cr. - 100 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed note on this topic, refer to [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Processing_of_Incoming_Media_Supplier_Invoices | Processing of Incoming Media Supplier Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Allocating amounts in the accruals a/c against the supplier invoice====&lt;br /&gt;
=====At the same time of receiving/posting the supplier invoice=====&lt;br /&gt;
To allocate the accruals against an incoming supplier invoice, you may click on the ALLOC VCHS column in the Media Purchase Invoice journal and from the pop-up list of unallocated items, click on Allocate and save the document - these items will not appear as outstanding in the accrual ledger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====After receiving/posting the supplier invoice=====&lt;br /&gt;
Many a times at the time you receive the supplier invoice you are unable to allocate the same against the outstanding items in the accrual account. Hence after posting the same and/or at a date you can go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers Allocation and enter the accrual account number and click on OK - here from the unallocated supplier invoice amounts, select the one you want to allocate by clicking on Allocate button and thereafter it pops up a list of all accruals which are allocatable. From this list select the ones you want to allocate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using NEOSYS VAT/Sales Tax Accounting for Media==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Understanding_VAT/Sales_Tax_in_the_NEOSYS_finance_module#Configuring_NEOSYS_to_handle_VAT.2FSales_Tax| Configuring VAT/Sales Tax in Finance module]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up standard Sales Tax Percentage===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the default VAT/Sales Tax code to be used in the Schedule File.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:MediaconfigFileInvVAT.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create a schedule with VAT/Tax%===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If a standard VAT/Sales Tax% is not defined in the Media Configuration File then you must manually add the tax code at the bottom of every schedule that should have tax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same tax code will apply to all ads in the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:scheduleFileVATCode.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create the invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you do this, Issue a proforma invoice first to check that the tax appears correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:vat3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Report on Cost VAT Tax===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get a report on the media cost tax make sure that schedule follows these requirements and then create Media Diary report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All these points MUST be met, otherwise cost tax will not appear in Media Diary report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. &amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; flag should not be used on the schedule line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Schedule has to have any tax code entered, even OZ (0%).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Company file main market agrees with the vehicle file market code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Supplier market code is either blank or agrees with the vehicle market code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the market code is &amp;quot;UAE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;KSA&amp;quot; then system will add 5% to COST TAX. HARDCODED currently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Will be configured per period in the Company File soon and not hard coded since rates and countries may/will change in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Finance Entries===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Entries when client is invoice for 120 with cost 100 and 5% VAT====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/C              Dr.  + 126&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/c              Cr.  - 120&lt;br /&gt;
 VAT Control A/C         Cr.  - 6&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/C                Dr.  + 100&lt;br /&gt;
 Media Accrual A/C       Cr.  - 100 (Schedule a/c)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Media accrual is a provision done as you haven’t received supplier invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Entries on received a supplier invoice that media has accepted====&lt;br /&gt;
When entering the Media Purchase Invoice (Supplier Invoice) you need to pass a manual entry under Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journal &amp;gt; Journal Entry - select Media Purchase Invoice, and enter the journal as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Media Accrual A/c       Dr. + 100 (Schedule a/c)&lt;br /&gt;
 VAT Control A/C         Dr. + 5&lt;br /&gt;
 Supplier A/c            Cr. - 105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed note on this topic, refer to [[Using_NEOSYS_Media_System#Processing_of_Incoming_Media_Supplier_Invoices | Processing of Incoming Media Supplier Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Post the Sales Invoice Journal created===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In Finance Journals, check that the tax columns appear, the tax amount is correct, and then post it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:vat4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check that the Sale Tax A/c is correct===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
It should show an entry for the tax liability incurred by issuing and posting the above sales invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:vat5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to record VAT for FOC (free of cost) ads==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently in NEOSYS, it is not possible to charge ads free of cost and only charge the VAT amount. Although this can be achieved easily using the Finance module, the below solution is for users who require an invoice for the same purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Tax code &#039;OF&#039; in this situation. Tax description: Reversal of Net amount for FOC ads, Tax amount: 0%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Estimate file, enter the FOC amount with the usual 5% tax (OS) in the first line. In the second line, enter the negative of the same FOC amount, this time with 0% tax (tax code OF). The net effect is that the total payable amount will be only the VAT amount recorded in the first line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1st line of Estimate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount: 100.00 (FOC amount)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT Code: OS (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT Amount: 5.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2nd line of Estimate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount -100.00 (Reversal of FOC amount)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT Code: OF (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT Amount: 0.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TOTAL:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Total amount billable before VAT 0.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Total VAT billable 5.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Total amount payable after VAT 5.00&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to handle production costs on media rate cards==&lt;br /&gt;
Some media like out of home often has production costs which vary in parallel with the base cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One solution in NEOSYS is to place two columns on the rate card. Then on the schedule select the first column while mentally remembering the second amount, then simply type the second amount into the “Loading” or “Other” column. This is likely to be automated in the next version NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are any discounts and charges and they apply only to the base cost then placing the production charges in the “Other” column makes it clear to everybody that they do not take part in the discounting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ratecardproduction.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifying Gross Unit Bill Amount to Client in Ratecards==&lt;br /&gt;
Normally the Gross Unit Bill Amount (in other words, the gross unit cost to the client) is taken from whichever column the user selected from the ratecard when creating media plans or schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#You may specify, in the ratecard&#039;s Client Rates section, which is the default ratecard column to be used per client and/or per brand but this can be overridden during selection.&lt;br /&gt;
#If there is a column titled BILL or CLIENT in the ratecard, and there is no default Ratecard Column specified for the client and/or brand, then that column will be used for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifying Gross Unit Cost to Agency in Ratecards==&lt;br /&gt;
Normally the Gross Unit Cost Amount (in other words, the gross unit cost to the agency) is taken as a copy of the Gross Unit Bill Amount to the Client, however NEOSYS can get a different rate in a number of ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Agency Ratecard Column can be specified per client and/or per brand in the Client Rates section of the ratecard&lt;br /&gt;
#Otherwise, if there is a column titled COST or X in one of the columns after (to the right) of the column selected for the client.&lt;br /&gt;
#The ratecard used to decide the agency costs may be different from the ratecard for the client. Use the Vehicle Cost File to specify the date of the rate card that the agency uses.&lt;br /&gt;
#You can specify a &amp;quot;column offset&amp;quot; in the Vehicle Cost File. For example a cost offset of 10 would mean that if the first ten columns are rates for the client then the second 10 columns would the costs to the agency in parallel. ie if the client rate is taken from column 3 then the agency rate will be taken from column 13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restricting Access to Selected Ratecard columns==&lt;br /&gt;
In the Authorisation File put a task called RATECARD ACCESS “XYZ” where XYZ is the title of the ratecard column eg “COST”. The quotes are required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add an appropriate lock to the task and give the key to the authorised users only in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively you can restrict access to the first 10 columns with a task RATECARD ACCESS A (with no quotes). The second 10 columns can be restricted with RATECARD ACCESS B .. and so on up to the current maximum of 40 columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Use and Manage Materials==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to assign a material to an ad, simply type a letter to identify that material, into the Dates calender of the schedule as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Material_calender.jpg| 1200x450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the schedule is saved, the material automatically appears in the [[Schedule_file#Section_7| table of materials on the bottom of the schedule file]]. Also, a corresponding [[Material_File| Material File]] is automatically created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Materials can be tracked using the  [[List_of_Materials| List of Materials]] report in the Media --&amp;gt; Materials menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can also be [[Setting_up_and_Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Pending_Materials| set up to send out an email alert warning about the list of pending material]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using Media Material File==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Material_File| Material file]] records are automatically generated from the schedules you enter.The material number is the schedule number (E.g. SCH1001) followed by a fullstop and material letter (e.g. A,B,C) i.e. SCH1001.A . One material is created for each material letter present on the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a schedule reuses material from previous schedules you must enter the previous schedule number in the list of materials at the bottom of the schedule file. This will prevent new material from being created automatically by the new schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you mark materials in the [[Material_File| Material file]] (or [[Schedule_file| Schedule File]]) as having been delivered to you then [[Configuring_NEOSYS_Media_System#Pending_Materials| NEOSYS can alert you daily by email about material due for delivery by deadline date]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Exporting to other finance systems]]==&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting Invoices in Excel Format==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using NEOSYS Invoices menu, Audit Invoices/List&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To “export” we run the normal audit procedure but with output format=xls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also get an html version of the invoices but this currently doesn’t show all the third party system alias codes (only shows first system alias code entry).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classic concepts from financial audit are used to ensure a complete and unduplicated stream import files and invoices. NEOSYS uses system controlled sequential audit numbering so that you can ensure that you have all the invoices up to a certain point and be confident that there are no duplications. The system still works when invoice numbering is discontinuous for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;(Optional/Repeatable)&#039;&#039; EXPORT WITHOUT CLOSING&lt;br /&gt;
#*Followed by visual inspection and maybe a *trial* (not real!) import into other system.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Any new invoices generated afterwards will be appended to the old batch.&lt;br /&gt;
#EXPORT AND CLOSE&lt;br /&gt;
#*Closing will “finalise” the audit batch ensuring that the same invoices will not be exported again.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To “re-export” a prior batch, specify the right audit number – for example the one prior to the current audit no.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If re-exporting, then the current latest other-system client/supplier alias codes will be used&lt;br /&gt;
#Import the exported file/audit batch into your other system.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If any other-system client/supplier alias codes are wrong then fix the codes in NEOSYS and repeat from the previous step&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat from 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Exporting_Invoices_in_Excel_Format.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
To find the current audit number, run the audit report in html format WITHOUT closing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All invoices are appended to current latest audit batch no. Audit batch no starts from “1” per company if invoices are numbered by company, or per database if not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you export and don’t close then any new invoices raise subsequently will be APPENDED to the current latest audit batch no.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you export and don’t close then you should *not* import that batch into your other system (except perhaps on a trial basis) because the next export will contain the same invoices PLUS any new ones. If you do try to import both the old and new version of the same audit batch number then before you import the new version of it, you must edit out the invoices that you have already imported. If you attempt to import both the old and the new extended version of the same audit batch number without doing any editing then your import will:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Fail if it is capable of recognizing duplicate voucher numbers, or&lt;br /&gt;
#Import duplicates transactions if it cannot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you close, then all new invoices will start being appended to a new batch of invoices with a new audit no.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Getting media executive sales commission statements==&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can calculate both due and pending commissions as a percentage of the net cost to the client for each ad. The percentage can be determined by the number of days between the invoice and the receipt. Client receipts must be entered into the NEOSYS finance module and allocated against the invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The commission structure must be setup beforehand in the Media Configuration File as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Commission.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the commission structure is setup, use the Media Diary to get commission statements. Make sure that you select one or both of the options “paid” or “unpaid” otherwise you will not get any receipt or commission columns&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media Diary01.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will give you a report something like the following which shows the total commission due and pending per executive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media Diary02.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click on the summary total lines to see the details including the commission % and amount per ad as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Media Diary03.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selling TV spots==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This procedure is only for when you want full control over positioning of ads in programs and breaks. It is not required for simple TV ad sales.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up the master files===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a vehicle====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots6.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media FAQ#How do I book one media vehicle through different suppliers.3F|Click here for how to handle media vehicle with multiple suppliers]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a rate card with standard price brackets====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specify the station programs and break times/durations for every date (there is a way to import as well)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots8.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entering orders from clients===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Enter ads roughly into programs (not into breaks yet)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must follow the 3 step process below. Specification comes automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: tvspots1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Positioning ads in breaks===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Closer to the actual date position all the ads precisely into breaks====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Lets have a look at all ads on July 5th====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Select an un-positioned ad====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Finally select where in the break this ad should appear compared to other ads.====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is only one break in this program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Issuing orders to the stations===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close to the day of execution issue an order to the station&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots9.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:tvspots10.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Understanding the Terminology of words like Invoice/Costs in the Media System==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS practice if you say &amp;quot;invoices&amp;quot; without any further clarification this means and only means SALES invoices. If you said MEDIA invoices (intending to mean media module invoices and to clarify from job module invoices) then there is confusion because the advertising industry standard terminology for NEOSYS media suppliers AND NEOSYS media vehicles is &amp;quot;media&amp;quot; so &amp;quot;media invoices&amp;quot; sounds much like &amp;quot;invoices from the media&amp;quot; which are of course Purchase Invoices. Therefore we MUST call invoices issued out of the NEOSYS media module &amp;quot;Invoices&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Media Sales Invoices&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Media Module Invoices&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;Media Invoices&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When mentioning Cost in NEOSYS, Cost alone means always and only Cost to Agency but you can say Cost to Client/Cost to Agency if you want to spell it out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Understanding how ads appear in different colors in the schedule==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Color shows by preference in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Brown - Scheduled only&lt;br /&gt;
#Green - Booked&lt;br /&gt;
#Blue - Certified&lt;br /&gt;
#Orange - Supplier invoice entered&lt;br /&gt;
#Black - Invoiced&lt;br /&gt;
#Gray - Full Credit Note&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. when you create a new ad in a schedule it will appear as Red. If an ad has been invoiced, it will show as black regardless of if the ad has been certified or not or it has been booked or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A box around the ad means certified wrong or problem on supplier invoice (they are entered without round brackets to indicate that there is some problem)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below screenshot displays how these different type of Ads appear in the schedule. Wiki explains how to schedule/book/certify/certify wrong or invoice ads etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: adcolor1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: adcolor2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatic CPM calculation in Schedule File== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the letters &amp;quot;CPM&amp;quot; are present anywhere in the Specification field in the schedule file, then Gross Unit Cost is converted into Net Unit Cost using a factor of 0.001.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So you can put something like &amp;quot;IMPRESSION CPM*&amp;quot; in the Vehicle Ratecard for automated calculation of cost for digital ads (as shown in screenshot below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UsingRatecardCPM1.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the above is entered in the ratecard file, then follow the below steps to use the ratecard entry in a schedule file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In Schedule file select ratecard. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:UsingRatecardCPM2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Then select the option required from that ratecard entry. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:UsingRatecardCPM3.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter number of impressions in the popup (this popup appears only if &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; is entered in the ratecard file &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:UsingRatecardCPM4.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Then the net unit amount gets calculated as shown below. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[image:UsingRatecardCPM5.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Income Sharing==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This NEOSYS feature provides a method to share any % of income from a particular client between companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g Company A and B are handling two different Newspaper campaigns for ClientX, a % of the fee amount can then be given to company Z.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prerequisites: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Client &amp;amp; Brand File, the two fields, &amp;quot;Company&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;%Share of Fee&amp;quot; are used to dictated what percentage of bill fee to share and with which company. See [[Client_%26_Brand_File#Income_Sharing | Client &amp;amp; Brand File Income Sharing]]&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Media Configuration file, under section Media Accounting, enter the Media Income Share account code. See [[Media_Configuration_File#Income_Share_A.2Fc_No | Media Config Income Share]]&lt;br /&gt;
*In the company file of the company sharing the income, there must be an inter-company account between that company and the company to share income with. See [[Company_File#Other_Companies | Setup intercompany account]]&lt;br /&gt;
*A % or amount must be entered into the Fee column on the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Automatically generated inter-company entries will only be generated if the schedule&#039;s bill has a fee amount or % entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The amount to be shared is a % of the fee entered in the schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Screenshot below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Media Configuration file: Define which media type income account you want the companies to share.&lt;br /&gt;
#Client &amp;amp; Brand file: Define which company should receive shared income from other companies and what % of the bill fee should be shared.&lt;br /&gt;
#Schedule file: Make sure that an amount or % is entered in the Fee column. Otherwise no income is shared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ExampleofSharedIncome.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7311</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7311"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T07:36:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ledger Account filters :===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display transactions either by a range of dates or use the Period range entered in the Settings. Date range filters by the transaction dates entered in the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Opt for either a detailed report which is mainly for internal usage or a simplified report for external purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display &#039;Despatch Date&#039;, &#039;Approval Date&#039; and &#039;Due Date&#039;. The dates are generated from the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Billing Analysis columns (eg: Client, Supplier, Type etc.) will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose &#039;Yes&#039; to display on all account types or &#039;No&#039; to suppress it on all types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Per A/c&#039; checkbox to force headers for each account on the report, treating each account as a separate page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the preferred form of output between html (with or without letterhead) and pdf (portrait or landscape). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Account type(s):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose between options to display required type of transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements during the period: Transactions that occur in the date or period range specified. Displays all details of the transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements totalled by type of voucher: Same report as above but displays only the type of voucher and the total, suppressing the reference and the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the end of the period: Displays entries/transactions that are pending allocation at the end of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the beginning of the period: Displays all unallocated entries/transactions from the beginning of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items: Displays all transactions that include open item accounts. Provides an item-wise balance showing the transactions in the specified account and it&#039;s contra-account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items (current period only): Same as above option but will display only transactions in the current period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overdue items: Displays all transactions which are overdue past the Due date entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a due date. A due date is required if Account type &#039;Overdue items only&#039; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the outstanding subtotaled by month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contra accounts are accounts with an opposite balance to the selected accounts. Enter any contra accounts which is required to be included or excluded in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank to display all journal types or choose a specific journal type to filter transactions by it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax/VAT category(ies):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select from list of tax codes to display only transactions that use the selected tax code(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “By company ”checkbox to generate a consolidated report of the multiple companies selected with all transactions grouped by the Company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7310</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7310"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T07:35:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Ledger Account */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available Filters :===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display transactions either by a range of dates or use the Period range entered in the Settings. Date range filters by the transaction dates entered in the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Opt for either a detailed report which is mainly for internal usage or a simplified report for external purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display &#039;Despatch Date&#039;, &#039;Approval Date&#039; and &#039;Due Date&#039;. The dates are generated from the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Billing Analysis columns (eg: Client, Supplier, Type etc.) will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose &#039;Yes&#039; to display on all account types or &#039;No&#039; to suppress it on all types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Per A/c&#039; checkbox to force headers for each account on the report, treating each account as a separate page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Select the preferred form of output between html (with or without letterhead) and pdf (portrait or landscape). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Account type(s):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Choose between options to display required type of transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements during the period: Transactions that occur in the date or period range specified. Displays all details of the transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements totalled by type of voucher: Same report as above but displays only the type of voucher and the total, suppressing the reference and the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the end of the period: Displays entries/transactions that are pending allocation at the end of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the beginning of the period: Displays all unallocated entries/transactions from the beginning of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items: Displays all transactions that include open item accounts. Provides an item-wise balance showing the transactions in the specified account and it&#039;s contra-account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items (current period only): Same as above option but will display only transactions in the current period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overdue items: Displays all transactions which are overdue past the Due date entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a due date. A due date is required if Account type &#039;Overdue items only&#039; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
View the outstanding subtotaled by month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Contra accounts are accounts with an opposite balance to the selected accounts. Enter any contra accounts which is required to be included or excluded in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank to display all journal types or choose a specific journal type to filter transactions by it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax/VAT category(ies):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Select from list of tax codes to display only transactions that use the selected tax code(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “By company ”checkbox to generate a consolidated report of the multiple companies selected with all transactions grouped by the Company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7309</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7309"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T07:33:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Available Filters : */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available Filters :===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display transactions either by a range of dates or use the Period range entered in the Settings. Date range filters by the transaction dates entered in the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Opt for either a detailed report which is mainly for internal usage or a simplified report for external purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display &#039;Despatch Date&#039;, &#039;Approval Date&#039; and &#039;Due Date&#039;. The dates are generated from the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Billing Analysis columns (eg: Client, Supplier, Type etc.) will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose &#039;Yes&#039; to display on all account types or &#039;No&#039; to suppress it on all types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Per A/c&#039; checkbox to force headers for each account on the report, treating each account as a separate page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Select the preferred form of output between html (with or without letterhead) and pdf (portrait or landscape). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Account type(s):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Choose between options to display required type of transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements during the period: Transactions that occur in the date or period range specified. Displays all details of the transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements totalled by type of voucher: Same report as above but displays only the type of voucher and the total, suppressing the reference and the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the end of the period: Displays entries/transactions that are pending allocation at the end of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the beginning of the period: Displays all unallocated entries/transactions from the beginning of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items: Displays all transactions that include open item accounts. Provides an item-wise balance showing the transactions in the specified account and it&#039;s contra-account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items (current period only): Same as above option but will display only transactions in the current period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overdue items: Displays all transactions which are overdue past the Due date entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a due date. A due date is required if Account type &#039;Overdue items only&#039; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
View the outstanding subtotaled by month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Contra accounts are accounts with an opposite balance to the selected accounts. Enter any contra accounts which is required to be included or excluded in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank to display all journal types or choose a specific journal type to filter transactions by it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax/VAT category(ies):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Select from list of tax codes to display only transactions that use the selected tax code(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “By company ”checkbox to generate a consolidated report of the multiple companies selected with all transactions grouped by the Company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7308</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7308"/>
		<updated>2021-07-29T10:13:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Available Filters : */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available Filters :===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display transactions either by a range of dates or use the Period range entered in the Settings. Date range filters by the transaction dates entered in the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Opt for either a detailed report which is mainly for internal usage or a simplified report for external purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display &#039;Despatch Date&#039;, &#039;Approval Date&#039; and &#039;Due Date&#039;. The dates are generated from the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Billing Analysis columns (eg: Client, Supplier, Type etc.) will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose &#039;Yes&#039; to display on all account types or &#039;No&#039; to suppress it on all types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Per A/c&#039; checkbox to force headers for each account on the report, treating each account as a separate page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the preferred form of output between html (with or without letterhead) and pdf (portrait or landscape). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Account type(s):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose between options to display required type of transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements during the period: Transactions that occur in the date or period range specified. Displays all details of the transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements totalled by type of voucher: Same report as above but displays only the type of voucher and the total, suppressing the reference and the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the end of the period: Displays entries/transactions that are pending allocation at the end of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the beginning of the period: Displays all unallocated entries/transactions from the beginning of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items: Displays all transactions that include open item accounts. Provides an item-wise balance showing the transactions in the specified account and it&#039;s contra-account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items (current period only): Same as above option but will display only transactions in the current period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overdue items: Displays all transactions which are overdue past the Due date entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a due date. A due date is required if Account type &#039;Overdue items only&#039; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the outstanding subtotaled by month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contra accounts are accounts with an opposite balance to the selected accounts. Enter any contra accounts which is required to be included or excluded in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank to display all journal types or choose a specific journal type to filter transactions by it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax/VAT category(ies):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select from list of tax codes to display only transactions that use the selected tax code(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “By company ”checkbox to generate a consolidated report of the multiple companies selected with all transactions grouped by the Company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7306</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7306"/>
		<updated>2021-07-28T13:15:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available Filters :===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display transactions either by a range of dates or use the Period range entered in the Settings. Date range filters by the transaction dates entered in the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Opt for either a detailed report which is mainly for internal usage or a simplified report for external purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display &#039;Despatch Date&#039;, &#039;Approval Date&#039; and &#039;Due Date&#039;. The dates are generated from the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Billing Analysis columns (eg: Client, Supplier, Type etc.) will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose &#039;Yes&#039; to display on all account types or &#039;No&#039; to suppress it on all types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Per A/c&#039; checkbox to force headers for each account on the report, treating each account as a separate page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the preferred form of output between html (with or without letterhead) and pdf (portrait or landscape). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Account type(s):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose between options to display required type of transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements during the period: Transactions that occur in the date or period range specified. Displays all details of the transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements totalled by type of voucher: Same report as above but displays only the type of voucher and the total, suppressing the reference and the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the end of the period: Displays entries/transactions that are pending allocation at the end of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the beginning of the period: Displays all unallocated entries/transactions from the beginning of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items: Displays all transactions that include open item accounts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items (current period only): Displays all transactions in the current period that include open item accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overdue items: Displays all transactions which are overdue past the Due date entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a due date. A due date is required if Account type &#039;Overdue items only&#039; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the outstanding subtotaled by month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contra accounts are accounts with an opposite balance to the selected accounts. Enter any contra accounts which is required to be included or excluded in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank to display all journal types or choose a specific journal type to filter transactions by it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax/VAT category(ies):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select from list of tax codes to display only transactions that use the selected tax code(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “By company ”checkbox to generate a consolidated report of the multiple companies selected with all transactions grouped by the Company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7305</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7305"/>
		<updated>2021-07-28T13:14:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available Filters :===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display transactions either by a range of dates or use the Period range entered in the Settings. Date range filters by the transaction dates entered in the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Opt for either a detailed report which is mainly for internal usage or a simplified report for external purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display &#039;Despatch Date&#039;, &#039;Approval Date&#039; and &#039;Due Date&#039;. The dates are generated from the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Billing Analysis columns (eg: Client, Supplier, Type etc.) will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose &#039;Yes&#039; to display on all account types or &#039;No&#039; to suppress it on all types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Per A/c&#039; checkbox to force headers for each account on the report, treating each account as a separate page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the preferred form of output between html (with or without letterhead) and pdf (portrait or landscape). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Account type(s):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose between options to display the type of transactions required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements during the period: Transactions that occur in the date or period range specified. Displays all details of the transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movements totalled by type of voucher: Same report as above but displays only the type of voucher and the total, suppressing the reference and the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the end of the period: Displays entries/transactions that are pending allocation at the end of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outstanding items at the beginning of the period: Displays all unallocated entries/transactions from the beginning of the selected period range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items: Displays all transactions that include open item accounts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open items (current period only): Displays all transactions in the current period that include open item accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overdue items: Displays all transactions which are overdue past the Due date entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a due date. A due date is required if Account type &#039;Overdue items only&#039; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View the outstanding subtotaled by month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contra accounts are accounts with an opposite balance to the selected accounts. Enter any contra accounts which is required to be included or excluded in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank to display all journal types or choose a specific journal type to filter transactions by it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax/VAT category(ies):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select from list of tax codes to display only transactions that use the selected tax code(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “By company ”checkbox to generate a consolidated report of the multiple companies selected with all transactions grouped by the Company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7301</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7301"/>
		<updated>2021-07-28T11:36:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available Filters :===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display transactions either by a range of dates or use the Period range entered in the Settings. Date range filters by the transaction dates entered in the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Opt for either a detailed report which is mainly for internal usage or a simplified report for external purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display &#039;Despatch Date&#039;, &#039;Approval Date&#039; and &#039;Due Date&#039;. The dates are generated from the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Billing Analysis columns (eg: Client, Supplier, Type etc.) will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose &#039;Yes&#039; to display on all account types or &#039;No&#039; to suppress it on all types. &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Display each account separately in different pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Select the preferred form of output between html (with or without letterhead) and pdf (portrait or landscape). &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Enter a due date. A due date is required if Account type &#039;Overdue items only&#039; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
View the outstanding subtotaled by month.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Contra accounts are accounts with an opposite balance to the selected accounts. Enter any contra accounts which is required to be included or excluded in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank to display all journal types or choose a specific journal type to filter transactions by it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax/VAT category(ies):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select from list of tax codes to display only transactions that use the selected tax code(s).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “By company ”checkbox to generate a consolidated report of the multiple companies selected with all transactions grouped by the Company.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7300</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7300"/>
		<updated>2021-07-28T10:55:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Ledger Account */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available Filter options:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the required Date range or use the Period range entered in Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Opt for either a detailed report which is mainly for internal usage or a simplified report for external purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Choose to display &#039;Despatch Date&#039;, &#039;Approval Date&#039; and &#039;Due Date&#039;. The dates are generated from the Voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Billing Analysis columns (eg: Client, Supplier, Type etc.) will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose &#039;Yes&#039; to display on all account types or &#039;No&#039; to suppress it on all types. &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Display each account separately in different pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Select the preferred form of output between html (with or without letterhead) and pdf (portrait or landscape). &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Enter a due date. A due date is required if Account type &#039;Overdue items only&#039; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
View the outstanding subtotaled by month.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Contra accounts are accounts with an opposite balance to the selected accounts. Enter any contra accounts which is required to be included or excluded in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Leave blank to display all journal types or choose a specific journal type to filter transactions by it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “By company ”checkbox to generate a consolidated report of the multiple companies selected with all transactions grouped by the Company.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7299</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7299"/>
		<updated>2021-07-27T14:00:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Additional Options */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available Filter options:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Leave the &amp;quot;Use financial period from settings&amp;quot; checkbox ticked, or uncheck and enter from and to periods to filter transactions&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose one format – detailed or simplified&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the the &amp;quot;Due Date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dispatch Date&amp;quot; checkboxes if you wish to view the Due date and Dispatch Date columns. The due date and the dispatch date is picked from the voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Billing Analysis columns will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose Yes to force it on all other Balance Forward accounts and No to suppress it on reports of all account types.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick &amp;quot;Per A/c&amp;quot; checkbox if you want printout of each account on a different page. This options forces printing of header after each account.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose stationery – Either pre-printed  option which suppresses the header or blank option which forces the printing of header&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose due date. This is required if Account type &amp;quot;Overdue items only&amp;quot; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the “Outstanding” checkbox if you wish to view the outstanding subtotaled by month&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose contra accounts to include/exclude in the report&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose a specific journal type to filter transactions that use it or leave it blank for all journal types&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the “By company ”checkbox to create a consolidated ledger account of multiple companies but transactions grouped by companies&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7298</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7298"/>
		<updated>2021-07-27T13:14:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Ledger Account */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account is a powerful feature where a list of all transactions/items of an account or ledger for a period range can be generated. This report also provides a wide range of filters such as Account Type, Currency, Output format, Journal Type, Tax Categories etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a quick method of checking the balance of any account or ledger and also helps to discover any discrepancies in your entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A basic ledger printout can be generated following the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*The default option is to convert into base currency or a selected currency but you can also choose to leave it as unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by searching. Multiple accounts/ledgers can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transactions/items that you wish to view. By default, &amp;quot;Movements during the period&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Outstanding items at the end of the period&amp;quot; are selected.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally the following filters are available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Leave the &amp;quot;Use financial period from settings&amp;quot; checkbox ticked, or uncheck and enter from and to periods to filter transactions&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose one format – detailed or simplified&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the the &amp;quot;Due Date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dispatch Date&amp;quot; checkboxes if you wish to view the Due date and Dispatch Date columns. The due date and the dispatch date is picked from the voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Billing Analysis columns will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose Yes to force it on all other Balance Forward accounts and No to suppress it on reports of all account types.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick &amp;quot;Per A/c&amp;quot; checkbox if you want printout of each account on a different page. This options forces printing of header after each account.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose stationery – Either pre-printed  option which suppresses the header or blank option which forces the printing of header&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose due date. This is required if Account type &amp;quot;Overdue items only&amp;quot; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the “Outstanding” checkbox if you wish to view the outstanding subtotaled by month&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose contra accounts to include/exclude in the report&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose a specific journal type to filter transactions that use it or leave it blank for all journal types&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the “By company ”checkbox to create a consolidated ledger account of multiple companies but transactions grouped by companies&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7297</id>
		<title>Ledger Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Ledger_Account&amp;diff=7297"/>
		<updated>2021-07-27T12:30:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Ledger Account */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image:LedgerAccount_2011.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ledger Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Ledger Account screen generates a report listing transactions, filtered by account/s or ledger/s, period and various other filters the user can set on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take a quick basic ledger printout follow the steps below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the Ledger Account screen (Menu-&amp;gt; Finance-&amp;gt; Ledger)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Change&amp;quot; button to edit the Finance settings. [[File:Finance settings.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*Enter a period range which will act as the default if no other period or date range is entered in the Ledger Account screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Select only the company/ies that you require. Choosing multiple companies gives a consolidated report.&lt;br /&gt;
#*By default, option is to convert into base currency but you can choose to leave it Unconverted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an account code or a ledger code manually or by using Search. Multiple accounts/ledgers can also be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type of Account transcations/items that you wish to view. By default, Movements during the period and Outstanding items at the end of the period is selected.                [[File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg|center|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to generate the ledger printout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally the following filters are available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Period or Dates:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Leave the &amp;quot;Use financial period from settings&amp;quot; checkbox ticked, or uncheck and enter from and to periods to filter transactions&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose one format – detailed or simplified&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the the &amp;quot;Due Date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Dispatch Date&amp;quot; checkboxes if you wish to view the Due date and Dispatch Date columns. The due date and the dispatch date is picked from the voucher file.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Billing Analysis columns:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Billing Analysis columns will appear automatically on Open Item accounts and Income/Cost accounts (although they are balance forward accounts). Choose Yes to force it on all other Balance Forward accounts and No to suppress it on reports of all account types.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Paging:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick &amp;quot;Per A/c&amp;quot; checkbox if you want printout of each account on a different page. This options forces printing of header after each account.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Stationery:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose stationery – Either pre-printed  option which suppresses the header or blank option which forces the printing of header&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Due Date:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose due date. This is required if Account type &amp;quot;Overdue items only&amp;quot; is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Subtotal by month:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the “Outstanding” checkbox if you wish to view the outstanding subtotaled by month&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Contra Accounts:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose contra accounts to include/exclude in the report&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Journal Types:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Choose a specific journal type to filter transactions that use it or leave it blank for all journal types&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Include:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the &amp;quot;Unposted Vouchers&amp;quot; checkbox to include unposted vouchers in the report&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grouping:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the “By company ”checkbox to create a consolidated ledger account of multiple companies but transactions grouped by companies&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Show Allocation:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Tick the “Show allocation” checkbox to show any allocations (eg invoices paid, receipts etc.) in the voucher details column. This reduces the need to type in details during journal data entry and also provides a wealth of additional information on ledger accounts that could previously only be seen by drilling down to the individual vouchers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Ledger_Account_-_jtypes.jpg&amp;diff=7296</id>
		<title>File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Ledger_Account_-_jtypes.jpg&amp;diff=7296"/>
		<updated>2021-07-27T12:03:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: Joel uploaded a new version of File:Ledger Account - jtypes.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Finance_settings.jpg&amp;diff=7295</id>
		<title>File:Finance settings.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=File:Finance_settings.jpg&amp;diff=7295"/>
		<updated>2021-07-27T11:22:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: Joel uploaded a new version of File:Finance settings.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Sales_FAQ&amp;diff=7267</id>
		<title>Sales FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Sales_FAQ&amp;diff=7267"/>
		<updated>2021-05-27T06:46:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* Will NEOSYS Support staff have access to the server? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=== Can we have a trial version of NEOSYS? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately, we don’t have a provision for free trial &amp;amp; the reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
#It will take as much time &amp;amp; effort to configure &amp;amp; train a full trial system as establishing a live system&lt;br /&gt;
#The system is too complex and requires explanation from us&lt;br /&gt;
#Our system is tried and tested over many years&lt;br /&gt;
#We don’t ask for a huge upfront fee, the 6 months fee is very reasonable for a system with such features, so I suggest we can set it up and we can add a few new features that you would like to add.&lt;br /&gt;
#We are happy to spend more time demonstrating the system to gain users acceptance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS doesn’t have a demonstration version of the software nor a self-implementation manual sufficient to provide a satisfactory evaluation of the software. For most agencies the implementation process is sufficiently involved that it requires specific detailed knowledge to implement the system effectively. Therefore the general practice is for NEOSYS to take full responsibility for the implementation. This achieves optimal results in a reasonably cost effective manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stage 1 - Demo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS normal practice is to provide a series of demonstrations, typically online, until the client is sufficiently confident to commence full implementation. NEOSYS is prepared to spend as much time on this as the client is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stage 2 - Full Evaluation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To perform a full evaluation of the system NEOSYS can provide its normal implementation and training service but for a limited number of users. Full training and implementation is as important for a proper evaluation of NEOSYS as for full operation of the system and NEOSYS does not want evaluation to fail due to insufficient attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The six months initial fee remains to cover NEOSYS cost of doing the full normal implementation and training, even if it is for a limited number of users. Since the number of users is low for the evaluation period then the total cost is low compared to the full cost with all the users. Given that NEOSYS has no initial purchase price, the total cost is reasonable for the work involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why is collection of Company Information important?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales team must collect Company Information to understand the exact requirements of the client and to be a consultant to them on how NEOSYS will help them work efficiently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales team MUST obtain complete company information before sending proposals or doing demos or sending invoices. Although rarely a problem this is to avoid industrial espionage, pointless requests, scammers getting bank details etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Updating Company Information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We cannot always get all company info immediately during initial contact but we MUST use and build up the company info over the initial series of contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In particular the company info must be used and developed during significant sales meeting and a new email sent to sales. The old company info email can be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is NEOSYS software payment and delivery terms===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS payment is required in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New clients must make an initial 6 month commitment by paying the licensing fee for the first 6 months. Asking for payment in advance motivates clients and NEOSYS to work on the project and do not allow the project to fail as it will be a waste of effort and time for both NEOSYS and clients. Our collection of money is actually aimed at ensuring the success of the project not simply to avoid risk to NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further payments can be made on a quarterly basis. The software will be delivered within 2 working days after receipt of payment. Our fee is inclusive of all implementation, training, support and maintenance done remotely. For clients outside Dubai, there will be additional charges if they require onsite implementation and training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding modules to existing clients will be billed pro-rata from installation date and added to their next bill.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note to Sales Team: From 15/4/2015, we have stopped the practice of granting 3 months initial payment to startup companies because the client is not so committed to NEOSYS since in the first three months lots of problems occur. The client MUST be committed to a reasonable period to get things going fine, otherwise we do all the work and then the client discontinues NEOSYS putting all of NEOSYS effort to waste. Now even startup companies MUST pay six months in advance because if the client is committed to getting NEOSYS going then initial difficulties will be overcome whereas if they are not committed then the reverse is true.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What is considered as the installation and billing period/date? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Installation is done within 2 working days after receipt of the first payment(for 6 months) is confirmed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Billing cycle starts from the date we start work which is installation date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is any dead period due to lack of client staff availability or other reasons for one month or more meaning absolutely NO activity either by client or NEOSYS after installation and before going live then the start date of the period of the first renewal of software licence and support fee may be delayed by the duration of the dead period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===When can NEOSYS support staff start installation of NEOSYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below procedure applies to all prospect clients, both new clients as well as existing clients implementing a new NEOSYS module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the client is in a hurry to get going and you have a good indication that the transfer has been done , if it is not received yet, you SHOULD proceed to installation immediately - and confirm date of delivery to the client ASAP. Prospects who make transfer MUST be rewarded by fast high priority responses from NEOSYS sales team regarding deliver dates so our support team looks GOOD FROM THE START.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have a good indication that the transfer has been made then you SHOULD NOT proceed to installation and MUST NOT inform the client of a delivery date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is unlikely that prospects would literally fake documents but if you have not gained a good solid feeling about the client during the proposal phase then you SHOULD delay installation until payment is actually received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A good indication of transfer is:&lt;br /&gt;
*A clear confirmation from their bank that payment has been made&lt;br /&gt;
*A copy of their own instruction TO the bank is acceptable if it has clearly been stamped by a good payment agent&lt;br /&gt;
*A cheque deposit copy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carefully check all the details are correct as per the proforma invoice&lt;br /&gt;
*bank account number&lt;br /&gt;
*amount&lt;br /&gt;
*currency&lt;br /&gt;
*date&lt;br /&gt;
*all other details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A good payment agent is:&lt;br /&gt;
*well known widely multi-national bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A poor transfer agent is:&lt;br /&gt;
*a money transfer service&lt;br /&gt;
*a minor bank that it not widely multi-national&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is NEOSYS compatible with Mac/Android?===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. See [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Technical_/_Hardware_requirements#NEOSYS_Software_Browser_and_OS_Requirements NEOSYS Software Browser and OS requirements]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the minimum period for subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum period for subscription is 3 months after the initial period of 6 months.&lt;br /&gt;
=== What is the notice period for termination of NEOSYS services?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no notice period.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Will NEOSYS refund the advance payment in case of termination of services?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No. There are no refunds for initial or quarterly fees paid in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
===Why does NEOSYS not have a Service-Level Agreement?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS does not have an SLA for the following reasons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# We are not clear what the terms of such an agreement could be and such agreement is likely not suitable for our type of service when the facts are examined.&lt;br /&gt;
# SLA is appropriate to protect the client in case they are making a major long term commitment which is not the case with NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
# NEOSYS has not previously been asked for one beyond what it includes in the existing agreement&lt;br /&gt;
# A strict SLA with formal response times and penalties would be costly to operate and this would show in increased cost to use NEOSYS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the client wonders then how NEOSYS works without such an agreement, then consider the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# NEOSYS contract is short term and client is easily able to exit in case of poor service.&lt;br /&gt;
# NEOSYS is naturally MOTIVATED to provide good service due to ease with which the client can exit.&lt;br /&gt;
# NEOSYS does not charge up front for training and implementation and therefore is highly committed to a successful implementation.&lt;br /&gt;
# NEOSYS servers have had almost no down time in the last 10 years. References can be provided to back this up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case the client still wishes an SLA agreement to be signed then they should provide a draft of what terms they are looking for.&lt;br /&gt;
===What happens after contract with NEOSYS is terminated?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#NEOSYS locks data entry for future periods.&lt;br /&gt;
#If installed on your own server NEOSYS allows accessing old data and to edit this data for 1 year. Any support required in this time will be billable.&lt;br /&gt;
#If installed on NEOSYS servers you will not have any access to your old data and NEOSYS may delete it and all backups after 30 days unless you choose to take a single user contract with NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
=== How will the data be handed over to the client after the end of contract? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client users are responsible for taking soft copy of the data from NEOSYS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php/General_FAQ#How_can_we_export_data_from_NEOSYS.3F How to export data from NEOSYS]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Where is NEOSYS hosted? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS can be hosted on NEOSYS servers or on a dedicated server at the client&#039;s premises. We highly recommend hosting on NEOSYS initially as it is a great way to start immediately, without wasting time on acquiring a server. Starting on NEOSYS servers is instant and switching to your server, if and when you acquire one, is simple and free too. Also hosting on NEOSYS in-house server is cheaper in terms of cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What will be the cost if we maintain the data in our server instead of hosting on NEOSYS servers? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If NEOSYS is installed and hosted on NEOSYS servers, we provide a discount. If NEOSYS is installed on the client&#039;s server then the discount does not apply&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What will be the cost for setting up a historical NEOSYS database?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The client is given read only access to the historical database. This is to ensure that users do not create or update documents even by mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There will be no additional cost for setting up the historical database if NEOSYS is installed on client&#039;s server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If NEOSYS is installed and hosted on NEOSYS server, then there is a cost of USD 50 per month to maintain the historical database. Running an extra database for the historical purpose will require NEOSYS to run extra processes on the server and also do a backup of the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Who will administrate the system? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS Support staff will administrate the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Will NEOSYS Support staff have access to the server? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. NEOSYS support agreement is conditional on being able to access your server at all times. See [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Letter_to_obtain_agreement_of_client_IT_staff_to_provide_remote_support Agreement with Client IT to provide remote support]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We will sign a Confidentiality Agreement with you to assure you that your data is safe and will not be shared with anyone under any circumstance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Is it really OK for NEOSYS to have access to data?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#24x7 access to client systems is a common practice in the computer industry for complex systems where urgent support may be required&lt;br /&gt;
#Data theft is present not just with 24x7 access, but it could be at any time. NEOSYS has various security measures to mitigate the risk&lt;br /&gt;
#It is virtually impossible to create a system that one can guarantee that nobody except the users have access to the data&lt;br /&gt;
#If a situation arises where integration is required then programmers will require access to data to understand user requirements&lt;br /&gt;
#NEOSYS Support staff sign Non-Disclosure agreements assuring that client data always remains confidential&lt;br /&gt;
#We expect you to trust our professionalism like all our clients&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What about NEOSYS and Security?===&lt;br /&gt;
Most of our clients have NEOSYS installed inside their office only our smaller clients have it installed on NEOSYS servers. Our clients are extremely security conscious and we know all about how to ensure security&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Key points about NEOSYS security:&lt;br /&gt;
#Dedicated server: Ensures that it won’t be shared with other applications that might require several access to the server. This will help NEOSYS to provide the needed services without need of any other IT person to access the server.&lt;br /&gt;
#Confidentiality Agreement: NEOSYS will sign a confidentiality agreement between with the client to assure them that their data is safe with us, and will never be shared with anyone under any circumstance.&lt;br /&gt;
#HTTPS: NEOSYS Users use HTTPS to access the system, which is more secure compared to HTTP&lt;br /&gt;
#Multi-level permissions: Configure and manipulate access for different users based on permissions given to them e.g. User A has read only access whereas User B has read and write access, User A has access to Media only, but User B has access to Media and Finance etc.&lt;br /&gt;
#Warnings and email notifications with IP information are sent to management and NEOSYS support in case of password reset attempts. This will help identify malicious attempts to access NEOSYS&lt;br /&gt;
#Access Restriction by IP number: If client wishes to allow access to NEOSYS from outside the office then we can restrict from exactly where this is allowed&lt;br /&gt;
#Encryption: The raw data is encrypted and can only be accessed by NEOSYS software&lt;br /&gt;
#Access is audited: User info with IP information is logged whenever a user logs in and uses NEOSYS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What are the benefits of using NEOSYS Finance module?===&lt;br /&gt;
#Many accounting systems cannot tell you what items WERE outstanding at some point in the past and can only tell you what items ARE outstanding now, whereas NEOSYS allows you to get outstanding items &amp;quot;as at&amp;quot; some point in the past. Since auditors need to know what items were outstanding at the end of the year, the usual situation for non-NEOSYS finance departments is to be totally in the dark finance system-wise for part or most of January because this issue effectively forces them to not open the new year until almost everything in the old year has been posted whereas in NEOSYS you can start posting on day 1 of the new year without closing the old year.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Accounting_entries_created_by_the_Production_system&amp;diff=7240</id>
		<title>Accounting entries created by the Production system</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Accounting_entries_created_by_the_Production_system&amp;diff=7240"/>
		<updated>2021-03-29T07:59:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: /* PO is converted to a PI when there is no estimate */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==What are the different journal entries created by the NEOSYS job system==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Listed below are scenarios where journal entries are made by the Production system in NEOSYS finance. Each scenario also specifies which Journal Type to check, to find the respective journal entries. All actions cause generation of journal entries, besides the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Creating an estimate on a job - raises no journal entries. (regardless of whether the job has a PO, a PO has been converted to a PI or if there is no PO or PI at all)&lt;br /&gt;
#Creating a PO on a job which has no estimate or has an estimate but is not invoiced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All income and cost accounts affected in the journal entries are determined by the job type/s per line of the estimate and PO or on the job file. If there are no job types set per line on the estimate and PO, then the system picks up the main job type on the job file – however if there is no job type set on the job file then the system will not allow you to save the estimate and PO without setting job types on the lines. You have an option to set different job types per line of the document which thereby indicates that a particular line would affect a particular income or cost A/c (which are configured in the job types file).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS does not book purchase orders into finance unless and until the invoice is raised to the client. Purchase orders by themselves have NO effect in finance. Only once an invoice is raised to the client on a job, then its purchase orders (if any PO remain outstanding i.e. without supplier invoices) are registered into finance. Not to do so would mean that the profit and loss statement will unreasonably show only income. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rule of modern cost accounting is&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; &amp;quot;You shall not post income without simultaneously posting actual OR *best estimate of* cost&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
To post income at the time of raising invoices to client, and cost at the time of receiving the supplier invoice is an old fashioned procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PO (Purchase Order) to PI (Purchase Invoice) conversion merely means entering the supplier invoice details on the PO (i.e. change the status of the PO to Invoice and enter the supplier invoice number and date in the relevant fields).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In all scenarios we talk about an estimate and PO on the same job even thought it might not be stated everywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What are the journal entries created upon invoicing an estimate?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look in Journal type: Job Invoices/Credit Notes (INP) {the journal name might be different at some client installations}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoicing an estimate could basically involve the following scenarios:&lt;br /&gt;
====Estimate is invoiced, but there is no PO on the job====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this scenario as there is no estimated cost, the system goes ahead and invoices the client with the corresponding entry affecting the respective income A/c&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/c      DR  (amount taken from the estimate)&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/c      CR  (amount taken from the estimate)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Estimate is invoiced and there is a PO on the job or the PO has already been converted to a PI====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is one of the most common scenarios and is highly recommended as a practise. It is recommended that even though you might not have the exact cost, an approximate cost must be put on the PO for the purpose of invoicing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/c     DR  (amount taken from the estimate)&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/c     CR  (amount taken from the estimate)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       DR  (amount taken from the PO)&lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        CR  (amount taken from the PO)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Estimate is invoiced as a credit note (i.e. negative amount estimate)====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As NEOSYS does not allow you to modify an invoiced estimate; you will need to create a estimate with a negative amount to account for a reversal of the invoice (full credit note) or prepare a partial credit note. Creating a negative estimate / credit note to the client DOES NOT reverse the PO provision and you will have to go to the PO and mark it as cancelled for the reversal to be created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Income A/c     DR  (amount taken from the estimate)&lt;br /&gt;
 Client A/c     CR  (amount taken from the estimate)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What are the journal entries created when issuing a PO, cancelling a PO and converting PO to PI?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look in Journal type: Job Purchase Invoices/Credit Notes (PUR) {the journal name might be different at some client installations}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even though the PO to PI conversion does not involve a change in the amount, NEOSYS still does a reversal of the earlier amount from the WIP and the Cost A/c and again re-enters the same amount in the Cost A/c – this is to keep an audit trial of estimated cost v/s actual cost received and auditors really love this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PO is issued after the estimate is invoiced====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following entries are generated when a PO is issued after the estimate has been invoiced. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        CR  (amount taken from the PO)&lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       DR  (amount taken from the PO)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PO is converted to a PI after the estimate is invoiced====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common scenario where you receive the supplier invoice after invoicing the client (in this case we assume that the PO already existed when you invoiced the client and the provision for the cost was made at that time – refer to estimate invoicing scenario (b). This case could involve either the PI being of the same amount as the PO or a different one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        DR  (initial provision cost reversed)&lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       CR  (initial provision cost reversed)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       DR  (with the new/actual cost)&lt;br /&gt;
 Supplier A/c   CR  (with the new/actual cost)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PO is converted to a PI before the estimate is invoiced====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned in estimate invoicing scenario (b), there could be a case where you have to convert the PO to a PI before you invoice an estimate. The following entry would be created in this case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        DR (amount taken from the PO/PI)&lt;br /&gt;
 Supplier A/c   CR (amount taken from the PO/PI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PO is converted to a PI when there is no estimate====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that at the time of recording the supplier invoice there is no estimate on the job which could be due to many reasons – most common of them is that the client has given a verbal go ahead or the job is an FOC one or the job is an internal one and isn’t to be billed to anyone. Below entries are no different from entering a PI in the same circumstance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *** MANUAL ENTRY NEEDS TO BE DONE TO TRANSFER THE AMT FROM WIP A/C TO COST A/C. &lt;br /&gt;
 WIP  A/c      DR (amount taken from the PO/PI)&lt;br /&gt;
 Supplier A/c   CR (amount taken from the PO/PI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to [[Accounting_entries_created_by_the_Production_system#Handling_manual_entries_Jobs_with_internal_cost_and_supplier_invoice_but_no_client_invoice | Handling manual entries for jobs with internal cost and supplier invoice but no client invoice]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PO is modified after the estimate is invoiced====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As already stated in the introduction, creating PO’s or modifying them before you invoice an estimate causes no journal entry. However as soon as an estimate is invoiced, any modifications you do to the PO (even text modifications) causes a journal entry which reverses the earlier created provision (when you invoiced the client) and puts back the new/provision cost back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        DR  (initial provision cost reversed)&lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       CR  (initial provision cost reversed)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c	DR  (with the new provision cost)&lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        CR  (with the new provision cost)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PO is cancelled after the estimate is invoiced====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to the above point a PO can be cancelled after you invoice an estimate and the system will create a reversal entry to cancel the provision which was made at the time of invoicing the estimate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 WIP A/c        DR  (initial provisioned cost reversed)&lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c       CR  (initial provisioned cost reversed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===After invoicing the client, what are the different entries when the purchase invoice is different from the purchase order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Scenario 1 - What are the entries created when the purchase invoice is slightly more than the purchase order (after invoicing the client)?====&lt;br /&gt;
Eg. Purchase order was for 5000 AED, but the Purchase invoice was received for 5500 AED:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:job_entries.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Scenario 2 - What are the entries created when the purchase invoice is slightly less than the purchase order (after invoicing the client)?====&lt;br /&gt;
Eg. Purchase order was for 5000 AED, but the Purchase invoice was received for 4500 AED:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:job_entries2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Handling manual entries Jobs with internal cost and supplier invoice but no client invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For scenarios where a job is completed and closed with internal cost(PO-&amp;gt;PI) only and no client invoice is raised, manual entry MUST be done in journal type: Job Purchase Invoices/Credit Notes (PUR) to transfer the amount from Wip A/c to Cost A/C. If not the balance of WIP will continue to reflect as WIP in Balance Sheet but in reality it is cost incurred for the company.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 WIP  A/c   CR (amount taken from the PO/PI)&lt;br /&gt;
 Cost A/c   DR (amount taken from the PO/PI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===After invoicing a client, how does updating a PO or converting a PO to a PI, affect which period entries are automatically generated in?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Updating PO:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two pairs of entries that are generated when updating a PO, entries that reverse the previous entries and the new (actual) entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reversing entries are generated in the same period as the entries they are reversing. Whereas the new actual entries are generated in the period, defined by the date the order is reissued. (Can be past, present or future) See below example, where an estimate has already been invoiced, a PO already issued in Period 1/2018 and is being update in the period 2/2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate invoice, PO issued in Period 1/2018:&lt;br /&gt;
Cost A/c DR   +500&lt;br /&gt;
WIP A/c  CR   -500&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Updating the PO in Period 2/2018 or when order reissued date:&lt;br /&gt;
Cost A/c CR   -500   - (Reversing entry in Period 1/2018)&lt;br /&gt;
WIP  A/c DR   +500   - (Reversing entry in Period 1/2018)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Cost A/c DR   +400   - (New actual entry in Period 2/2018)&lt;br /&gt;
WIP  A/c CR   -400   - (New actual entry in Period 2/2018)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Converting PO to PI:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the other hand, when converting a PO to PI, the reversing entries and the new (actual) entries are generated in the same period, defined by the date the supplier invoice was received. See below example, where estimate has already been invoice, a PO issued in 1/2018 and is being converted to a PI in the period 2/2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate invoice, PO issued in Period 1/2018:&lt;br /&gt;
Cost A/c   DR   +500&lt;br /&gt;
WIP  A/c   CR   -500&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
PO converted to PI, in period 2/2018 or when supplier invoice received:&lt;br /&gt;
Cost A/c      CR - 500 - (Reversing entry in Period 2/2018)&lt;br /&gt;
WIP  A/c      DR + 500 - (Reversing entry in Period 2/2018)&lt;br /&gt;
Supplier A/c  CR - 400 - (New actual in Period 2/2018)&lt;br /&gt;
Cost  A/c     DR + 400 - (New actual in Period 2/2018)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Things to remember:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an estimate is invoiced, the period in which the automatic Production Invoice journal entries appear will depend on the date you enter in the New Invoice screen, not the existing date/period in the estimate file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Similarly, when converting a PO to PI, the period in which the automatic Purchase Invoice journal entries appear will depend on the supplier invoice date you input, not the order date.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Finance_FAQ&amp;diff=7227</id>
		<title>Finance FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://userwiki.neosys.com/index.php?title=Finance_FAQ&amp;diff=7227"/>
		<updated>2020-12-28T07:22:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Joel: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How do I allocate open item amounts in NEOSYS?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===While entering a journal===&lt;br /&gt;
While entering a journal entry in the ALLOC VCHS Column hit F7 Key and it will pop-up list of allocatable items. Allocate the amount with the correct voucher no. and amount and click on OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===By Vouchers Allocation file===&lt;br /&gt;
Once the journal is posted without allocation you can only allocate from the Voucher Screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers Allocation. Enter the account number or hit the F7 key on the Selected Account(s) field and select the relevant account from the particular subsidiary chart. Click OK and the system will popup the Voucher Allocation page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account selected is a DEBITS outstanding type account (i.e. Trade Debtors), then all the allocable/unallocated CREDIT items (i.e. Receipts, Credit Notes etc.) will show up. Click on any item you wish to allocate Debit items against. After you click you will get a list of all DEBIT allocable/unallocated items which you can now select to be allocated against the CREDIT item you earlier selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Incase you have a selected a CREDITS outstanding type account (i.e. Trade Creditors), then the opposite happens i.e. DEBIT items show first (Payments, Debit Notes etc) and if you click on any of these items you can allocate them against CREDIT outstanding items. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For accounts that have neither CREDIT or DEBIT type selected, the CREDIT items show first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why can I not see ALL allocable items in the Allocation screen?===&lt;br /&gt;
Open item accounts with a lot of transactions might face this issue. The allocation screen cannot handle an unlimited number of entries so it shows the oldest first and omits the newest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I deallocate already allocated vouchers?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Vouchers &amp;gt; Vouchers file/Deallocation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile-deallocation.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the Journal type and enter the voucher number. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;As you enter the voucher number system will show the all the vouchers allocated on the bottom right to that voucher.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Deallocation button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherfile-deallocate.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the Vouchers you want to deallocate and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
#As you click OK system will reconfirm your move by giving a pop up &amp;quot;Ok to deallocate now?&amp;quot; click on OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherconf.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will see an another pop up &amp;quot;Deallocation Completed&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:voucherOKconf.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter supplier invoices for non media / non job items?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In due course of business you might need to purchase items which are not media nor job related. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only way to enter this is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entry / Query.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select JOURNAL (JOU) type and enter the relevant purchase entry here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enter supplier credit notes for non media / non job items?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only way to enter this is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Menu &amp;gt; Finance &amp;gt; Journals &amp;gt; Journal Entry / Query.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select JOURNAL (JOU) type and enter the reversal / credit note entry (exact reversal of the supplier invoice you entered initially with the particular amount).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I cancel an already issued/posted Payment/Receipt?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no way to delete any journal in NEOSYS, especially the Payment Voucher, to maintain record for auditors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to cancel an already posted Payment/Receipt voucher:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Deallocate any items which you allocated at the time of entering the voucher.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(This frees up the Payment/Receipt voucher to be allocated against a reversal entry and also frees up the allocated item (Supplier/Client Invoice) to be allocated against another voucher)&lt;br /&gt;
#Do a reversal entry of exactly the same Payment/Receipt voucher and allocated the same to the actual entry. Thereafter you can enter the new Payment/Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What happens if I post the same supplier invoice twice?== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows the same supplier invoice to be posted in two different ledgers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, a warning message (shown below) is displayed, when you try to enter a purchase invoice number which is already existing in the same supplier a/c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:duplicatepostingwarning.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I allocate to unposted vouchers?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS allows allocation to UNPOSTED vouchers (e.g. receipts to unposted invoices) but you can only save the batch (or receipts) as unposted until the unposted vouchers (invoices) have actually been posted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While you are allocating you can see which vouchers are unposted because there is a * in the reference number. There is no way to avoid showing unposted vouchers at the moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I allocate vouchers within a batch?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can allocate a voucher to another voucher which are in the same batch. In order to do so, post the batch and use the Voucher Allocation screen to allocate to the correct voucher.&lt;br /&gt;
For example an Invoice and a Credit Note can be in the same batch and they can be allocated to each other after posting, via the Voucher Allocation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I view a voucher file before the batch is posted?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, you can view voucher files by saving a journal batch as unposted/unposted without validation, then clicking on the link in the Voucher column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open the voucher that the system wants to generate. The actual voucher number will not be generated until the batch is posted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a journal batch cannot be saved due to an error, then you can save the batch by choosing &amp;quot;Save as Unposted Batch WITHOUT VALIDATION&amp;quot; option, then view the voucher file and possibly find the cause of the error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I sort the Journal Audit Report according to Invoice Number?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The journal audit report is ordered as per the date and time of posting as per audit rules. Hence It cannot be sorted on any other fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a simple list of invoices is required then please use the list of invoices from the media or job invoice menus. (See [[List of Invoices]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I amend / repost journal entries?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Posted entries cannot be modified except by NEOSYS under certain circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS has a policy not to do corrections to postings except in special circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Corrections to opening balances and opening items since those are a once off issue.&lt;br /&gt;
#Amendments requested by top management for exceptional adjustment of accounts that cannot be handled in any other way&lt;br /&gt;
#Vouchers are missing from posted batches. See [http://techwiki.neosys.com/index.php/Troubleshooting_NEOSYS_Finance_System#Voucher_number_missing_from_posted_batches Missing vouchers in posted batches]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General errors in postings such as the financial period, account number and amounts must be corrected by reversal and correct journals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The repercussions of granting permission to edit/repost journals would be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#NEOSYS Financial Module can no longer be trusted if postings are subject to modification&lt;br /&gt;
#It is not common practice to do such manipulations&lt;br /&gt;
#It can lead to possible errors in numbers&lt;br /&gt;
#Staff can become complacent and careless while posting entries and frequently ask for this permission&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, restricting users from editing/reposting journal entries promotes a more healthy and vigilant working environment where users verify each journal entry before posting it which effectively leads to good accounting practices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The NEOSYS software for reposting journals appears to but does NOT work for posting which have already been allocated. It creates cross check balance errors in the open item accounts. To avoid this, any allocations can be de-allocated ESPECIALLY when the account number is being changed or the amount is being reduced or the currency changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information can be changed by authorised users even after posting. In the Voucher File and therefore on the detail ledger&lt;br /&gt;
account/statement: Date, Due Date, Despatch Date, Reference, Details, Analysis Code and allocation. See [[Finance_FAQ#What_can_I_change_on_the_finance_vouchers_even_after_posting.3F|What can I change in the finance voucher after posting?]]. Unfortunately the journal printout is unchanged by any amendments and remains as it was entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I print all accounts in one trial balance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print all accounts in a single trial balance you must print the General Ledger (GL) and select SHOW ALL SUBLEDGERS option. You can also make use of the SHORT VERSION option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:gl-printout.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I  issue Debit/Credit Note in Finance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Journal Setup, enter Voucher Description as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot; and select voucher style from the drop-down menu as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; entered in the Voucher Description is used to give two alternate names for the same heading depending on whether the main account is debited or credited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Journal setup.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, for a voucher entered for this journal type, when the main account is DEBITED, when you click on the Print/Send button, the document generated will say &amp;quot;DEBIT NOTE&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Debit note.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when the main account is CREDITED, when you click on the Print/Send button, the document generated will say &amp;quot;CREDIT NOTE&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Credit note.jpg|1000px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same trick is used for &amp;quot;Invoice/Credit Note&amp;quot;, ie, simply enter Voucher Description as &amp;quot;Invoice/Credit Note&amp;quot; and select voucher style from the drop-down menu as &amp;quot;Debit/Credit Note&amp;quot;. Depending on whether the main account is debited or credited, the Journal Print document will show either &amp;quot;Invoice&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Credit Note&amp;quot; as the heading. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is revaluation handled in NEOSYS? ==&lt;br /&gt;
When a voucher is allocated, NEOSYS automatically checks if there is a difference in base amounts and records the exchange difference by either creating/posting a revaluation voucher or amending one of the vouchers to record the exchange gain/loss.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When does NEOSYS automatically create and post a revaluation voucher? ===&lt;br /&gt;
A Revaluation voucher is created when a user allocates two posted vouchers using the &#039;Voucher Allocation&#039; feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When does NEOSYS amend the latest voucher to record the exchange gain/loss? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vouchers are amended when a user allocates one or many posted vouchers to a unposted journal within the &#039;Journals&#039; screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Which period will the revaluation voucher be posted into? ===&lt;br /&gt;
The RV voucher is posted into the same period as the allocation period. There are three options in Voucher Allocation page to set the allocation period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Current period&#039; - The allocation and RV voucher will use the current calendar period.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Use Settings from above&#039; - The allocation and RV voucher will use the latest period from the range of periods set in the Settings. For example, if range is 1/2020 - 12/2020, the RV voucher and allocation will use 12/2020.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Backdated as far as possible&#039; - The latest voucher period out of the two vouchers will be used by the RV voucher. However, if that period is closed, then use next open period. For example, if a JOU batch is posted in 1/2020 and the corresponding REC in 2/2020, then the allocation period used will be 2/2020. If the periods have been closed till 3/2020 in Finance, then the RV voucher would be posted into the next open period, 4/2020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the “RV” allocation without a voucher number that shows in the Voucher File?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An allocation stating RV without any voucher number is caused by a revaluation process on open item accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revaluation of open item accounts is performed by calculating the base adjustment on each outstanding foreign currency item and posting ONE RV voucher PER ACCOUNT for the total. The RV voucher is allocated to the individual vouchers but unusually the voucher number does not show. The system was initially designed this way in order to avoid a potentially very long list of allocations on RV vouchers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lack of voucher number makes it hard to verify the allocation is correct, however you can trust that it is correct if the usual chain of checks and balances provided by the principle of the double entry proves the whole system is ok.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is planned to change NEOSYS to show RV voucher numbers in all cases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does voucher allocation shows nothing to allocate when there are debits and credits on the account?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In  some abnormal circumstances there may be items outstanding on an account which have base amount outstanding but no currency amount outstanding. NEOSYS allocation procedure works only on outstanding currency amounts so these items cannot be allocated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solution: Run the revaluation program. Its job is to amend the outstanding base amount to agree with the outstanding currency amount at the prevailing exchange rate. Since the outstanding currency amount is zero, it will amend the outstanding base amount to be zero also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is a revaluation journal posted in the prior year when I allocated some vouchers in the prior year?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It doesn&#039;t matter what time and date is on the clock when the allocation is done since you could be be working on 2017 accounts in 2018 and this is normal practice of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It matters what SETTINGS and options you choose when doing the allocation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The allocation is done in a certain period, and any revaluation journal required and generated due to that allocation, is generated in the same period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the allocation/revaluation period cannot be up to the closed period in the Company File, so allocated vouchers in a closed year will be allocated/revalued in the first open period - or the open period that you select.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which accounts can be revalued?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revaluation is only performed on foreign currency tangible assets and liabilities accounts, which are subject to changing exchange rates and have a value and therefore can be revalued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tangible assets and liability accounts represent real value such as debtors, creditors and bank accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whereas P&amp;amp;L accounts are merely totals of historical movements, they do not represent any asset or liability that has a value and therefore cannot be revalued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is closing account missing for some Profit &amp;amp; Loss accounts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Retained Earnings account is the &amp;quot;closing account&amp;quot; of all the P&amp;amp;L accounts. This is a real account in the master chart of accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the closing A/C code is mentioned in the closing A/C field then all accounts under that ledger will automatically take the closing A/C detail even if the closing A/C code is not explicitly mentioned in each account.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PLclosingaccount.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What can I change on the finance vouchers even after posting?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finance users can amend various fields in Voucher File after the entry is posted. On saving the changes Amended will appear on the voucher file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following fields can be amended: - Reference, Date, Due Date, Despatch Date, Details, Deallocate and Analysis Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:amend.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I stop users from posting journal entries to an Account in Finance?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding &amp;quot;(Stop)&amp;quot; on an account line in Chart of Accounts stops users from posting journal entries to the stopped account. If users wish to post journal entries to a stopped account remove &amp;quot;(Stop)&amp;quot; from the account line in Chart of Accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
Users can take ledger printout for stopped accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:StopCofA.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How does NEOSYS handle base and real currency balances?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to understand NEOSYS is to imagine that it keeps completely separate double entry accounting systems for each currency and consolidates them on the fly to produce reports and ledgers for all currencies consolidated. It is easy to use NEOSYS menu settings to print reports and ledgers for individual currencies - ignoring all other currencies, or for all currencies consolidated - which is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every NEOSYS journal line has a currency code and amount. Each journal line also has (in parallel to the currency code and amount) the base currency equivalent amount of the currency amount. The base currency equivalent amount can be considered to be our best &amp;quot;valuation&amp;quot; of the currency amount when expressed in terms of the currency of our base currency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most cases the operator only has to enter the currency code and amount and the NEOSYS system uses its internal semi-static exchange rate files to determine the base currency equivalent amount or &amp;quot;value&amp;quot;. In some cases however, for example, if there is no standard semi-static internal exchange rate for a currency, the operator is required to enter the base currency equivalent amount/value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS keep the base currency balance separate per currency and consolidates them on the fly to produce consolidated reports for &amp;quot;all currencies converted to base currency&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS treats journals in the currency of the base currency as just another currency and not as some special currency. For example, if the base currency happens to be USD then NEOSYS can tell you a) the balances of each currency converted to USD separately b) the balance of all currencies converted to USD c) the balance of real USD excluding all other currencies. This is particular useful when the base currency is not the main operational currency of the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does NEOSYS Exchange Gains/Loss account not agree exactly with my auditor&#039;s parallel system?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a client finds that the Exchange Gain/Loss account balances as per another parallel system is not in agreement with NEOSYS then they must sit and reconcile the two and notify NEOSYS support of anything that they discover is wrong in NEOSYS so that  can fix it - otherwise we remain confident in NEOSYS without proof to the contrary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Locate the incorrect transactions: Take a ledger account of the Exchange Gain/Loss account in order to locate the incorrect transaction. Open the voucher that made this entry and look at all the base conversions on that voucher. If the exchange rate used was wrong, that could be the reason for the discrepancy.&lt;br /&gt;
#Try running the NEOSYS revaluation program on the journals menu. This will ensure that the NOMINAL base currency balance in all accounts is in exact agreement with the REAL currency balance in those accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#Rounding rules can be different in different systems so that may account for 1 or 2 cent differences per transaction and this can can add up to greater differences in total.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What do I do if I am not happy with the balance of an account?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The balance of any account is, under all circumstances, simply the arithmetic total of the journal lines posted to it, therefore self evidently, if you are not happy with the balance of an account, you must use one of the options on the NEOSYS JOURNAL MENU to post additional journal lines until the total of the journal lines for the desired account gives the balance that you desire for the account. There is no way to amend the balance of an account other than using one of the NEOSYS JOURNAL MENU options to post additional journals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not adjust the balance of one account only?==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to understand why this is not allowed you need to know the fundamental and unbreakable rule of double entry accounting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 THE ARITHMETIC TOTAL OF THE BALANCES OF ALL ACCOUNTS MUST AT ALL TIMES BE EQUAL TO ZERO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NEOSYS, the rule of double entry accounting is applied separately per currency. Therefore the total of base currency must equal zero at all times and the total of each individual currency must be zero at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the above rule, adjusting the balance of one account alone is not allowed because it would break the rule ... because (obviously) it would result in the arithmetic total of all account balances no longer being zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect of the rule is that you cannot ever adjust the balance of one account without simultaneously making an equal an opposite adjustment in some other account or accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What if I cannot determine any account to make an opposite adjustment into?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The opposite account is often some kind of a &amp;quot;write off&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;exchange gain/loss&amp;quot; account but it could be to any account depending on the case. Think long and hard about it and if you are still not clear then you must consult an accountant to help you determine which account to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for NEOSYS revaluation journals the &amp;quot;exchange gain/loss&amp;quot; account, defined in the Company File, is used automatically as the opposite adjustment account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to correct wrong currencies present in NEOSYS reconciliation reports==  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NEOSYS reconciliation is strictly per currency amounts posted and does not provide any base currency reporting therefore any false currency balances (eg USD posted into an EUR bank account) must be corrected by journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is VAT column not appearing in journal entry page though it has been set up in Journal Setup?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is necessary to put Tax Reg. No . on the Company File in order to get the VAT column in the journal entry page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why do VAT amounts stay in originating company accounts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The VAT amount, in an intercompany posting, will remain in the originating company account and only the NET amount will be posted to the other company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This ensures that when you print/export the journals for one company, the total of the VAT column agrees with the VAT report for that company, this helps make auditing easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also if you issue an invoice for company X then even if, for example, you post the income of that invoice to another company, the VAT on the invoice still has to be shown under the company of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get a break down of the WIP/ACCRUAL?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want a break-down of a control account you look in the subsidiary ledger. (This is the whole point of having a subsidiary ledgers in the first place)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the subsidiary ledger happens to be open item ledger like client/supplier/wip/accrual then you can use the NEOSYS AGED BALANCE REPORT which can show you the breakdown either per account or per open item/translation &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:agedbalrpt.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why am I unable to find/print journal batches created using Recurring Journals?==&lt;br /&gt;
Journal batches created using Recurring Journals Table do not have a period in the batch heading because multiple periods may be posted in the same batch. For such batches, only the period of the first voucher in that batch (in the case of recurring journals this is the earliest period in the batch) will be shown in any journal batch lookup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to lookup or print such batches you need to enter the earliest period in that batch in the period filter. This holds true for any kind of batch lookup or printing like Journal Audit/Export, List of Unposted Journals etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the heading of Journal Audit/Export print shows batch number and the period as blank (highlighted in the below screenshot) for a journal batch created using Recurring Journals Table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:recurring.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The batch shown above contains an entry for period 2/2016. But if 2/2016 is entered in the period filter in Journal Audit/Export, this will give an error message &amp;quot;No journals found.&amp;quot; as shown below. This is because there is currently no Recurring Journal batch whose earliest period is 2/2016. The earliest period of the batch shown above, i.e. 1/2016 must be entered in the period filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:recurring2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to do depreciation using Recurring Journals==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring Journal entries can be used to post depreciation periodically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown in the example below, Start date can be set as the beginning of a month. Details field will carry the description of the Asset. Frequency and Number of Instalments can be set as per company policy. Depending on the Total amount and Number of Instalments NEOSYS automatically calculates the Instalment and Remainder amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Debit the Depreciation Account (PL ledger) and credit the Accumulated Depreciation Account (Fixed Assets Ledger).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On posting the Recurring journal other field details (Date Last Posted and Amount Posted to Date) appear automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before Posting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dep.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After Posting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dep2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is ledger printout truncating account name from voucher details field==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account name is mentioned in the details column of the voucher, the system will automatically drop the account name from the details column while taking the account&#039;s ledger printout. This is done because there is no need to show the same account name over and over on all rows of the report when the account name is already mentioned in the report heading.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Joel</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>